Digital PDFs

AA-HD97A-TK

December 1986

501 pages

Original

16MB

Document:	VAXmate Users Guide Volume 2 Sep1986
Order Number:	AA-HD97A-TK
Revision:
Pages:	501
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/vaxmate/AA-HD97A-TK_VAXmate_Users_Guide_Volume_2_Sep1986.pdf

OCR Text

AA-HD97A-TK

User's Guide
Volume 2

tnate
User's Guide
Volume 2

First Printing, September 1986

© Digital Equipment Corporation 1986. All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may only be used
or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
Several Program Information Files and device drivers are supplied for use with non-DIGITAL
products and referenced in this document. These are provided on an "AS IS" basis
without any warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied.
FCC Notice: This equipment generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy. The
equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such a commercial environment. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case, the user, at his owu
expense, may be required to take measures to correct the interference.
MS-DOS and Multiplan are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

mmaamo

DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-lO
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

MASSBUS
PDP
PlOS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS
RSX
UNIBUS

VAX
VAXmate
VMS
VT
VT220
VT240
Work Processor

The postage-paid READER'S COMMENTS form at the front of this document requests the
user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future documentation.
Documentation produced by the Personal Computer Systems Group, Littleton, MA. Book
production was done by Educational Services Media Communications Group in Bedford, MA.
Printed in U.SA.

AD-HOg? A-T1

mate

User's Guide
Volume 2 Change Pages

software

First Printing, January 1987

© Digital Equipment Corporation 1986, 1987. All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may only be used or
copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
Several Program Information Files and device dtivers are supplied for use with non-DIGITAL
products and referenced in this document. These are provided on an "AS IS" basis without any
warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied.
FCC Notice: This equipment generates, uses, and my emit radio frequency energy. The
equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing
device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference in which case, the user, at his own expense, may be
required to take measures to correct the interference.
MS-DOS and Multiplan are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
dBASE is a trademark of Ashton-Tate, Inc.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines, Inc.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

mamaama

DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-l0
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

MASSBUS
PDP
PIOS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS
RSX

VAX
VAXmate
VMS

VT
VT220
VT240
Work Processor

UNIBUS

Documentation produced by the Personal Computer Systems Group, Littleton, MA. Book
production was done by Educational Services Media Communications Group in Bedford, MA.
Printed in U.S.A.

Contents

Preface Volume 2
Before Reading This Guide .................................................................... :xxxv
Conventions Used .................................................................................. :xxxv
Guide Organization .............................................................................. :xxxvi

User's Guide Volume 1
Chapter 1

Getting Started With MS-Windows

Starting MS-Windows ................................................................................... 1-2
Initial Window .................................................... , ...................................... 1-2
Working in MS-Windows ............................................................................. 1-2
Running an Application as an Icon .............................................................. 1-3
Using the Information System ..................................................................... 1-4
Scrolling ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Using Menus and Commands ....................................................................... 1-6
System Menu ........................................................................................... 1-6
Application Menus .................................................................................. 1-8
Using a Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 1-8
Finishing an Application ........................................................................... 1-13
Shrinking an Application to an Icon ...................................................... 1-14
Closing an Application .......................................................................... 1-14

11111 Contents

Chapter 2

Running Multiple Applications

Running Multiple Applications ................................................................... 2-2
Displaying Multiple Windows ..................................................................... 2-2
Displaying Icon Names ........................................................................... 2-3
Running Two Applications ..................... ,. '" ............................................ 2-4
Running Three Applications .................................................................... 2-5
Switching Windows ................................................................................... 2-6
Moving Windows ........................................................................................ 2-6
Changing the Size of a Window .................................................................. 2-9
Making a Window Larger ......................................................................... 2-9
Using the Size Command .................................................................... 2-9
Using the Size Box ............................................................................ 2-11
Making a Window Smaller ..................................................................... 2-12
Using the Size Command .................................................................. 2-12
Using the Size Box ............................................................................ 2-12
Filling the Screen With a Window ........................................................ 2-13
Using the Zoom Command ................................................................ 2-13
Using the Size Box ............................................................................ 2-14
Shrinking a Window to an Icon ............................................................. 2-14
Using the Icon Command ................................................................. 2-14
Using the Title Bar ............................................................................ 2-15
Transferring Information Between Windows .............................................. 2-16
Cutting and Pasting ............................................................................... 2-16
Receiving Messages From Another Application .......................................... 2-18

Chapter 3

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

Defining the MS-DOS Executive Application ............................................... 3-1
MS-DOS Executive Window Components .................................................... 3-2
Using Menus and Commands ....................................................................... 3-4
System Menu ........................................................................................... 3-4
File Menu ............................................................................................... 3-5
View Menu ............................................................................................. 3-7
Special Menu .......................................................................................... 3-9
Loading an Application ......................................................................... 3 -1 0
Using the Load Command ..................................................................... 3-10
Using the File Name ............................................................................. 3-11
Running an Application ............................................................................ 3-11
Using the Run Command ...................................................................... 3-12

Contents 11111

Using the File Name ............................................................................. 3-13
Using Temporary Files .......................................................................... 3-13
Running Batch Files .............................................................................. 3-13
Using MS-DOS Commands and Programs ............................................... 3-14
Running an MS-DOS Operating System Program .................................... 3-14
Finishing an MS-DOS Operating System Program ................................... 3-15
Finishing an MS-Windows Session ............................................................. 3-15

Chapter 4

Working With Files

Using Files .................................................... '" ........................................... 4-1
Selecting Files ............................................................................................. 4-2
Selecting a File ....................................................................................... 4-2
Selecting Multiple Files .......................................................................... 4-2
Using the File Menu Commands .................................................................. 4-4
Copying Files .......................................................................................... 4-4
Copying One File ............................................................................... 4-5
Copying More Than One File ............................................................. .4-6
Deleting Files ......................................................................................... 4-6
Deleting One File ............................................................................... 4-6
Deleting More Than One File .............................................................. 4-7
Printing a Text File ................................................................................. 4-7
Using the Spooler ............................................................................... 4-8
Renaming a File .................................................................................... 4-12
Getting Information About Files ............................................................ 4-13

Chapter 5

Working With Directories and Disks

Working with Directories ............................................................................ 5-1
Changing Directories .............................................................................. 5-1
Using the Change Directory Command ................................................ 5-2
Using the Path Name .......................................................................... 5-3
Using the Word Char Key ................................................................... 5-3
Creating Directories ................................................................................ 5-4
Changing How File Names Are Listed ..................................................... .5-5
Displaying Multiple Directories ............................................................. .5-6
Printing a Directory Listing .................................................................... .5-6
Deleting a Directory ............................................................................... 5-7

vii

11111 Contents

Working With Disks and Diskettes ............................................................. .5-8
Preparing a Diskette ................................................................................ 5-8
Preparing a Data Diskette ........................................................................ 5-8
Preparing a System Diskette .................................................................. ;.5-9
Naming Disks ........................................................................................ 5-10
Displaying the Contents of Another Disk .............................................. .5-11

Chapter 6 Using the Keyboard
Keyboard Features ...................................................................................... 6-1
Using the Alt Key ........................................................................................ 6-3
Using Menus and Commands ....................................................................... 6-4
Selecting a Menu .................................................................................... 6-4
Selecting a Command From a Menu ........................................................ 6-4
Loading an Application ............................................................................... 6-6
Using the Load Command ....................................................................... 6-6
Using the File Name ............................................................................... 6-6
Running an Application .............................................................................. 6-6
Using the Icon Command ....................................................................... 6-7
Using the Move Command ...................................................................... 6-7
Using the Run Command ........................................................................ 6-8
Using the File Name ............................................................................... 6-8
Finishing an Application ............................................................................. 6-8
Shrinking an Application to an Icon ........................................................ 6-9
Closing an Application .......................................... , ................................. 6-9
Using a Dialog Box ................................................................................... 6-1 0
Selecting Options in a Dialog Box ........................................................ 6-10
Selecting Command Buttons in a Dialog Box ......................................... 6-11
Closing a Dialog Box ............................................................................ 6-11
Scrolling a Window .................................................................................. 6-12
Working With Files ................................................................................... 6-14
Selecting Files ....................................................................................... 6-14
Selecting One File ............................................................................ 6-14
Canceling One Selected File ............................................................. 6-14
Selecting a Block of Files .................................................................. 6-15
Selecting Scattered Files .................................................................... 6-15

viii

Contents

IIIII

Using More Than One Window ................................................................. 6-16
Switching Windows .............................................................................. 6-16
Changing the Size of a Window ............................................................ 6-16
Making a Window Larger or Smaller .................................................. 6-16
Making a Window Fill the Entire Screen ........................................... 6-17
Moving a Window ................................................................................. 6-1 7
Receiving Messages From Another Application ...................................... 6-18
Printing Screen Images ............................................................................. 6-18

Chapter 7

Running Standard Applications

Working With Standard Applications ........................................................... 7-1
Using Program Information Files ............................................................. 7-2
Running a Standard Application .............................................................. 7-3
Shrinking a Window ................................................................................ 7-3
Closing a Window ................................................................................... 7-3
Scrolling a Window ................................................................................ 7-4
Finishing an MS-Windows Session ........................................................... 7-5
Running Multiple Standard Applications ................................................. 7·5
Running Standard Applications Outside a Window ...................................... 7·5
Starting an Application That Runs Outside a Window .............................. 7·6
Returning to MS-Windows ....................................................................... 7·6
Transferring Information ......................................................................... 7·7
Marking Information to be Transferred ................................................ 7·7
Copying Information to the Clipboard ................................................ 7·8
Pasting Information ............................................................................. 7·8
Using the Prt Sc Key ........................................................................... 7·9
Running Large Standard Applications ........................................................ 7 -10
Running Special Applications .................................................................... 7·10

Chapter 8

Using the Control Panel

Running the Control PaneL ......................................................................... 8·1
Using the Control Panel Dialog Box ............................................................ 8·3
Changing the Time ................................................................................. 8·3
Changing the Date .................................................................................. 8·4
Changing the Cursor Blink Rate .............................................................. 8·5
Changing the Mouse Double·Click Rate .................................................. 8·5

11111 Contents

Using the Installation Menu ........................................................................ 8-6
Adding and Removing a New Printer ....................................................... 8-6
Adding an Existing Printer Driver File ................................................. 8-7
Adding a New Printer Driver File ........................................................ 8-9
Removing a Printer ............................................................................... 8-1 0
Adding a New Font ............................................................................... 8-11
Deleting a Font ..................................................................................... 8-13
Using the Setup Menu ............................................................................... 8-14
Changing Printer Connections .............................................................. 8-14
Changing the Default Printer ................................................................ 8-15
Changing the Communications Port ...................................................... 8-16
Selecting Network Terminal Services .................................................... 8-18
Using the Preferences Menu ...................................................................... 8-20
Changing Screen Colors ........................................................................ 8-20
Changing Keyboard Settings .................................................................. 8-2 2
Changing Mouse Settings ...................................................................... 8-24
Changing Country Settings .................................................................... 8-25

Chapter 9 Using Terminal Emulators With Your
Workstation
Chapter 10

Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator

Starting the VT220 Emulator ..................................................................... 10-2
Using Multiple VT220 Emulators .......................................................... 10-2
Scrolling in the Emulator Window ............................................................ l 0-3
Using the VT220 Emulator System Menu Commands ................................. l0-3
The Set-Up Command ....................................................................... 10-3
The Mark, Copy, and Paste Commands .............................................. l0-4
The About Command ........................................................................ l 0-4
Leaving the VT220 Emulator ..................................................................... l 0-4

Chapter 11

Using the VT220 Emulator Keyboard

The VT220 Emulator Keyboard ................................................................. 11-1
Labels ................................................................................................... 11-2
Top-Row Function Keys ........................................................................ 11-2

Contents

Chapter 12

IIIII

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Entering Set-Up ......................................................................................... 12-1
Understanding the VT220 Set-Up Screens .............................................. l2-2
The VT220 Status Section ..................................................................... 12-4
Changing Settings in VT220 Set-Up ........................................................... 12-4
Using the Mouse in Set-Up .................................................................... 12-5
Exiting Set-Up ........................................................................................... 12-5
Using Set-Up Table Information ................................................................ 12-5
Actions Screen .......................................................................................... 12-6
Communications Screen ............................................................................ 12-9
Display Screen ........................................................................................ 12-12
General Screen ....................................................................................... 12 -14
Keyboard Screen ..................................................................................... 12-1 7
Printer Screen ......................................................................................... 12-20
Tabs Screen ............................................................................................. 12-22
Setting VT220 Tabs Manually .............................................................. 12-23
Telephone Screen ................................................................................... 12-25

Chapter 13

Using VT220 Special Features

Using Configuration Files .......................................................................... 13-1
What the VT220 Emulator Does ............................................................ 13-1
What You Can Do ................................................................................. 13-1
Specifying Set-Up Configuration Files on Startup ................................... 13-2
Saving and Recalling Set-Up Files .............................................................. 13-2
Saving VT220 Selection Settings ............................................................ 13-2
Recalling VT220 Selection Settings ....................................................... 13-3
Receiving Characters From the Host Into a File ......................................... 13-3
Autotyping Characters to the Host ............................................................. 13-4

Chapter 14

Using the VT240 Terminal Emulator

Starting the VT240 Emulator ..................................................................... 14-2
Using the Run Command to Start .......................................................... 14-2
Starting From the MS-DOS Operating System ......................................... 14-3
Exiting the VT240 Emulator ...................................................................... 14-4

11111 Contents

Chapter 15

Using the VT240 Emulator Keyboard

The VT240 Emulator Keyboard ................................................................. 15-1
Labels ................................................................................................... 15-1
Top-Row Function Keys ........................................................................ 15-2

Chapter 16

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Entering Set-Up ......................................................................................... 16-1
Understanding the VT240 Set-Up Screens .............................................. l6-1
Using the Keyboard in VT240 Set-Up .................................................... 16-4
The Next and Prey Keys .................................................................... 16-4
The Select Key .................................................................................. 16-4
The Arrow Keys ................................................................................ 16-4
Changing Settings in VT240 Set-Up ........................................................... 16-5
Exiting Set-Up ........................................................................................... 16-5
Using Set-Up Table Information ................................................................ 16-6
Actions Screen .......................................................................................... 16-7
The VT240 Show Status ........................................................................ 16-9
Communications Screen .......................................................................... 16-1 0
Selecting a Network Terminal Service ................................................. 16-13
Display Screen ........................................................................................ 16-14
Using VT240 Video Modes .................................................................. 16-1 7
Displaying Line Attributes ................................................................... 16-1 7
Double Width Lines for Fast Text Only ........................................... 16-18
Double Height/Double Width Lines for Fast Text Only ................... 16-18
Displaying Character Attributes ........................................................... 16-18
General Screen ....................................................................................... 16-19
Keyboard Screen ..................................................................................... 16-22
Printer Screen ......................................................................................... 16-26
Tabs Screen ............................................................................................. 16-28
Setting VT240 Tabs Manually .............................................................. 16-29
Telephone Screen ................................................................................... 16-31

xii

Contents

Chapter 17

IIIII

Using VT240 Special Features

Using Configuration Files .......................................................................... 17-1
What the VT240 Emulator Does ............................................................ 17-1
What You Can Do ................................................................................. 17-1
Saving and Recalling Set-Up Files .............................................................. 17-2
Saving VT240 Selection Settings ............................................................ 1 7 -2
Recalling VT240 Selection Settings ....................................................... 17-3
Receiving Characters From the Host Into a File ......................................... 17-4
Autotyping Characters to the Host ............................................................. 17-5

Chapter 18

Using Notepad

Starting Notepad ....................................................................................... 18-1
Typing Text .............................................................................................. 18-2
Formatting Text ........................................................................................ 18-3
Scrolling ................................................................................................... 18-4
Editing in Notepad .................................................................................... 18-5
Moving the Insertion Point ................................................................... 18-5
Selecting Text ....................................................................................... 18-6
Selecting Text With the Mouse or Keyboard ...................................... 18-6
Selecting Text with the Select All Command ..................................... 18-7
Canceling an Edit ................................................................................. 18-7
Deleting Text ........................................................................................ 18-7
Moving Text ......................................................................................... 18-8
Copying Text ........................................................................................ 18-8
Finding Text ......................................................................................... 18-9
Working With Notepad Files ................................................................... 18-1 0
File Size .............................................................................................. 18-1 0
Opening a File .................................................................................... 18-11
Opening a New File ........................................................................ 18-11
Opening an Existing File ................................................................ 18-11
Creating a Time Log File ................................................................. 18-13
Viewing Files in Other Directories ...................................................... 18-13
Saving a File ....................................................................................... 18-14
Saving a New File ........................................................................... 18-14
Saving Changes ............................................................................... 18-15
Printing a File ..................................................................................... 18-15
Deleting a File .................................................................................... 18-15

xiii

11111 Contents

Chapter 19 Using Cardfile
Starting Cardfile ........................................................................................ 19-1
Creating a Card File .................................................................................. 19-3
Index Line ............................................................................................ 19-3
Typing Text .......................................................................................... 19-4
Formatting Text .................................................................................... 19-4
Adding a Card ....................................................................................... 19-5
Moving Through a File .............................................................................. 19-5
Scrolling ............................................................................................... 19-6
Moving a Card to the Front ................................................................... 19-7
Changing the Index Line ....................................................................... 19-7
Editing Cards ............................................................................................ 19-8
Moving the Insertion Point ................................................................... 19-8
Selecting Text ....................................................................................... 19-9
Canceling an Edit ............................................................................... 19-1 0
Deleting Text ...................................................................................... 19-1 0
Moving Text ....................................................................................... 19-1 0
Moving Text Within the Same Card ................................................. 19-1 0
Moving Text to Another Card .......................................................... 19-11
Copying Text ...................................................................................... 19-11
Copying Text to the Same Card ....................................................... 19-11
Copying Text to Another Card ........................................................ 19-11
Finding Text ....................................................................................... 19-12
Adding Information From Other Applications ...................................... 19-13
Restoring a Card ................................................................................. 19-13
Deleting a Card ................................................................................... 19-14
Copying a Card ................................................................................... 19-14
Working With Card Files ......................................................................... 19-14
File Size .............................................................................................. 19-14
Opening a File ........................................................... ;........................ 19-15
Opening a New File ........................................................................ 19-15
Opening an Existing File ................................................................ 19-15
Viewing Files in Other Directories ...................................................... 19-1 7

xiv

Contents

IIIII

Saving a File ....................................................................................... 19-18
Saving a New File ........................................................................... 19-18
Saving Changes ............................................................................... 19-19
Printing in Cardfile ............................................................................. 19-19
Printing a Card ............................................................................... 19-19
Printing an Entire File ..................................................................... 19-19
Deleting a File .................................................................................... 19-19
Merging Files ...................................................................................... 19-20
Viewing a File as a List ....................................................................... 19-20
Automatic Dialing ................................................................................... 19-21

Chapter 20 Using Calendar
Starting Calendar ...................................................................................... 20-1
Editing the Day View ................................................................................ 20-3
Selecting a Time ................................................................................... 20-3
Entering an Appointment ...................................................................... 20-3
Selecting Text ....................................................................................... 20-4
Editing an Entry .................................................................................... 20-4
Copying an Entry .................................................................................. 20-4
Deleting an Entry .................................................................................. 20-5
Setting the Alarm ...................................................................................... 20-5
Turning On the Alarm ........................................................................... 20-5
Setting the Alarm for Sound .................................................................. 20-6
Setting the Alarm to Ring Early ............................................................. 20-6
Turning Off the Alarm .......................................................................... 20-6
Removing an Alarm ............................................................................... 20-7
Viewing Different Times or Dates ............................................................. 20-7
Viewing Different Times ....................................................................... 20-7
Viewing Different Dates ........................................................................ 20-8
Viewing Different Dates Using the Month View ..................................... 20-8
Viewing a Specific Date ........................................................................ 20-9
Customizing Your Calendar .................................................................... 20-10
Changing Day Settings ......................................................................... 20-10
Using Special Times ............................................................................ 20-11
Adding Special Times ...................................................................... 20-11
Deleting Special Times ................................................................... 20-11

IIIII Contents
Adding Notes ...................................................................................... 20-12
Marking Dates ..................................................................................... 20-12
Marking a Date ................................................................................ 20-12
Unmarking a Date ........................................................................... 20-13
Working With Calendar Files .................................................................. 20-13
Opening a File .................................................................................... 20-13
Opening a New File ........................................................................ 20-13
Opening an Existing File ................................................................ 20-14
Viewing Files in Other Directories ...................................................... 20-15
Saving a File ....................................................................................... 20-15
Saving a New File ........................................................................... 20-16
Saving Changes ............................................................................... 20-17
Printing Appointments ........................................................................ 20-17
Removing Appointment Dates ............................................................. 20-18
Deleting a File .................................................................................... 20-18

Chapter 21

Using Calculator

Starting Calculator .................................................................................... 21-1
Using Calculator ....................................................................................... 21-3
Using the Memory ................................................................................. 21-3
Using the Clipboard .............................................................................. 21-4
Copying to the Clipboard ................................................................. 21-4
Copying from the Clipboard ............................................................. 21-4

Chapter 22

Using Clock

Starting Clock ........................................................................................... 2 2-1
Setting the Clock ...................................................................................... 22-2

Chapter 23

Using Reversi

Starting Reversi ......................................................................................... 2 3-1
Rules of the Game .................................................................................... 23-2
Playing Reversi ......................................................................................... 23-3
Reversi Hints ............................................................................................ 23-3
Starting a New Game ................................................................................ 23-3

xvi

Contents

Chapter 24

IIIII

Introducing MS-Paint

Defining MS-Paint ..................................................................................... 24-1
Preliminaries ............................................................................................ 24-1
Definitions ................................................................................................ 24-2

Chapter 25

MS-Paint Tools and Shapes Summary

Tools ........................................................................................................ 25-2
Shapes ...................................................................................................... 25-3

Chapter 26

Getting Started With MS-Paint

Starting MS-Paint ....................................................................................... 26-1
Drawing .................................................................................................... 26-2
Drawing With the PenciL ..................................................................... 26-3
Drawing With the Brush ........................................................................ 26-4
Using the Eraser .................................................................................... 26-5
Saving a Canvas ......................................................................................... 26-6
Using MS-Paint's Palettes ........................................................................... 26-7
Printing a Canvas ...................................................................................... 26-8
Finishing MS-Paint .................................................................................... 26-8

Chapter 27

Creating a Drawing

Drawing a Box .......................................................................................... 27-1
Drawing Other Shapes .............................................................................. 27-2
Adding Text .............................................................................................. 27-3
Adding Patterns ......................................................................................... 27-4
Drawing a Filled Box ............................................................................ 27-4
Filling a Shape ...................................................................................... 27-5
Editing a Selection .................................................................................... 27-6
Making a Selection ................................................................................ 27-6
Copying a Selection .............................................................................. 27-7
Editing With Special Effects .................................................................. 27-7
Editing in Detail ................................................................................... 27-8
Scrolling the Canvas ............................................................................... 27-10

xvii

11111 Contents

Chapter 28

MS-Paint Command Summary

File Menu ................................................................................................. 28-1
Edit Menu ................................................................................................. 28-3
Font Menu ................................................................................................ 28-5
FontSize Menu .......................................................................................... 28-5
Style Menu ................................................................................................ 28-5
Palette Menu ............................................................................................. 28-8
Options Menu ........................................................................................... 28-9

Appendix A Creating Alternate Characters
Using Keys With Three or Four Legends ......................................................A-1
Using Compose Sequences ..........................................................................A-3
Using the Two-Key Compose Sequence ...................................................A-4
Using the Three-Key Compose Sequence .................................................A-5
Finishing or Restarting a Compose Sequence ..........................................A-6
Alt Numeric Pad Sequence ........................................................................A-11

Appendix B Information About the WIN.INI File
Changing the WIN.INI File ..................................................................... B-3
Windows Section .................................................................................... B-4
Extensions Section .................................................................................. B-8
Colors Section ...................................................................................... B-1 0
PIF Section ........................................................................................... B-13
Ports Section ......................................................................................... B-16
International Section ............................................................................. B-I8
DecLAT Section ..................................................................................... B-21
DecKeybd Section ................................................................................. B-22
DecInfo Section .................................................................................... B-24
Devices Section ..................................................................................... B-26
Fonts Section ........................................................................................ B-27

xviii

Contents

IIIII

Appendix C Program Information Files
Using Program Information Files ................................................................ C-l
Using the PIF Editor ................................................................................... C-3
Creating a PIF ........................................................................................ C-4
Editing PIFs ........................................................................................... C-5
Selecting PIF Options ................................................................................ C-5
Using Default Settings .............................................................................. C-l3
Deciding What to Put in a PIF ................................................................. C-l3
Changing PIFs .......................................................................................... C-l5
Giving Applications More Memory ........................................................... C-l5

Appendix D

Using a Keyboard With the VT220 Emulator

Appendix E Special Key Actions for MS-Paint
Using the Ctrl Key: Copying a Selection ..................................................... E-l
Using the Shift Key: Creating Multiple Copies ............................................ E-l
Using the Shift Key: Scrolling a Zoomed-In Canvas ..................................... E-l

Appendix FUsing MS-Paint With the Keyboard
Selecting Tools and Shapes .......................................................................... F-2
Drawing Lines and Shapes ........................................................................... F-2
Drawing Curves .......................................................................................... F-2
Drawing Polygons ....................................................................................... F-2
Using the Fill Tool. ..................................................................................... F-3
Making a Selection ...................................................................................... F-3
Moving a Selection ...................................................................................... F-3
Copying and Moving a Selection ................................................................. F-3
Making Multiple Copies .............................................................................. F-4
Scrolling ..................................................................................................... F-4
Using the Return Key .................................................................................. F-5
Zooming In ............................................................................................. F-5
Zooming Out .......................................................................................... F-5
Erasing .................................................................................................... F-5

xix

IIIII Contents
User's Guide Volume 2
Chapter 29 Using MS-DOS With MS-Windows
Characteristics of Commands and Device Drivers ...................................... 29-1
Using External Commands With MS-Windows ........................................ 29-2
Using Internal Commands With MS-Windows ........................................ 29-3
Getting Help ............................................................................................. 29-4
Exiting from MS-Windows ......................................................................... 29-5

Chapter 30 Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files
General Command Format ........................................................................ 30-1
Information Common to All Commands .................................................... 30-2
Support Files ............................................................................................ 30-3
Directories ................................................................................................ 30-4
Hierarchical Directory Structure ........................................................... 30-4
Paths ...... , .................................................................................................. 30-5
Paths With External Commands ............................................................. 30-7
Files ......................................................................................................... 30-7
Naming Files ......................................................................................... 30-7
Illegal File Names ................................................................................. 30-8
Wildcards ................................................................................................. 30-8
Question Mark ...................................................................................... 30-9
Asterisk ................................................................................................. 30-9

Chapter 31

Using the Hard Disk

What Is a Hard Disk? ................................................................................ 31-1
Preparing Your Hard Disk ......................................................................... 31-1
Setting the Drive Type .......................................................................... 31-2
Initializing Your Hard Disk ................................................................... 31-6
Partitioning Your Hard Disk .................................................................. 31-6
Setting the Start-up Partition ................................................................. 31-8
Formatting Your Hard Disk ................................................................... 31-9
Copying Files to Your Hard Disk ............................................................. 31-10
Repartitioning the Hard Disk .................................................................. 31-10

Contents

Chapter 32

IIIII

MS-DOS Operating System Commands

Conventions Used ..................................................................................... 32-2
Commands ................................................................................................32-2

ANSI ..................................................................................................... 32-6
APPEND ................................................................................................ 32-7
ASSIGN ................................................................................................. 32-9
ATTRIB ............................................................................................... 32-11
BACKUP ..............................................................................................32-13
BREAK ................................................................................................32-17
CHDIR ................................................................................................ 32-18
CHKDSK .............................................................................................32-19
CLS ..................................................................................................... 32-21
COMMAND ......................................................................................... 32-22
COpy .................................................................................................32-24
To Copy Files ................................................................................. 32-24
To Append Files .............................................................................. 32!.27
CTTY ..................................................................................................32-31
DATE ..................................................................................................32-32
DEL ..................................................................................................... 32-34
DIR ..................................................................................................... 32-35
DISKCOpy .......................................................................................... 32-37
ECHO .................................................................................................32-39
EDLIN ................................................................................................. 32-41
ERASE .................................................................................................32-42
EXE2BIN ............................................................................................. 32-43
EXIT ................................................................................................... 32-45
FC ......................................................................................................32-46
FDISK ................................................................................................. 32-49
FIND ................................................................................................... 32-50
FONT .................................................................................................. 32-53
FOR .................................................................................................... 32-56
FORMAT .............................................................................................32-58
GOTO ................................................................................................. 32-61
GRAFfABL ........................................................................................... 32-62

xxi

IIIII Contents
GRAPHICS ..........................................................................................32-63
IF ........................................................................................................32-66
JOIN ...................................................................................................32-68
.KEYB ..................................................................................................32-70
LABEL .................................................................................................32-72
LCOUNTRY .........................................................................................32-74
MDRIVE ..............................................................................................32-76
MKDIR ................................................................................................32-78
MODE .................................................................................................32-79
MORE .................................................................................................32-90
NET ....................................................................................................32-92
PATH ..................................................................................................32-93
PAUSE .................................................................................................32-95
PERMIT ...............................................................................................32-97
PRINT .................................................................................................32-98
PROMPT ...........................................................................................32-102
RECOVER .........................................................................................32-104
REM ..................................................................................................32-106
REN ..................................................................................................32-107
RESTORE ..........................................................................................32-108
RMDIR ..............................................................................................32-110
SELECT .............................................................................................32-111
SET ...................................................................................................32-115
SHARE ...............................................................................................32-117
SHIFT ...............................................................................................32-118
SORT ................................................................................................32-120
SUBST ...............................................................................................32-123
SYS ...................................................................................................32-125
TIME .................................................................................................32-127
TYPE .................................................................................................32-128
VER ..................................................................................................32-130
VERIFY .............................................................................................32-131
VOL ..................................................................................................32-132

xxii

Contents

Chapter 33

IIIII

Using the Network With MS-DOS

What Is a Network? ................................................................................... 33-2
What Is a Server? ...................................................................................... 33-3
Before Using the Network ......................................................................... 33-4
Getting Help ......................................................................................... 33-4
Connecting to the Network (NET START RDR) ...................................... 33-4
Specifying Device Names ...................................................................... 33-5
Connecting to a Resource (NET USE) ........................................................ 3 3-6
Connecting to a Directory (NET USE) ................................................... 33-7
Connecting to a Remote Printer (NET USE) .......................................... 33-7
Listing Remote Connections (NET USE) ................................................ 33-8
Using Resources ........................................................................................ 33-9
Changing to Another Drive ................................................................... 33-9
Printing a Remote File (NET PRINT) ..................................................... 33-9
Temporarily Disconnecting From Network Resources (NET PAUSE) .... 33-10
Restarting After a NET PAUSE Command (NET CONTINUE) ................ 33-11
Disconnecting From a Resource .............................................................. 3 3-12
Disconnecting From a Remote Directory ............................................. 3 3-12
Disconnecting From a Remote Printer ................................................. 33-12
Other Network Commands ...................................................................... 33-13
NET CLEAR ......................................................................................... 33-13
NET DEFINE ....................................................................................... 33-13
NET LIST ............................................................................................. 33-14
NET START LAT ................................................................................... 33-15
NET TEST ............................................................................................ 33-15
NET TIME ........................................................................................... 33-16
PERMIT ............................................................................................... 33-17

Chapter 34

Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

Running NFT ............................................................................................ 34-2
Using Access Control Information ............................................................. 34-3
Format for Access Control Information .................................................. 34-3
Storing Default Access Control Information ........................................... 34-3
Changing Default Access Control Information ....................................... 34-4
Specifying Remote Files ............................................................................ 34-5
Identifying Types of Files and Systems ...................................................... 34-6
Using NFT Commands ............................................................................... 34-8
Command Conventions ......................................................................... 34-9
Table of Commands ............................................................................ 34-10
APPEND .............................................................................................. 34-11

xxiii

11111 Contents

COpy ................................................................................................. 34-14
DELETE .............................................................................................. . 34-20
DIRECTORY ... ........................ , ........................................................... . 34-21
EXIT ................................................................................................... 34-23

HELP ................................................................................................... 34-24
PRINT ................................................................................................. 34-25
SET ..................................................................................................... 34-26

SHOW ................................................................................................. 34-27
SUBMIT ............................................................................................... 34-28
TYPE ................................................................................................... 34-29

Chapter 35

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

Using SETHOST ......................................................................................... 35-1
Using the SETHOST Command .................................................................. 35-3
jABORT ................................................................................................35-4
jCTERM ................................................................................................35-5

jEDIT ................................................................................................... 35-5
jEXIT ................................................................................................... 35-6
jHELP ................................................................................................... 35-7
JLOG .................................................................................................... 35-8

jSAVEDEFAULT ...................................................................................... 35-8
jSESSION .............................................................................................. 35-9
jSHOW ................................................................................................. 35-9
jTAKE ................................................................................................. 35-10
Using the SETHOST Menu ....................................................................... 35-11
Return Option .................................................................................... 35-11
(H)elp Option .................................................................................... 35-12
(L)og Option ...................................................................................... 35-12
(R)econnect Option ........................................................................... 35-12
(E)dit Option ..................................................................................... 35-12
(S)ession Option ................................................................................ 35-13
(A)bort Session Option ....................................................................... 35-13
(N)ew Session Option ........................................................................ 35-13
Using Your Workstation as a VT102 Terminal ......................................... 35-14
Entering Set-Up Mode ......................................................................... 35-14
Selecting a Set-Up Menu ..................................................................... 35-16
Saving Set-Up Values ........................................................................... 35-16
Using Set-Up Values ............................................................................ 35-17
Recalling Set-Up Values ...................................................................... 35-17
Exiting From Set-Up Mode .................................................................. 35-17

xxiv

Contents 11111

Editing Text During a Remote Session ..................................................... 35-18
Disconnecting From a Host ..................................................................... 3 5 -18

Chapter 36

MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys

MS-DOS Editing Keys ................................................................................ 36-1
Example 1 ............................................................................................ 36-2
Example 2 ............................................................................................ 36-2
Control Character Functions ..................................................................... 36-3
The PrtSc Key ........................................................................................... 36-4
Industry Standard Compose Sequences ...................................................... 36-4

Chapter 37

Batch Processing

What Is Batch Processing? ......................................................................... 37-1
The REM and PAUSE Commands ............................................................ 37-1
Batch File Creation ............................................................................... 37-2
Batch File Execution ............................................................................. 37-2
Batch Files With Replacement Parameters ................................................. 3 7 -3
Executing NEWFILE.BAT ....................................................................... 37-4
The AUTOEXEC.BAT File .......................................................................... 37-5
Creating an AUTOEXEC.BAT File ........................................................... 37-5

Chapter 38

Redirecting Input and Output

Redirecting Input ..................................................................................... 38-2
Redirecting Output ................................................................................... 38-2
Filters ....................................................................................................... 38-3
Pipes ........................................................................................................ 38-3

Chapter 39

DEBUG

DEBUG Program Headers .......................................................................... 39-1
Information Common to All DEBUG Commands ........................................ 39-1
ASSEMBLE ............................................................................................. 39-3
COMPARE ............................................................................................. 39-6
DUMP ................................................................................................... 39-8
ENTER ................................................................................................ 39-10
FILL .................................................................................................... 39-13

xxv

IIIII Contents
GO ..................................................................................................... 39-15
HEX .................................................................................................... 39-17
INPUT ................................................................................................. 39-18
LOAD .................................................................................................. 39-19
MOVE ................................................................................................. 39-21
NAME .................................................................................................. 39-23
OUTPUT ............................................................................................. 39-26
PTRACE .............................................................................................. 39-27
QUIT .................................................................................................. 39-29
REGISTER ........................................................................................... 39-30
SEARCH .............................................................................................. 39-33
TRACE ........................................................ , ....................................... 39-35
UNASSEMBLE .................................................................... , .................. 39-37
WRITE ..................................................................................... , .......... 39-39

Chapter 40

Messages

Disk and Device Errors ............................................................................. 40-2
Messages ................................................................................................... 40-3

Appendix G International Features
International Country Codes ...................................................................... G-1
International Character Set Codes .............................................................. G-2
Country Keyboard Abbreviations ................................................................ G-2
Commands Providing International Support ............................................... G-3
The FONT Command ............................................................................. G-3
The GRAFTABL Command ...................................................................... G-3
The KEYB Command .............................................................................. G-3
The LCOUNTRY Command .................................................................... G-4
The SELECT Command ........................................................................... G-4
The SORT Command .............................................................................. G-4
Similarities Between FONT, GRAFTABL, KEYB, LCOUNTRY, SORT ......... G-4
How Support Files Work Together ............................................................. G-5
Country Keyboards .................................................................................... G-7

xxvi

Contents

Appendix H

IIIII

Using Diskettes on the VAXmate
Workstation

Using Diskettes ............. ............................................................................. H-l
Formatting Diskettes .................................................................................. H-l
Diskette ReadfWrite Compatibility ............................................................. H-2
DISKCOPYand Diskette Types ................................................................... H-3

Appendix I How to Configure Your System
What Is a CONFIG.SYS File? ................................................. ...................... 1-1
Creating the CONFIG.SYS File ...................................................... .............. 1-2
CONFIG.SYS Commands ...................................................... ....................... 1-2
BREAK .................................................................................................... 1-3
BUFFERS ................................................................................................. 1-4
COUNTRY ........................................................................... ................... 1-5
DEVICE ................................................... ................................................ 1-6
FCBS ..................................................... .................................................. 1-7
FILES ...................................................... ................................................ 1-8
LASTDRIVE .............................................................................................. 1-9

SHELL ...................................................... ............................................. 1-10
Sample CONFIG.SYS File .......................................................................... 1-11

Appendix J VAXmate Options
Additional Memory ..................................................................................... J-l
Integral Modem (North America) ................................................................ J-l
Printers ....................................................................................................... J-2
80287 Math Coprocessor ............................................................................ J-2
Expansion Box with Hard Disk .................................................................... J-2

Appendix K Vaxmate Workstation Specifications
VAXmate Workstation ................................................................................ K-l
System Unit ............................................................................................ K-l
CPU ....................................................................................................... K-l
Power Supply ... ..................................................................................... K-2
Environment - Class A ................... ........................................................ K-2

xxvii

IIIII Contents
Workstation System Expansion ................................................ r .................. K-3
I/O Video Module ................................................................................. K-3
5If4-Inch Flexible Disk Drive ................................................................. K-4
Keyboard ................................................................................................... K-4
Physical Description (Low-profile, Detachable) ..................................... K-4
Mouse ........................................................................................................ K-4
Physical Description .............................................................................. K-4
Electrical specifications ......................................................................... K-5

Index
Tables
Table 1-1 Mouse Techniques .................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-2 Scrolling With the Mouse .......................................................... 1-6
Table 1-3 System Menu Commands ........................................................... 1-7
Table 2-1 Cut, Copy, and Paste Commands ............................................. 2-17
Table 3-1 MS-DOS Executive Window Components ................................... 3-3
Table 3-2 File Menu Commands ................................................................ 3-6
Table 3-3 View Menu Commands .............................................................. 3-8
Table 3-4 Special Menu Commands .......................................................... 3-9
Table 6-1 MS-Windows Keys ..................................................................... 6-2
Table 6-2 Moving the Cursor in a Dialog Box ......................................... 6-10
Table 6-3 Keyboard Scrolling in the MS-DOS Executive Window ............ 6-12
Table 7-1 Scrolling Standard Applications That Run in a Window ............. 7-4
Table 8-1 Fonts on the Fonts Disk ........................................................... 8-13
Table 8-2 Fonts Not on the Fonts Disk .................................................... 8-13
Table 9-1 Workstation Emulator Comparison Table ................................... 9-2
Table 12-1 VT220 Set-Up Screens ........................................................... 12-3
Table 12-2 VT220 Actions Set-Up .... , ...................................................... 12-7
Table 12-3 VT220 Communications Set-Up ........................................... 12-10
Table 12-4 VT220 Display Set-Up ......................................................... 12-12
Table 12-5 VT220 General Set-Up ........................................................ 12-15
Table 12-6 VT220 Keyboard Set-Up ...................................................... 12-18
Table 12-7 Printer Set-Up ..................................................................... 12-21
Table 12-8 VT220 Tab Set-Up ............................................................... 12-22
Table 12-9 VT220 Telephone Set-Up .................................................... 12-26
Table 16-1 VT240 Set-Up Screens ........................................................... 16-3
Table 16-2 VT240 Actions Set-Up ........................................................... 16-8
Table 16-3 VT240 Communications Set-Up ........................................... 16-11

xxviii

Contents

IIIII

Table 16-4 Vf240 Display Set-Up ......................................................... 16-15
Table 16-5 Vf240 General Set-Up ........................................................ 16-20
Table 16-6 Vf240 Keyboard Set-Up ...................................................... 16-23
Table 16-7 Vf240 Printer Set-Up .......................................................... 16-27
Table 16-8 Vf240 Tab Set-Up ............................................................... 16-29
Table 16-9 Telephone Set-Up ................................................................ 16-32
Table 18-1 Replies for Opening a File .................................................. 18-11
Table 19-1 Replies for Opening a File .................................................. 19-15
Table 19-2 Autodial Options and Functions .......................................... 19-22
Table 20-1 Scrolling to View Different Times ......................................... 20-7
Table 20-2 Scrolling to View Different Dates .......................................... 20-8
Table 20-3 Moving in Month View With the Mouse ................................ 20-8
Table 20-4 Moving in Month View With the Keyboard ............................ 20-9
Table 20-5 Acceptable Entries for Dates ................................................ 20-10
Table 21-1 Using Memory With the Mouse and Keyboard ....................... 21-3
Table 27-1 Tools for Drawing Shapes and How to Use Them .................. 27-2
Table 28-1 File Menu Commands and Descriptions ................................. 28-2
Table 28-2 Edit Menu Commands and Descriptions ................................ 28-4
Table 28-3 Style Menu Commands and Descriptions ............................... 28-7
Table 28-4 Options Menu Commands and Descriptions ........................ 28-10
Table 29-1 Command Characteristics ...................................................... 29-2
Table 29-2 Equivalent MS-Windows Commands ...................................... 29-3
Table 30-1 Support Files and Usage ........................................................ 30-3
Table 32-1 Conventions .......................................................................... 32-2
Table 32-2 MS-DOS Operating System Commands ................................... 32-3
Table 32-3 ATTRIB Command Examples ............................................... 32-12
Table 32-4 BACKUP File Specifications ................................................. 32-14
Table 32-5 DIR Command Equivalents .................................................. 32-36
Table 32-6 EDLIN Commands ............................................................... 32-41
Table 32-7 NET Command Options ....................................................... 32-92
Table 32-8 Prompt Characters ............................................................ 32-102
Table 32-9 System Prompt Examples .................................................. 32-103
Table 32-10 How SELECT Mfects CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT ... 32-113
Table 33-1 Network Commands .............................................................. 33-1
Table 34-1 Operating Systems and File Specifications ............................. 34-5
Table 34-2 Copying or Appending Files From a Remote Node ................ 34-7
Table 34-3 Copying or Appending Files to a Remote Node ..................... 34-8
Table 34-4 Valid NFT Commands .......................................................... 34-10
Table 35-1 Options for the Edit Submenu ............................................. 35-13
Table 36-1 MS-DOS Editing Keys ............................................................. 36-1
Table 36-2 Control Character Functions ................................................. 36-3

xxix

IIIII Contents
Table 38-1 Options for Redirecting Input and Output ............................ 38-1
Table 39-1 DEBUG Commands ................................................................ 39-2
Table 39-2 Flags ................................................................................... 39-31
Table A-I Diacritical Mark in a Three-Key Sequence .................................A-5
Table A-2 Valid Compose Sequences .........................................................A-6
Table B-1 Sections of the WIN.lNI File ..................................................... B-2
Table D-l Keys and Their VT220 Emulator Functions .............................. D-l
Table G-l International Support .............................................................. G-3
Table G-2 Examples of International Commands ...................................... G-5
Table G-3 IBM Extended Character Set .................................................... G-5
Table G-4 DIGITAL Multinational Character Set ....................................... G-6
Table G-5 French 7-Bit National Replacement Character Set. ................... G-6
Table G-6 German 7-Bit National Replacement Character Set ................... G-6
Table G-7 International Standards Organization ....................................... G-6
Table I-I CONFIG.SYS Commands ............................................................ 1-2

Figures
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2

xxx

System Menu Commands .......................................................... 1-6
Text Box ................................................................................ 1-10
List Box ................................................................................. 1-11
Option Buttons ...................................................................... 1-11
Check Box ............................................................................. 1-12
Command Buttons ................................................................. 1-12
Displaying the Icon Name ........................................................ 2"3
Message From Another Application ........................................ 2-18
System Menu Commands .......................................................... 3-4
File Menu Commands .............................................................. 3-5
View Menu Commands ............................................................ 3-7
Special Menu ........................................................................... 3-9
Load Dialog Box .................................................................... 3-10
Run Dialog Box ..................................................................... 3-12
File Menu Commands ............................................................. .4-4
Copy Command Dialog Box .................................................... .4-5
Print Dialog Box ...................................................................... 4-7
Print Spooler Dialog Box ........................................................ .4-8
Rename Dialog Box .............................................................. .4-12
Get Info Dialog Box .............................................................. .4-13
Change Directory Dialog Box .................................................. .5-2
Create Directory Dialog Box ................................................... .5-4

Contents 11111

Figure 5-3 Partial Dialog Box ................................................................... .5-5
Figure 5-4 Format Data Disk Dialog Box .................................................. .5-8
Figure 5-5 Set Volume Name Dialog Box ............................................... .5-10
Figure 6-1 Keys Used for Scrolling .......................................................... 6-13
Figure 8-1 Changing the Time .................................................................. 8-3
Figure 8-2 Changing the Date ................................................................... 8-4
Figure 8-3 Installation Menu Commands ................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-4 Add New Printer Dialog Box .................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-5 Delete Printer Dialog Box ...................................................... 8-1 0
Figure 8-6 Setup Menu Commands .......................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-7 Connections Dialog Box ........................................................ 8-15
Figure 8-8 Default Printer Dialog Box ..................................................... 8-16
Figure 8-9 Communications Settings Dialog Box ..................................... 8-17
Figure 8-10 Network Terminal Services Dialog Box ................................ 8-18
Figure 8-11 Preferences Menu Commands .............................................. 8-20
Figure 8-12 Screen Colors Dialog Box .................................................... 8-21
Figure 8-13 Keyboard Settings Dialog Box .............................................. 8-23
Figure 8-14 Mouse Options Dialog Box .................................................. 8-24
Figure 8-15 Country Settings Dialog Box ................................................ 8-26
Figure 11-1 Workstation Keyboard .......................................................... 11· 2
Figure 15-1 Workstation Keyboard .......................................................... 15-2
Figure 16-1 VT240 Set-Up Keys .............................................................. 16-4
Figure 18-1 Notepad Window ................................................................. 18-2
Figure 18-2 Formatting With the Return and the Tab Keys ...................... 18-3
Figure 18-3 Scrolling .............................................................................. 18-4
Figure 18-4 Selected Text ....................................................................... 18-6
Figure 18-5 Find Dialog Box ................................................................... 18-9
Figure 18-6 Open Dialog Box ............................................................... 18-12
Figure 18-7 Save As Dialog Box ............................................................ 18-14
Figure 19-1 Cardfile Window ................................................................. 19-2
Figure 19-2 Index Dialog Box ................................................................. 19-3
Figure 19-3 Formatting With the Return and Tab Keys ............................ 19-4
Figure 19-4 Scrolling Through a File ...................................................... 19-6
Figure 19-5 Go To Dialog Box ................................................................ 19-7
Figure 19-6 Selected Text. ...................................................................... 19-9
Figure 19-7 Find Dialog Box ................................................................. 19-12
Figure 19-8 Open Dialog Box ............................................................... 19-16
Figure 19-9 Save As Dialog Box ............................................................ 19-18
Figure 19-10 Merge Dialog Box ............................................................ 19-20
Figure 19-11 Autodial Dialog Box ......................................................... 19-21
Figure 20-1 Calendar Window: Day View ................................................ 20-2

xxxi

11111 Contents

Figure 20-2 Day Settings Dialog Box ..................................................... 20-10
Figure 20-3 Open Dialog Box ............................................................... 20-14
Figure 20-4 Save Ks Dialog Box ............................................................ 20-16
Figure 20-5 Print Dialog Box ................................................................ 20-17
Figure 20-6 Remove Dialog Box ........................................................... 20-18
Figure 21-1 Calculator Window .............................................................. 21-2
Figure 21-2 Using Calculator With the Keyboard .................................... 21-3
Figure 22-1 Clock Window ..................................................................... 22-2
Figure 23-1 Reversi Window ................................................................... 23-2
Figure 24-1 MS-Paint Canvas ................................................................... 24-2
Figure 24-2 MS-Paint Window ................................................................. 24-3
Figure 26-1 Drawing With the Pencil ..................................................... 26-3
Figure 26-2 Drawing With the Brush ...................................................... 26-4
Figure 26-3 Using the Eraser ................................................................... 26-5
Figure 26-4 Save As Dialog Box .............................................................. 26-6
Figure 26-5 Patterns Palette .................................................................... 26-7
Figure 27-1 Box ...................................................................................... 27-2
Figure 27-2 Box with Text ...................................................................... 27-3
Figure 27-3 Filled Box ............................................................................ 27-4
Figure 27-4 Filling a Shape .................................................................... 27-5
Figure 27-5 Selection Rectangle ............................................................. 27-6
Figure 27-6 Results of the Flip Horizontal Command .............................. 27-8
Figure 27-7 Editing in Detail .................................................................. 27-9
Figure 27-8 Scrolling the Canvas .......................................................... 27-10
Figure 28-1 File Menu ............................................................................ 28-2
Figure 28-2 Edit Menu ............................................................................ 28-3
Figure 28-3 Style Menu ........................................................................... 28-6
Figure 28-4 Style Menu Typefaces ........................................................... 28-6
Figure 28-5 Example Align Commands ................................................... 28-7
Figure 28-6 Palette Menu ....................................................................... 28-8
Figure 28-7 Options Menu ...................................................................... 28-9
Figure 30-1 Command Line Format ......................................................... 30-1
Figure 30-2 Hierarchical Directory Structure .......................................... 30-4
Figure A-I Three Legend Key ....................................................................A-l
Figure G-l U. S./U. K. Keyboard .............................................................. G-7
Figure G-2 Canadian/English Keyboard .................................................... G-7
Figure G-3 Danish Keyboard .................................................................... G-7
Figure G-4 Finnish Keyboard ................................................................... G-8
Figure G-5 French/Canadian Keyboard .................................................... G-8
Figure G-6 French Keyboard .................................................................... G-8
Figure G-7 German/Austrian Keyboard ..................................................... G-9

xxxii

Contents IIIII

Figure G-8 Hebrew Keyboard .................................................................. G-9
Figure G-9 Italian Keyboard ..................................................................... G-9
Figure G-I0 Norwegian Keyboard .......................................................... G-I0
Figure G-ll Spanish Keyboard ............................................................... G-l 0
Figure G-12 Swedish Keyboard .............................................................. G-l 0
Figure G-13 Swiss/French Keyboard ...................................................... G-l1
Figure G-14 Swiss/German Keyboard ..................................................... G-ll

Screens
Screen 1-1 Information System Application ............................................... 1-4
Screen 1-2 Dialog Box .............................................................................. 1-9
Screen 2-1 Displaying Two Windows ........................................................ 2-4
Screen 2-2 Displaying Three Windows ...................................................... 2-5
Screen 2-3 Moving the Clock Icon ............................................................ 2-7
Screen 2-4 Clock Window After a Move .................................................... 2-8
Screen 2-5 Defining the Larger Notepad Window .................................... 2-10
Screen 2-6 Larger Notepad Window ...... ................................................. .2-11
Screen 2-7 Window Filling the Entire Screen .......................................... 2-13
Screen 2-8 Shrinking a Window to an Icon ............................................. 2 -15
Screen 3-1 MS-DOS Executive Window ..................................................... 3-2
Screen 4-1 Selecting Multiple Files ...................... .................................... .4-3
Screen 4-2 Print Spooler Window With Print Queue ................................ .4-9
Screen 8-1 Control Panel Window ............ ............................................... .8-2
Screen 12-1 VT220 Set-Up ...................................................................... 12-2
Screen 12-2 VT220 Actions ..................................................................... 12-6
Screen 12-3 VT220 Communications ...................................................... 12-9
Screen 12-4 VT220 Display ................................................................... 12-12
Screen 12-5 VT220 General .................................................................. 12-14
Screen 12-6 VT220 Keyboard ............................................................... 12-17
Screen 12-7 VT220 Printer ................................................................. .. 12-20
Screen 12-8 VT220 Tabs ....................................................................... 12-22
Screen 12-9 Manually Setting VT220 Tabs ............................................. 12-23
Screen 12-10 VT220 Telephone ............................................................ 12-25
Screen 16-1 VT240 Set-Up ..................................................................... 16-2
Screen 16-2 VT240 Actions ..................................................................... 16-7
Screen 16-3 VT240 Communications .................................................... 16-10
Screen 16-4 VT240 Display ................................................................... 16-14
Screen 16-5 VT240 General ............... .................................................. . 16-19
Screen 16-6 VT240 Keyboard ............................................................... 16-22

xxxiii

11111

Contents

Screen 16-7 VT240 Printer ................................................................... 16-26
Screen 16-8 VT240 Tabs ....................................................................... 16-28
Screen 16-9 Manually Setting VT240 Tabs ............................................. 16-30
Screen 16-10 Telephone Set-Up ............................................................ 16-31
Screen C-1 Program Information Editor Window ...................................... C-4

xxxiv

Preface
Volume 2

Welcome to Volume 2 of the VAXmate User's Guide. This volume explains
how to use the MS-DOS operating system on your VAXmate workstation. It
also covers the messages that can be displayed when you use the VAXmate
system software.
This software and your VAXmate workstation create a powerful tool for you
to use to perform your everyday tasks quickly and efficiently.

Before Reading This Volume
You should read the VAXmate System Handbook and the Preface to Volume
1 of this guide before reading Volume 2.

Conventions Used
Follow these conventions:
• In examples of dialog between you and the VAXmate workstation, what
is displayed on the screen is shown in black type; what you enter from
the keyboard is shown in color.
• Make sure you type all spaces and punctuation marks exactly as they are
printed.
• A key sequence such as AIt/Tab means to hold down the AIt key while
you press the Tab key.
• A key sequence such as AIt/Shift/Tab means while you hold down both
the AIt key and the Shift key, press the Tab key.
• Wherever you see the term workstation, it means your VAXmate
workstation.
xxxv

IIIII Preface Volume 2
Volume Organization
This second volume of the VAXmafe User's Guide is organized into the following parts.

MS-DOS
MS-DOS is the operating system used by your VAXmate workstation. The
information in this part is for the experienced MS-DOS user.
The first chapters cover everything you need to know about the operating
system, from creating files, directories, and paths to preparing the hard disk;
from using command formats to using internal and external commands. The
commands are also listed alphabetically.
In addition, a description is provided for the MS-DOS editing and function
keys, use of industry standard compose sequences, batch processing, and
DEBUG.
Other chapters explain networking, the network file transfer (NFT) commands, and the SETHOST command. The SETHOST command creates an emulator session using the DEC net network under the MS-DOS operating system.
Appendixes G, H, and I explain international features (including country
keyboard layouts), reading diskettes, and configuring your system.

Messages
This part contains help on messages, other than informational ones, that may
be displayed on your screen while you use the VAXmate system software
described in this guide. The messages are listed alphabetically.
Appendixes J and K describe additional options you can order for your
VAXmate workstation and contain the system specifications for your VAXmate
workstation.

xxxvi

Chapter 29
Using MS-DOS
With MS-Windows

Your workstation uses the MS-DOS Version 3.10 operating system to control
all its operations. This operating system enables you to:
• Execute MS-DOS operating system commands
• Use MS-Windows
• Use the network
This chapter contains information about:
• Using external MS-DOS commands with MS-Windows
• Using internal MS-DOS commands with MS-Windows
• Exiting from MS-Windows to MS-DOS
• Getting help

Characteristics of Commands and Device Drivers
The MS-DOS operating system contains internal and external commands.
Table 29-1 lists the characteristics of these commands, plus the characteristics of device drivers.

29-1

IIIII Using MS-DOS With MS- Windows
Table 29-1

Command Characteristics

Internal Commands

External Commands

Device Drivers

Are not shown in a directory listing.

Are shown in a directory
listing.

Are stored in the COMMAND.COM file. They are
automatically read into
memory when you tum
on your workstation.

Are stored as files on a
diskette, hard disk, or
server. They are read into
memory only when you
request it.

Are stored as files on a diskette, hard disk, or server.
They are loaded using the
DEVICE statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file.

Can be used any time you
see the MS-DOS operating
system prompt.

Can be used if the file exists on a diskette, hard
disk, or server.

Can only be used if previously loaded using the
DEVICE statement in the
CONFIG.SYS file.

End with a file extension
of .COM, .EXE, or .BAT.

Usually end with a file extension of .SYS.

Using External Commands With MS-Windows
There are a number of methods you can use to execute an external command
in MS-Windows. However, the following method is the best method because:
• It uses the values contained in the external command's program information file (.PIF) file.
• You do not need to be in the directory where the external command
exists to execute it.
To use an external command with MS-Windows:
1. Highlight the Run command in the MS-DOS Executive File menu box.
2. Release the left mouse button.
A dialog box is displayed.
3. Type the command you want to run and its parameters.
4. Click on the Ok command button.

29-2

Using MS-DOS With MS- Windows

IIIII

To return to the MS-DOS Executive window from a command that ran in a
window:
1. Highlight the Close command in the System menu box.
2. Release the left mouse button.
To return to the MS-DOS Executive window from a command or application
program that did not run in a window:
1. Exit the command or application program.
2. Press any key to continue.

Using Internal Commands With MS-Windows
Many of the internal MS-DOS commands have equivalent commands in
MS-Windows. Therefore, you should use the equivalent MS-Windows command whenever possible. Table 29-2 contains a list of MS-DOS internal commands and the equivalent MS-Windows command.
Table 29-2

Equivalent MS-Windows Commands

MS-DOS
Command

Equivalent
MS-Windows
Command

Location of
MS-Windows
Command

CHOIR

Change Directory

MS-DOS Executive Window Special menu box

COpy

Copy

MS-DOS Executive Window File menu box

DATE

Date

Control Panel (CONTROL.EXE)

DEL

Delete

MS-DOS Executive Window File menu box
MS-DOS Executive Window View menu box

OIR
ERASE

Delete

MS-DOS Executive Window File menu box

EXIT

End Session

MS-DOS Executive Window Special menu box

MKOIR

Create Directory

MS-DOS Executive Window Special menu box

REN

Rename

MS-DOS Executive Window File menu box

RMOIR

Delete

MS-DOS Executive Window File menu box

TIME

Time

Control Panel (CONTROL.EXE)

VOL

Set Volume Name

MS-DOS Executive Window Special menu box

• There is no equivalent MS-Windows command for the MS-DOS DIR command.

29-3

IIIII Using MS· DOS With MS· Windows
To execute an internal command that does not have an MS-Windows
equivalent command:
1. Highlight the Run command in the MS-DOS Executive File menu box.
2. Release the left mouse button.
A dialog box is displayed.

3. Type:
COMMAND. COM

4. Click on the Ok command button.
The MS-DOS operating system prompt is displayed.
5. Type the internal command you want to use and press the Return key.
You can use any of the internal MS-DOS operating system commands
(except the CTIY command).
To return to the MS-DOS Executive Window:
1. Type:
A : \ ) E X IT U3e!u," )

2. Highlight the Close command in the System menu box.

3. Release the left mouse button.

Getting Help
The Information System provides you with information about the MS-DOS
operating system and your workstation. The Information System is represented by an icon in the Icon area at the bottom of a window. The icon is a
square with the letter "i" inside.

29-4

Using MS-DOS With MS- Windows

IIIII

To use the Information System when the icon is displayed, expand the Information System icon.
To use the Information System when the icon is not displayed:
1. Highlight the Run command in the MS-DOS Executive File menu box.
2. Release the left mouse button.
A dialog box is displayed.
3. Type:
Info

4. Click on the Ok command button.
To return to the MS-DOS Executive window:
1. Highlight the Close command in the System menu box.
2. Release the left mouse button.
3. Click on the Yes command button.

Exiting from MS-Windows
You can use both external and internal MS-DOS operating system commands
with MS-Windows. However, if you want to use the MS-DOS operating system
commands extensively, we suggest you exit from MS-Windows and use the
commands at the MS-DOS operating system prompt.
To exit from MS-Windows:
1. Highlight the Close command in the the System Menu box.
2. Release the left mouse button.
The End Session window is displayed.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The MS-DOS operating system exits from MS-Windows and displays its
prompt.

29-5

Chapter 30
Commands, Directories,
Paths, and Files

This chapter discusses:
• General command format
• Information common to all commands
• Support files
• Directories
• Paths
• Files
• Wildcards

General Command Format
A command is an instruction that tells the MS-DOS operating system to perform a task. You type a command and its parameters and qualifiers on the
command line following the MS-DOS operating system prompt. For example:
A:\>BACKUP C:\SYS A: IM<Return>

------"'L'

QUALIFIER

PARAMETER
COMMAND

Figure 30-1

Command Line Format

When you type commands, exact spacing and punctuation are important.
Therefore, separate a command and its parameters with a space,

30-1

IIIII Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files
Information Common to All Commands
The following information applies to MS-DOS commands:
• Many commands are followed by qualifiers. These qualifiers supply
additional information for specific command execution. Qualifiers are
preceded by a forward slash (j). For example:
C: \)BACKUP C: A: IA ( Return )
C:\)FONT ID(R.turn)

• Some commands are followed by arguments. You usually choose
between two or more arguments. For example:
A: \ )BREAK ON ( Return )

• Type commands and parameters in uppercase or lowercase letters, or a
combination of both.
• Separate commands and parameters with delimiters. Valid delimiters
are:
- Space
- Tab key G!D
• Include the file extension when referring to a file that has a file
extension (except to run external commands and batch files). For
example, to execute the TEST.BAT batch file on drive A, type:
A:\)TEST(R.turn )

• Commands take effect only after you press the Return key.
• Wildcards and reserved words are not allowed in the names of any
commands.

30-2

Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files

IIIII

• The prompt is the default drive designation followed by a colon, a
backslash and a greater-than sign. For example, the prompt for drive A
is:
A:\)

You can customize the prompt to include other items.
• Some command explanations refer to diskette drives or files as the
source and destination. The source is the one from which you are
transferring information. The destination is the one to which you are
transferring information.
In all cases, type the source before the destination. The following
example of the COPY command illustrates the order:
A:\)COPV A:SOURCE.TXT C:DESTIMAT.TXT(RMum)
1 File(s) copied
A:\)

Support Files
The MS-DOS Version 3.10 operating system uses different support files to
perform its functions. Table 30-1 lists the support files and their use.
Table 30-1

Support Files and Usage

File

Contents

.COU

Contains country-specific information that is installed using the LCOUNTRY
command .

.FNT

Contains a text font file that is installed using the FONT command .

.GRF

Contains a graphics font file that is installed using the GRAFTABL command .

.KEY

Contains a keyboard map file that is installed using the KEYB command .

.PIF

Contains program information needed by MS-Windows to enable smooth execution of MS-DOS operating system commands while in a window .

.SRT

Contains a sort table used by the SORT command.

30-3

IIIII Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files
Directories
Directories store information about files on a disk or server. For example,
directories contain information about:
• File names
• File sizes
• File locations
• File modification dates
The directory you are currently in is called your current or default directory.
You can create and maintain directories on the same disk to organize and
store data conveniently. This method of organizing your files is called a hierarchical directory structure.

Hierarchical Directory Structure
A hierarchical directory structure resembles a tree structure: directories are
branches of the tree and files are the leaves. The root is the first level in the
directory structure, and does not appear in a directory listing. The root directory is automatically created when you format a disk and start copying files
to it.
The tree or file structure grows as you create new directories for groups of
files. Within each new directory, you can add files and create new directories. Figure 30-2 shows a hierarchical directory structure:
\

USERS

MARY

FORMS.TXT

JOE

TOOLS

MASM.EXE

LJ-OB14

Figure 30-2 Hierarchical Directory Structure

30-4

Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files

IIIII

\ is the root directory. The MS-DOS operating system creates this directory
when you format a disk or diskette.
USERS and TOOLS are directories under the directory named ROOT.
MASM.EXE is a file in the directory named TOOLS.
MARY and JOE are directories under the directory named USERS.
FORMS.TXT is a file in the directory named MARY.
You can move around this tree structure. For example, you can find any file
in the system by starting at the root and traveling along the branches to the
desired file. Conversely, you can start where you are within the file system
and travel towards the root.

Paths
A path name is a directory name, or sequence of directory names, followed
by an opti<?nal file name. When you use directories you must use a path
name to tell the MS-DOS operating system where files are located in the
directory structure. Each directory name is separated from the previous one
by a backslash (\).
The format of a path name is:
[drv: ][\]directory[\directory] ... [\filename]
For example:
A:\USER\MARV
If a path name begins with a slash, the MS-DOS operating system begins

searching for the specified file at the root directory. Otherwise, it begins
searching for the specified file from the current directory.

30-5

IIIII Commands, Directories, Paths, and Piles
When you are in your current directory, you can use a file name and its
corresponding path name interchangeably. Some sample names are:
\

Indicates the root directory. When used
alone, \ indicates the root directory.

\PROGRAMS

Is a directory named PROGRAMS under the
root directory.

A:\USERS\MARy\FORMS.TXT

Is a typical full path name. This path name is
a file named FORMS.TXT in the directory
named MARY belonging to the directory
named USERS on drive A.

MARy\FORMS.TXT

Is a relative path name. It names the file
FORMS.TXT in the directory MARY of the
current directory. If the current directory is
the root (\), it names \MARy\FORMS.TXT.

TEXT.TXT

Is the name of a file or directory in the current directory.

The MS-DOS operating system provides special shorthand notations for the
current directory and the directory above the current directory:
Is the shorthand notation used to indicate the current directory in all
hierarchical directory listings. The MS-DOS operating system automatically creates this entry when a directory is made.
Is the shorthand notation used to indicate the directory above your
current directory. The MS-DOS operating system automatically creates
this entry when a directory is made.
To see this notation, go to a directory other than the root directory (SYS in
this example) and type:
A:\SYS>DIR(Return )
Volume in drive A is MSDOS
Directory of A:\SYS

TEST

30-6

<DIR>
<DIR>
ASM
3 File(s)

1-01-86
1-01-86
1-01-86
929381 bytes

9:00a
9:008
9:04a

free

+- Current directory
+- Directory above current directory
<-

File in A: \SYS

Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files

IIIII

Paths With External Commands
The MS-DOS operating system must read an external command from a disk
before it can execute the command. Therefore, you must tell the MS-DOS
operating system where to look for that command file. You can either type
the path with the file name, or set the path using the PATH command.
After you specify a path using the PATH command, the MS-DOS operating
system searches your current directory and those directories specified in the
PATH command.
To tell the MS-DOS operating system to always search the directory A:\BIN,
type:
A:\) PATH A:\BIN~

To determine the current path, type:
A : \) PAT H ( Return )

Files
A file is a collection of related information. All programs, text, and data
reside in files, and each file has a unique name.

Naming Files
Give your files unique names. You cannot have two files with the same
name. File names help you remember what each file contains and eliminate
confusion when a directory contains many files.
A file name has two parts:
• The file name (1 to 8 characters long)
• The file extension (0 to 3 characters long)
Use a period (.) to separate a file name and a file extension.

30-7

IIIII Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files
You can type the file name and file extension using the following characters:

A-Z

a-z

1-9

(

)

}

Illegal File Names
Because the MS-DOS operating system reserves certain words for special purposes, you cannot use the following words as file names:
• AUX

• CON

• PRN

• NUL

• CLOCK$

• LPTI

• LPT2

• LPT3

• COMI

• COM2

Wildcards
With most MS-DOS operating system commands, you can use two special
characters called wildcards to replace a character or a group of characters.
Wildcards take the place of characters in file names and file extensions.
The wildcards are:
• The question mark (?)
• The asterisk C)

30-8

Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files 11111

Question Mark
A question mark in a file name or file extension indicates that any single
character or no character can occupy that position. For example, to display
the files MEMOI.TXT, MEM02.TXT, and MEM03.TXT, type:
A: \)D 1 R MEMO? TXT ,___cc_=c_,-"

Volume in drive A i5 DOS
Directory of A:

MEMo1
MEMo2
MEMo3

TXT
TXT
TXT

5981
1890
798

3 File(5)

1-01-86 9:00a
1-01-86 9:30a
1-01-86 9:44a
950473 byte5 free

Asterisk
An asterisk in a file name or file extension indicates that any number of
characters (zero or more) can occupy that position. For example, to display

the files MILLER.TXT, MEMOl.TXT, MEM02.TXT, and MEM03.TXT, type:
A:\)DIR M*. TXT CRe!>i'~-)
Volume in drive A i5 DOS
Directory of A:

MILLER
MEMo1
MEMo2
MEMo3

TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
4 File(5)

3290
5981
1890
798

1-05-86 10:34a
1-01-86 9:00a
1-01-86 9:30a
1-01-86 9:44a
947183 byte5 free

The wildcard designations·.· and· refer to all files in your current directory.

30-9

Chapter 31
Using the Hard Disk

This chapter discusses:
• What a hard disk is
• How to prepare your hard disk
• How to copy files to your hard disk
• How to repartition your hard disk

What Is a Hard Disk?
A hard disk is a large capacity, rigid disk sealed in a drive unit for protection.
A hard disk's storage capacity is defined in megabytes. A byte stores one
character; a megabyte stores one million characters. For example, if your
workstation has a 20-megabyte hard disk in the optional expansion box, you
can store 20 million characters on the disk.

Preparing Your Hard Disk
Before you can use your hard disk, you have to:
• Install your hard disk according to the directions in the VAXmate
Expansion Box Installation Guide.
• Run the FDISK command.
• Run the FORMAT command.

31-1

11111 Using the Hard Disk

Setting the Drive Type
Before you can use your hard disk, you have to tell the MS-DOS operating
system its size. You do this using the FDISK command.
To set the drive type:
1. Type:
A: \) FD 15K ( Return )

The main FDISK menu is displayed.

Hard Disk Setup Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Drive type is DEC RD31
Hard disk partitions:
MS-DOS C: (startup partition), 613 cylinders long.
Startup priority: floppy disk, hard disk, network.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Set drive type.
Initialize the drive. (WARNING: erases the entire drive)
Add a partition.
Delete a partition.
Set the startup partition.
Prepare drive for shipping.
Select network startup priority.
Exit from this program.

Enter your selection by typing a number followed by <Return> or by
pressing the corresponding function key:

31-2

Using tbe Hard Disk

IIIII

2. Type the number associated with the "Set the drive type" option, and
press:

Another menu is displayed.

Hard Disk setup Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
How do you want to set the drive type?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Set type to DEC RD31 (20MByte)
Set type to DEC RD32 (40MByte)
Select from industry standard types 1 through 14.
Select from industry standard types 16 through 23.
Enter a parameter table.
Return to main menu without changing type.

Enter your selection:

• If you have a DIGITAL 20 megabyte hard disk, type" 1" and press the

Return key. Proceed to the "Initializing Your Hard Disk" section .
• If you have a DIGITAL 40 megabyte hard disk, type "2" and press the

Return key. Proceed to the "Initializing Your Hard Disk" section.

31-3

IIIII Using the Hard Disk
• If you have an industry standard hard disk, type either "3" or "4"

and press the Return key.
Another menu is displayed.

Hard Disk Setup Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Industry standard types
(cylinders x heads x sectors) pre-comp cylinder, landing zone

I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
II.
12.
13.
14.

Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

(306
(615
(615
(940
(940
(615
(462
(733
(900
(820
(855
(855
(306
(733

x 4 x 17 ) 128, 305
x 4 x 17) 300, 615
x 6 x 17) 300, 615
x 8 x 17) 512, 940
x 6 x 17 ) 512, 940
x 4 x 17 ) none, 615
x 8 x 17) 256, 511
x 5 x 17) none, 733
x 15 x 17 ) none, 901
x 3 x 17) none, 820
x 5 x 17) none, 855
x 7 x 17) none, 855
x 8 x 17) 128, 319
x 7 x 17) none, 733

15. Return to the main menu without changing type.
Enter your selection:

Type the number associated with your industry standard hard disk
and press the Return key. Proceed to the "Initializing Your Hard
Disk" section.

31-4

Using tbe Hard Disk 11111

• If you have a hard disk other than a DIGITAL hard disk or an industry

standard hard disk, type:
5 Qje~~J

The following information is displayed.

Hard Disk Setup Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
You will be required to enter the following information:
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number

of
of
of
of
of

cylinders (tracks per surface).
heads (surfaces).
sectors per track (512 bytes each).
the first cylinder that requires write precompensation.
the cylinder to be used as a landing (parking) zone.

After you enter the data you will be given the opportunity to return to
the main menu without changing the drive type.
Enter number of cylinders:

Enter the information requested.
To set the drive type, press:
(ill]

To abandon the changes and return to the main menu, press:

Mter you set the drive type, the MS-DOS operating system knows the size of
the hard disk and uses this information later when you partition the hard
disk.

31-5

IIIII Using the Hard Disk
Initializing Your Hard Disk
Mer you set the drive type, you have to initialize the hard disk. During the
initialization process, the MS-DOS operating system places 512-byte sectors
on the hard disk.
To initialize the hard disk (from the FDISK main menu):
1. Type the number associated with the "Initialize the drive" option, and
press:

Another screen is displayed.
2. To continue the initialization process, press:

C£!D
To stop the initialization process and return to the main FDISK menu,
press:

Partitioning Your Hard Disk
After you initialize the hard disk, you have to divide it into sections, called
partitions. Each partition can have a much larger storage capacity than a
single diskette, depending upon the size partitions you choose.
You determine the size of each partition on your hard disk. You can create
one to four partitions. Each partition can be any size, as long as the total size
of all partitions does not exceed the total size of the hard disk.
You can think of partitions as different MS-DOS operating system drives. For
example, four equal partitions on a 20-megabyte hard disk would give you:
Drive C:

25%

5 megabytes

Drive D:

25%

5 megabytes

Drive E:

25%

5 megabytes

Drive F:

25%

5 megabytes

31-6

Using the Hard Disk 11111

You could also partition your hard disk with just two partitions, giving you:
Drive C:

50%

10 megabytes

Drive D:

50%

10 megabytes

We recommend you make only one panition, and that you make that partition 100 percent of your hard disk's available storage capacity. This enables
you to use all the available storage capacity of your hard disk in one directory structure.
To add a partition to your hard disk (from the FDISK main menu):
1. Type the number associated with the "Add a partition" option, and
press:

A screen is displayed that indicates the percent of available storage
space on your hard disk.
2. Enter the size of the partition you want by percent and press:

Continue this step until you add the panitions you want. Remember,
you can have only four partitions.
If you have added or deleted any partitions, you must now restart the

MS-DOS operating system by pressing:

31-7

IIIII

Using the Hard Disk

Setting the Start-up Partition
The start-up partition is the partition from which you start the MS-DOS operating system. It usually contains:
• The MS-DOS operating system files
• The CONFIG.SYS file
• The AUTOEXEC.BAT file
You set the start-up partition so that the MS-DOS operating system can be
read into memory from the hard disk. This eliminates the need for a key
diskette in the diskette drive every time you tum on your workstation, or
restart the MS-DOS operating system.
We recommend you make your first partition your start-up partition. For
example, if you have three partitions (drives C:, D:, E:), make drive C: your
start-up partition.
To set the start-up partition (from the FDISK main menu):
1. Type the number associated with the "Set the start-up partition" option,
and press:

Another menu is displayed.
2. Select the partition you want as the start-up partition, and press:

3. To exit from the FDISK program, type the number associated with the
"EXit from this program" option, and press:

If you have added or deleted any partitions, you must now restart the

MS-DOS operating system by pressing:
( CtrllAll/Del)

31-8

Using tbe Hard Disk

IIIII

Formatting Your Hard Disk
After you partition your hard disk, you have to format each panition. Formatting places the MS-DOS operating system directory structure on each
partition.
During the formatting process, you should copy the MS-DOS operating system
to the start-up partition. This enables you to:
• Save your key diskette
• Stan the MS-DOS operating system from the hard disk
• Use other diskettes in your diskette drive
To format your start-up partition and copy IO.SYS, MSDOS.SYS,
COMMAND.COM, and the boot loader to it (drive C in this example):
1. Type:
A: \) FORMAT

IS ( Return )

The FORMAT command with the /S parameter formats the specified
partition and copies IO.SYS, MSDOS.SYS, COMMAND.COM, and the boot
loader to the panition. IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS are hidden files, so you
cannot see them in a directory listing.
To format any partition other than your stan-up panition (drive D in this
example):
1. Type:
A: \) FORMAT D: (Return)

31-9

IIIII

Using the Hard Disk

Copying Files .to Your Hard Disk
After you format a partition, you can copy files to it using the COPY
command.
To copy all files from drive A to drive C:
1. Type:
A:\)CDPV

*.* C:(Relurn)

Repartitioning the Hard Disk
To repartition your hard disk, use the FDISK command.
CAUTION

Deleting a partition on your hard disk destroys all existing data on
that partition. Therefore, back up or copy all files on the partition
you want to delete to diskettes or to a server before you delete the
partition.
To repartition your hard disk:
1. Type:
A:\)FDISK( Return)

The FDISK main menu is displayed.
2. Type the number associated with the "Delete a partition" option, and
press:

Another menu is displayed.
3. Type the number associated with the partition you want to delete and
press:

Continue deleting partitions until you delete all the partitions you want
to delete.

31-10

Using the Hard Disk

IIIII

4. Now, type the number associated with the "Add a partition" option,
and press:

5. Type the percentage of the available space you want in the partition,
and press:

Ci::I etum )
Continue adding partitions until you add all the partitions you want to
add. Remember you can only have four partitions.
After you add the partitions you want, restart the MS-DOS operating system.
Remember also to format the partitions you have added.

31-11

Chapter 32
MS-DOS Operating
System Commands

This chapter discusses the MS-DOS operating system commands and contains
the following information about each command:
• Purpose
• Format
• Comments
• Examples
The commands are listed alphabetically for easy reference.
In most instances, the MS-DOS operating system response follows an
example.

32-1

11111 MS-DOS Operating System Commands

Conventions Used
Table 32-1 lists the conventions used in the discussion of commands.
Table 32-1

Conventions

Designation

Meaning

filename.ext

Is any valid drive, path, file name and file extension. Both the drive
and the path are optional. Valid drives are diskette drive A:, and
hard disk drives Co, D:, E:, F:. The file name does not refer to a
device or to a disk drive designation.

Square brackets indicate that an item is optional. If you include the
optional information, do not type the square brackets. For example,
when you use the FONT command and specify a file name, you do
not have to specify the file extension:
FONT filename[.ext]
If you want to include the file extension, type only the extension.

A vertical bar indicates that you must choose between two or more
items. For example, if you specify an argument after the BREAK
command, you must choose ON or OFF:
BREAK [ON I OFF]
Indicates that the preceding information can be repeated. In the
following example, you can specify more than one file name and
file extension when you use the ATTRIB command:
ATTRIB filename.ext ...

Type all punctuation as it is shown. Do not type square brackets, braces, or
the bar.

Commands
Table 32-2 lists and briefly describes the MS-DOS internal and external commands. Use this table as a quick reference once you become familiar with the
MS-DOS operating system commands.
A detailed description of each command follows the table.

32-2

MS-DOS Operating System Commands

Table 32-2

IIIII

MS-DOS Operating System Commands

Command

Type

Use

ANSI

Driver

A console device driver that accepts ANSI terminal escape sequences

APPEND

External

Sets a search path for nonexecutable files

ASSIGN

External

Sends input/output from one drive to a different drive

ATTRIB

External

Sets, clears, and displays MS-DOS file attributes

BACKUP

External

Makes back-up copies of files from any disk (memory
drive, diskette, hard disk)

BREAK

Internal

Sets/clears Ctrl/C check

CHDIR

Internal

Changes directories

CHKDSK

External

Scans the disk of the default or designated drive and
checks for errors

CLS

Internal

Clears the screen

COMMAND

External

Starts the command processor

COPY

Internal

Copies files you specify

CTTY

Internal

Changes console TTY

DATE

Internal

Displays and sets the date

DEL

Internal

Deletes files you specify

DlR

Internal

Lists requested directory entries

DlSKCOPY

External

Copies diskettes by tracks, not files

ECHO

Internal

Turns on/off the echoing of batch file command lines
to the workstation and turns on/off the MS-DOS operating system prompt

EDLIN

External

Is a line editor

ERASE

Internal

Deletes files you specify

EXE2BIN

External

Converts relocatable executable files to binary format

EXIT

Internal

Exits from the command processor, and returns to the
previous level

External

Compares files and displays differences

FDiSK

External

Initializes and partitions the hard disk

External

Searches for a string of text in a specified file

FIND

32-3

IIIII MS-DOS Operating System Commands
Table 32-2 MS-DOS Operating System Commands (cont.)
Command

Type

Use

FONT

External

Loads the specified character font into font RAM

FOR

Internal

Provides repeated execution of commands in a batch
file or at the MS-DOS operating system prompt

FORMAT

External

Formats a disk or floppy diskette for the MS-DOS operating system

GOTO

Internal

Provides logic flow control for batch file command
lines

GRAFTABL

External

Loads graphic character fonts

GRAPHICS

External

Enables the printing of a graphic screen display on a
printer in graphics mode

Internal

Provides logic flow control for batch file command
lines

JOIN

External

Joins a disk drive to a specific path name

KEYB

External

Loads a specified keyboard map file

LABEL

External

Creates, changes, or deletes a volume label

LCOUNTRY

External

Loads country-specific information and case conversion
tables

MDRIVE

Driver

Creates a memory drive in your user memory or in
extended memory

MKDIR

Internal

Creates a directory

MODE

External

Sets parameters for printer set up, video, communications set up, printer redirection, and keyboard

External

Displays output one screen at a time

NET

Enables you to use network resources if you are connected to a network

PATH

Internal

Sets or displays a command search path

PAUSE

Internal

Temporarily suspends execution of a batch file

PERMIT

External

Offers a single session, single connection file server

External

Prints specified files

PROMPT

Internal

Enables customizing of the command prompt

RECOVER

External

Recovers a files or disk containing bad sectors

32-4

MS-DOS Operating System Commands

Table 32-2

IIIII

MS-DOS Operating System Commands (cont.)

Command

Type

Use

REM

Internal

Displays a comment in a batch file

REN

Internal

Renames files

RESTORE

External

Restores files saved using the BACKUP command

RMDIR

Internal

Removes a directory

SELECT

External

Enables the changing of the CONFIG.SYS file and
AUTOEXEC.BAT file to the desired character set and
country information

SET

Internal

Sets one string value to another string value, and displays the system environment

External

Installs file sharing and locking for a network

SHIFT

Internal

Increases the number of replaceable parameters in the
batch process

SORT

External

Sorts data alphabetically, forward or backward

SUBST

External

Substitutes a logical drive for a path name

SYS

External

Transfers the MS-DOS operating system files from one
disk to another disk

TIME

Internal

Displays and sets the time

TYPE

Internal

Displays the contents of the specified file

VER

Internal

Displays the MS-DOS operating system version number

VERIFY

Internal

Turns on/off the verifying of information written to a
diskette or disk

VOL

Internal

Displays the default drive's label

You cannot use the following MS-DOS operating system commands with a
remote network resource as the target:
CHKDSK

DISKCOPY

FORMAT

JOIN

LABEL

RECOVER

SUBST

SYS

You can use these commands from a network server on your local resources.

32-5

11111 ANSI

ANSI
ANSI.SYS is an MS-DOS loadable device driver that replaces the standard console device driver. An ANSI escape sequence is a series of characters that
begins with an escape character or keystroke and defines the following
functions:
• Cursor control functions
• Erase functions
• Set graphics rendition function
• Set mode functions
• Reset mode functions
• Keyboard key reassignment functions

Format
The following command line must be included in your CONFIG.SYS file to
install the ANSI device driver:
DEVICE=[drv:][\path\]ANSI.SYS
CAUTION

We recommend you do not change your CONFIG.SYS file if you
are using your workstation in a network environment.
For more information about ANSI.SYS, see the VAXmate Technical Reference
Manual.

32-6

APPEND

IIIII

APPEND
Purpose
To set the search path for nonexecutable files outside the current directory,
use the APPEND command. The APPEND command is an external command.

Format
APPEND [=] [drv:\path];[drv:\path]; [... ]
Where:
dry:

Is the drive you want to append to your current directory.

path

Is the path you want to append to your current directory.

Comments
The APPEND command enables you to store and use data files without going
to the directory that contains those files.
Appended directories can be:
• Local directories on your workstation
• Remote directories on a server
• A combination of both
If an application program reads a file from an appended directory and then
writes it back to disk, the file is written to the current directory.

You can append as many directories as you can specify with 128 characters.
Each time you use the APPEND command, you replace the effect of the preceding APPEND command (unless you type APPEND with no parameters).
If you use the APPEND command and the ASSIGN command together, you

must enter the APPEND command first.
You can cancel any APPEND commands (see the following examples).

32-7

IIIII APPEND
Example 1
To append the directory A:\ACCOUNTS to the directory A:\, type:
A: \) APPEND A: \ACCOUNTS r-;;.-:~-------,
A:\)

Example 2
To see a list of appended directories, type:

APPEND=A:\ACCOUHTS
A:\)

Example 3
To cancel any previous appends, type:
A: \) APPEND
A:\)

32-8

ASSIGN

IIIII

ASSIGN
Purpose
To send input and output from one drive to another, use the ASSIGN command. The ASSIGN command is an external command.

Format
ASSIGN [x [=] y]
Where:
x

Is the drive that an application program reads from and writes to.

Is the drive that you want an application program to read from and
write to.

Comments
The ASSIGN command enables you to reassign the drive an application program reads from and writes to. For example, assume you use an application
program that reads data from drive A. To direct the same application to read
from drive C, use the ASSIGN command.
Do not use the ASSIGN command with the BACKUP or PRINT commands or
during normal use of the MS-DOS operating system. The ASSIGN command
hides the true device type from commands that require actual drive
information.
You do not have to type the colon after the drive letters you enter for the x
and y values.
The FORMAT and DISKCOPY commands ignore any drive reassignments.
You can reset all drives to their original assignment (see the following
examples).

32-9

IIIII ASSIGN
Example 1
To send requests that an application program makes for drive A to drive C,
type:
C : \ > ASS I GN A C (fIetu," )

C:\>

Example 2
To send requests that an application program makes for drive A or drive C to
drive D, type:
D:\>ASSIGN A=D C=D~
D: \>

Example 3
To reset drive A (which was assigned to drive D in the previous example)
back to drive A, type:
D:\>ASSIGN A=A(Return)
D: \>

Example 4
To reset all drives to their original assignment, type:
D: \ > ASS I GN (ReturnO]
D:\>

32-10

ATTRIB \\\\\

ATTRIB

Purpose
To set, clear and display MS-DOS file attributes, use the ATTRIB command.
The ATTRIB command is an external command.

Format
ATTRIB [filename.ext [... ] [+/-][A][S][H][R]]
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file
whose attributes are being enabled or disabled. You can include wildcards. If you do not specify a drive, the ATTRIB
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the ATTRIB command uses the current directory.

Enables an attribute.
Disables an attribute.

Specifies the archive attribute.

Specifies the system attribute. A system file makes up part of
the MS-DOS operating system.

Specifies the hidden attribute. You cannot see a hidden file
when you use the DIR command.

Specifies the read-only attribute. You can read and execute a
file; you cannot change or delete it.

Comments
You can type the attributes before or after the file name and file extension.
You can use either the + or the - with an attribute. You cannot use both at
the same time with the same attribute.

32-11

11111 ATTRIB

Examples
Table 32-3 shows examples of the ATTRIB command.
Table 32-3

ATTRIB Command Examples

Command Line

Result

ATIRIB

Displays the ATIRIB help message.

ATIRIB MEMO.TXT

Displays the attributes of MEMO.TXT.

ATIRIB MEMO.TXT +H

Sets MEMO.TXT to hidden.

ATIRIB +H MEMO. TXT

Sets MEMO.TXT to hidden.

ATIRIB MEMO.TXT -S

Clears MEMO.TXT of the system attribute.

ATIRIB -S MEMO.TXT

Clears MEMO.TXT of the system attribute.

ATIRIB +H MEMO.TXT -S

Sets MEMO.TXT to hidden and clears it of the system attribute.

ATTRIB MEMO.TXT +ASHR

Sets MEMO.TXT to archived, system, hidden, and
read-only.

ATIRIB MEMO.TXT +A+S+H+R

Sets MEMO.TXT to archived, system, hidden, and
read only.

ATIRIB •. TXT +A +H +S +R

Sets all .TXT files to archived, hidden, system, and
read-only.

ATIRIB •. TXT +A-H+S-R

Sets all .TXT files to archived and system, and
clears them of the hidden and read-only attributes.

ATIRIB MEMO.TXT +SR -AH

Sets MEMO.TXT to system and read-only, and
clears it of the archived and hidden attributes.

32-12

BACKUP

IIIII

BACKUP
Purpose
To save files from one disk to another, use the external BACKUP command.
In addition to backing up files to local drives, the BACKUP command allows
you to back up files to a network drive.

Format
BACKUP [filename.ext drv2:[\path2] [fA] [fS] [jM] [fD:dd-mm-yy))
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to back up. If you do not specify a drive, the BACKUP
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the BACKUP command uses the current directory.

drv2:

Is the destination drive to which you want to back up a file.
The destination drive can be any drive on your workstation
(Mdrive, hard disk drive, network drive, or diskette).

path2

Is the path for the destination drive. If you do not specify a
path, and you are backing up to a diskette, the BACKUP command uses the root directory. If you are backing up to a hard
disk or the network, the subdirectory BKSUBDIR is created.

Adds to the current contents of the back-up diskette. The jA
qualifier does not erase existing files on the diskette. This
qualifier has meaning only when you back up files to a
diskette.

Backs up subdirectories.

Backs up only those files that were modified since the last
backup.

jD:dd-mm-yy

Backs up only those files that were modified on or after the
specified date. The date format only works for country code
001 (US).
dd is the day.
mm is the month.
yy is the year.

32-13

IIIII BACKUP
Comments
Using the BACKUP command, you can back up all files on all directories by
typing one command.
If the destination disk for the back-up procedure is a hard disk, the BACKUP
command adds more backup files to the existing backup files. Any files on a
diskette are erased unless you specify the fA qualifier.
You can also use the BACKUP command to back up files to a subdirectory.
If you back up files to diskettes, you must have sufficient formatted diskettes
for the number of files being backed up. If you use more than one diskette,

be sure to label them in the order in which you will restore them.
You must run the RESTORE command before you can use the files you
backed up.
Table 32-4 lists valid file specifications for the BACKUP command.
Table 32-4 BACKUP File Specifications
Specification

Meaning

".DOC

Backs up all .DOC files in the current directory.
Backs up all files in the current directory.

TEST?MEM

Backs up all .MEM files that start with the name TEST, such as,
TEST.MEM, TESTl.MEM, TEST2.MEM, and TEST.MEM.
Backs up all files in the current directory.
Backs up all files in the directory above the current directory.

\* .*

Backs up all files in the root directory of the current drive.

A:\""

Backs up all files in the root directory of drive A.

A:\TEST\WHO\""

Backs up all files in the subdirectory WHO of the directory
TEST on drive A.

32-14

BACKUP 11111

Example 1
To display the BACKUP help message, type:
A: \ >EACKUP (ReiUr!Q

Example 2
To back up all files in the current directory to drive A, type:
C:\>BACI(UP ' . " A:\(Ratum)

In5ert back-up di5kette
in drive A:
WARNING: File5 in DRIVE A: will be ERASED

Pre55 any key when ready
Backing up file5 to drive A
Di5k Number: 1

To see the files you saved using the BACKUP command, use the DIR command at the MS-DOS operating system prompt.

Example 3
To back up all files in all directories on drive C to drive A, type:
C:\>BACKUP C:\*,*

IS(§."!!'..J

In5ert back-up di5kette 1 in drive A:
WARNING: File5 in DRIVE A: will be ERASED

Pre55 any key when ready
Backing up file5 to drive A
Di5k Number: 1

32-15

IIIII BACKUP
Example 4

To back up to diskettes all root directory files that were modified since the
last backup, type:
C:\>BACKUP C:\*.* A: IM<Return>
Insert back-up diskette 1 in drive A:
WARNING: Files in DRIVE A: will be ERASED

Press any key when ready
Backing up files to drive A
Di s k Number: 1
Example 5

To back up the files in the root directory on drive A to network drive I, type:
A:\>8ACKUP A:\*.* I:<Return>
Backing up files to drive I
Disk Number: 1

32-16

BREAK 11111

BREAK
Purpose
To set or clear the Ctrl/C check, use the BREAK command. The BREAK command is an internal command.

Format
BREAK [ON I OFF]

Comments
If you run an application program that uses Ctrl/C, you can turn off the

MS-DOS Ctrl/C function. When you do specify BREAK ON, pressing Ctrl/C
affects the application program and not the MS-DOS operating system.
Specify the BREAK OFF command before you run an application program.
Specify the BREAK ON command after you run an application program and
are using the MS-DOS operating system.

Example
To display the current setting of BREAK, type:
A: \)BREAK (Return)
BREAK 15 off
A:\)

32-17

11111 CHDIR

CHDIR
Purpose
To display a directory or change to another directory, use the CHDIR command. The CHDIR command is an internal command.
Format
CHDIR I CD [path]
Where:
path

Is the path you want to change to.

Comments
You can display the path name to your current directory by typing the
CHDIR command without parameters.
Example 1
To change from the root directory to the subdirectory \BIN, type:
A: \)CHDIR BIN ~

A:\Bltb

Example 2
To change to the subdirectory \BIN\DSER\JOE\FORMS, type:
A:\)CHDIR \BIN\USER\JOE\FORMS(Return)
A:\BIN\USER\JOE\FORMS)

Example 3
To change to the directory above your current directory, type:
A: \ ) CHD I R .. ( Return )
A:\BIN\USER\JOE)

32-18

CHKDSK 11111

CHKDSK
Purpose
To scan a disk and check it for errors, use the CHKDSK command. The
CHKDSK command is an external command.

Format
CHKDSK [filename. ext ][/F][jV]
Where:
filename .ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to execute the CHKDSK command on. If you do not
specify a drive, the CHKDSK command uses the default drive.
If you do not specify a path, CHKDSK uses the current directory. If a file name is specified, CHKDSK indicates if the file
is stored contiguously.

Corrects errors found using CHKDSK. File(s) named
FILE???? .CHK that contain the lost links are then created in
the specified disk's root directory.

Lists all files in all the directories on the disk.

Comments
Do not use the CHKDSK command under MS-Windows.
Use CHKDSK periodically on each disk to check for errors in the directory. If
errors are found, CHKDSK displays a message and a status report.
If you type a file name after CHKDSK, a status report is displayed for the disk

and for the individual file.
You can redirect the output from CHKDSK to a file to save the status report.
If you redirect CHKDSK output, do not use the IF qualifier.
NOTE

You cannot use the CHKDSK command with any network,
ASSIGNed, or SUBSTed drives.

32-19

11111 CHKDSK

Example 1

To list all the files in all the directories on the default drive, type:
A: \ >CHKDSK IV ~

Information similar to the following information is displayed:
Volume VAXMATE
created Jan 1, 19869:00a
Directory A:\
A:\IO.SYS
A:\MSDOS.SYS
A:\COMMAND.COM
Directory A:\SYS
Directory A:\SYS\DOS
A:\SYS\DOS\ANSI.SYS

Directory A:\SYS\NET
A:\SYS\NET\SHARE.EXE

Example 2

To display a CHKDSK status report, type:
C: \>CHKDSK ~
21274624
36864
47104
8097792
13092864

bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes

total disk space
in 2 hidden files
in 17 directories
in 595 user files
available on di!;k

655360 bytes total memory
594480 bytes free
Example 3

To store a CHKDSK status report in a file, type:
A:\>CHKDSK > STATUS.TXT~

32-20

CIS 11111

CLS

Purpose
To clear the screen, use the CLS command. The CLS command is an internal
command.

Format
CLS

Example
To clear the screen, type:
A : \) CL 5 C!fui,iiiJ

32-21

11111 COMMAND

COMMAND
Purpose
To start a new command processor, use the COMMAND command. The COMMAND command is an external command. The command processor is the
MS-DOS operating system program that contains all the internal commands.

Format
COMMAND [drv:][\path][cttydev][JP][/C string]
Where:
drv:

Is the drive containing the COMMAND.COM file. If you do not
specify a drive, the COMMAND command uses the default drive.

path

Is the path to the directory containing the COMMAND. COM file.
If you do not specify a path, the COMMAND command uses the
current directory.

cttydev

Enables you to specify a different device for input and output.

IP
IC string

Tells COMMAND.COM not to exit to any higher level.

32-22

Tells the command processor to execute the command or commands specified by string and then return.

COMMAND

IIIII

Comments

The COMMAND command loads a new command processor. It is loaded in
two pans:
• The transient part, which an application program can write over
• The resident part, which remains in memory and that an application
program cannot write over
Some application programs write over the transient pan of the
COMMAND.COM file when they run. When this occurs, the resident part of
the command processor looks for the COMMAND.COM file. When resident
pan of the command processor finds the COMMAND.COM file, it reloads it.
Loading a new command shell decreases the free memory you have available.
IMPORTANT
If you use any terminate and stay resident programs, first exit from
all spawned command shells. If you do not exit, the terminate and

stay resident program uses considerably more memory than
normal.
Example

To start a new command processor, and execute the CHKDSK command on
drive A, and return to the first command processor, type:
A:\) COMMAND IC CHKDSK A: (Return )

32-23

IIIII COpy
COpy
Purpose
To copy or append files, use the COpy command. The COpy command is an
internal command.
To Copy Files

Format
COPY [fA
[fA

IB] filename1.ext
IB] [filename2.ext1 [fA

IBH IV]

Where:
filename I.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the files
you want to copy. If you do not specify a source drive, the
COPY command uses the default drive. If you do not specify
a path, the COPY command uses the current directory.

filename2.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the copied
files. If you do not specify the destination drive, the COpy
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the COPY command uses the current directory.

When used with the source file, the COPY command with
the IA qualifier treats the files as an ASCII text file. Data in
the file is copied up to, but not including, the first end-offile character, (Ctrl/Z). The remainder of the file is not
copied.
When used with the destination file, the COPY command
with the IA qualifier adds an end-of-file character as the last
character.

When used with the source file, the COpy command with
the IB qualifier copies the entire file, including any end-offile character.
When used with the destination file, the COPY command
with the IB qualifier adds no end-of-file character.

32-24

COpy

IIIII

Causes the MS-DOS operating system to verify that the sectors
written on the destination diskette are recorded properly.

IV also causes the COpy command to copy more slowly because the MS-DOS operating system checks each entry recorded on the disk.
The IA and IB qualifiers each apply to the file name preceding it and to all
remaining files on the command line until another IA or IB qualifier occurs.

Comments
If you do not specify the destination file name and file extension, the file is
copied to the default drive with the original file name and file extension.
If you do not specify the destination file name and file extension, and the

original file is on the default drive, the COpy command quits. You cannot
copy files to themselves.
If you specify the destination drive, file name, and file extension, you can

type it in one of three ways:
• You can type the destination drive. The COPY command copies the file
to the specified drive. The copied file name is the same name as the
original file name.
• You can type the destination file name and file extension. The COPY
command copies the original file to a file on the default drive with the
specified file name and file extension. In this case, the original file can
also be on the default drive.
• You can type the destination drive, file name, and file extension. The
COPY command copies the original file to the specified drive and gives
it the new file name and file extension.

Example 1
To copy REPORT.TXT in the default directory on drive C to the default drive,
type:
A: \) COpy C: REPORT. TXT '-==_J
1 File(s) copied
A:\)

32-25

IIIII COpy
Example 2
To copy REPORT. TXT to drive C, type:
A:\>COPY REPORT.TXT C: (Return)
1 File(s) copied

A:\>

Example 3
To make a copy of MEMO.TXT and name it LETTER. TXT , type:
A:\>COPY MEMO.TXT LETTER.TXT(Return)
1 File(s) copied

A:\>

Example 4
To copy MEMO.TXT to drive C and name it UPDATE. TXT, type:
A:\>COPY MEMO.TXT C:UPDATE.TXT(Return)
1 File(s) copied

A:\>

Example 5
To copy all the files in \BIN\USERS\JOE to \ACCOUNTS, type:
A:\>COPY \BIN\USERS\JOE \ACCDUNTS(Relurn)
A:\BIN\USERS\JOE\COMMAND.COM
A:\BIN\USERS\JOE\CONFIG.SYS
A:\BIN\USERS\JOE\AUTOEXEC.BAT
3 File(s) copied

A:\>

32-26

COpy

IIIII

To Append Files
Format

COPY [/A liB] filename1.ext [/A liB]
+ filename2.ext [fA
IB] + [ ••• ]
filename3.ext [/A liB] [IV]

Where:
filename 1. ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to append. If you do not specify a source drive, the
COPY command uses the default drive. If you do not specify
a path, the COPY command uses the current directory.

filename2.ext

filename3.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the appended files. If you do not specify a destination drive, the
COpy command uses the default drive. If you do not specify
a path, the COPY command uses the current directory.

When used with the source file, the COpy command with
the IA qualifier treats the file as an ASCII text file. Data in
the file is copied up to, but not including, the first end-offile character, (Ctrl/Z). The rest of the file is not copied.
When used with the destination file, the COPY command
with the IA qualifier adds an end-of-file character as the last
character.

When used with the source file, the COPY command with
the IB qualifier copies the entire file, including any end-offile character.
When used with the destination file, the COPY command
with the IB qualifier adds no end-of-file character.

32-27

IIIII COpy
Causes the MS-DOS operating system to verify that the sectors
written on the destination diskette are recorded properly.

IV also causes the COPY command to run more slowly because the MS-DOS operating system checks each entry recorded on the disk.
The jA and jB qualifiers each apply to the file name preceding it and to all
remaining files on the command line until another jA or jB qualifier occurs.

Comments
The COpy command enables you to append files while copying. You can list
any number of files as parameters to the COPY command, separated by plus
signs (+).
You can use wildcards with COpy to append files.
You cannot append two files together if any source file other than the first
source file has the same name as the destination file. The problem occurs
because the original file is overwritten by the new file.
When you append files, the default qualifier is jA.

Example 1
To append A.XYZ, B.MEM, and C:C.TXT into a file named BIGFILE.TXT on
the default drive, type:
A:\)COPY A.XYZ
A.XYZ
B.MEM
C:C.TXT

B.MEM

1 File(!i) copied
A:\)

32-28

C:C.TXT BIGFILE.TXT(Return)

COpy

IIIII

Example 2

To append all .LST files into a file named COMBIN.PRN, type:
A:\) COPY *.LST COMBIN.PRN(Return)

ONE.LST
TWO.LST
THREE.LST

A:\)

Example 3

To append each .LST file with its corresponding .REF file into a .PRN file,
type:
A:\) COPY ".LST + *.REF *.PRN(i:i"eI.7iii")

OHE.LST
ONE.REF
TWO.LST
TWO.REF
THREE.LST
THREE.REF
3 File(!!) copied
A:\)

NOTE
If a .LST file exists, but its corresponding .REF file does not exist,

the COPY command makes a copy of the .LST file and gives it the
.PRN file extension.
If a .LST file does not exist, but its corresponding .REF file does

exist, the COPY command does not append any files.

32-29

IIIII

COpy

Example 4
To append all .LST files, and then all .REF files, into one file named
COMBIN.PRN, type:.

A:\)COPV ".LST + ".REF COMBIH.PRH(Return)
OHE.LST
TWO.LST
THREE.LST
OHE.REF
TWO.REF
THREE.REF
File(s) copied
A:\)

Example 5
To append A.COM (plus the end-of-file character), B.XYZ (to the first end-offile character), and C:C.TXT into a file named BIGFILE.TXT, type:

A:\)COPV A.COM/B + B.XVZ/A
A.COM
B.XVZ
C:C.TXT

C:C.TXT BIGFILE.TXT(R~urn)

1 Flle(s) copied
A:\)

Example 6
To update the time and date for the file MEMO.TXT, type:

A:\)COPV MEMO.TXT+,,(Return)
MEMO.TXT
1 File(s) copied
A:\)

32-30

CTTY

IIIII

CTTY

Purpose
To change the device from which you issue commands, use the CTIY command. The CTIY command is an internal command. TIY represents the
console.

Format
CTIY device
Where:
Is the device from which you supply commands to the
MS-DOS operating system.

device

Example 1

To move all command input/output (I/O) from the console to the AUX port,
type:
A:\) CTTV flUX

Example 2

To move I/O back to the console from the device on the AUX port, type:
A:\) ern

ern!

32-31

IIIII DATE
DATE
Purpose
To enter or change the date, use the DATE command. The DATE command is
an internal command.

Format
DATE [mm-dd-[yy]yy]
Where:
mm

Is the month (1,2, ... , 12).

Is the day (1, 2, ..., 31).

Is the year (80, 81, ... ,99; or 1980, 1981, ... ,2099).

Comments
You can change the date from your workstation or from a batch file.
The date format shown is for the United States. The form for the DATE command depends on the country specified in the CONFIG.SYS file.
If you type parameters after the DATE command, use numerals only.

You can separate the month, day, and year entries by:
• hyphens ( - )
• periods ( . )
• slashes ( / )
The MS-DOS operating system changes months and years correctly, whether
the month has 31, 30, 29, or 28 days. The MS-DOS operating system also
handles leap years.

32-32

DATE 11111

Example 1

To set a new date, type:
A : \ ) D ATE ( Return )

Current date is Wed
1-01-1986
Enter new date (mm-dd-yy):

You can type a new date, or press the Return key if you desire no changes.
Example 2

To set the new date to March 1, 1986, type:
A:\)DATE 3-1-86~
A:\)

32-33

IIIII DEL
DEL

Purpose
To delete files from a directory, use the DEL command. The DEL command is
an internal command. You can also use the ERASE command to erase files.

Format
DEL filename .ext
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to delete. If you do not specify a drive, the DEL command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path, the
DEL command uses the current directory. If you specify a
directory path but no file name, all files in that directory are
deleted.

Comments
If you want to delete all files in the directory or in a subdirectory, the DEL

command prompts you for a 'Y' or 'N' response.

Example
To delete the file MEMO.TXT on drive A, type:
A:\>DEL
A:\>

32-34

MEMO.TXT~

DIR

IIIII

DIR

Purpose
To display a list of files in a directory, use the DIR command. The DIR
command is an internal command.

Format
DIR [filename.ext][/P][fW]
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the files
you want displayed. If you do not specify a drive, the DIR
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the DIR command uses the current directory.

Selects page mode. When you use the IP qualifier, the directory display pauses after the screen is filled. To resume the
display of output, press any key.

Selects wide display. When you use the fW qualifier, only
file names are displayed. The file size and the time and date
of the last modification are not displayed. File names are displayed five to a line.

Comments
When you use the DIR command, files are listed with the size, the time, and
the date of their last modification.
The directory date and time formats are dependent on the country specified
in the CONFIG.SYS file.
You can use the wildcard characters? and· in the file name option. Table
32-5 lists the DIR command equivalents.

32-35

11111 DIR

Table 32-5 DIR Command Equivalents
Command

? Equivalent

• Equivalent

DlR

DlR ???????? ???

DIR' ,

DlR FILENAME

DlR FILENAME.???

DlR FILENAME.'

DlR .EXT

DlR ???????? .EXT

DlR '.EXT

DlR.

DlR ????????

DlR '.

Example 1
To display all the files on the default directory, type:
A:\)DIRCReturn )

Example 2
To display all the files in the subdirectory \BIN\USERS, type:
A:\)DIR \BIN\USERS(Retu,n)

Example 3
To display all the files in the default directory on drive C, type:
A:\)DIR C: (Return)

Example 4
To display all files named MEMO on the default drive, type:
A: \) DIR MEMO (Return)

Volume in drive A i5 DOS
Directory of A:\
MEMO
MEMO

A:\)

32-36

LST
TXT

145
2-05-86 12:58p
598
2-08-86
9:10a
2 File(!!!)
1173011 byte!!! free

DISKCOPY

IIIII

DISKCOPY
Purpose
To make an image copy of a diskette, use the DISKCOPY command. The
DISKCOPY command is an external command.

Format
DISKCOPY [drvl: [drv2:]]
Where:
drvl:

Is the source drive containing the diskette to be copied.

drv2:

Is the destination drive containing the diskette to which files are
copied.

Comments
The DISKCOPY command makes multiple passes to copy a diskette. More
passes are required if you are running MS-Windows and other applications.
Because your workstation has a double-sided 96-track per inch (TPI) drive,
you can copy any single- or double-sided 8-, 9-, or IS-sector per track diskette. You can also copy RXSO diskettes, but the destination diskette must be
formatted on a Rainbow computer first. Diskettes copied on a 96-TPI drive
may not be readable by 48-TPI drives.
The DISKCOPY command formats the destination diskette if its format is not
the same as the source diskette.
If you specify drive A as the source drive, and drive B as the destination

drive, the DISKCOPY command prompts you to insert a diskette into drive A.
If you specify drive A as the source drive, but specify no destination drive,

the DISKCOPY command assumes you are copying from drive A to drive A.
NOTE

You cannot use the DISKCOPY command with remote network
resources.

32-37

11111 DISKCOPY

Example 1
To display the DlSKCOPY help message, type:
A:\)DISKCOPV(Relum)

Example 2
To copy the contents of a diskette in drive A to a new diskette, type:
A:\)DISKCOPV A: A:(kmu'n)
Diskcopy Utility Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation

Insert source disk into drive A: and press <Return) when ready.
Copying 80 tracks, 2 side(s), 15 sectors per track.
Insert target disk into drive A: and press <Return) when ready.
A:\)

32·38

ECHO

IIIII

ECHO
Purpose
To turn the echo feature on or off, use the ECHO command. The ECHO
command is an internal command.

Format
ECHO [ON I OFF I message)
Where:
message

Is a message you want displayed.

Comments
Normally, when the command processor sees commands in a batch file, it
displays them on the screen. The ECHO OFF command turns off this feature.
The ECHO ON command turns this feature back on.

Example 1
To disable the display of commands in a batch file, type:
A:\>ECHfJ OFF,,-,-,:=_-,,

Example 2
To enable the display of commands in a batch file, type:
A:\)[ClH]

32-39

11111 ECHO

Example 3
To display the current setting of the ECHO command, type:
A:\)

ECHO i5 on
A:\)

Example 4
To display the message "This is a VAXmate workstation" from a batch file,
add the following line to your batch file:
ECHO Thi5 i5 a VAXmate work5tation

32-40

EDLIN

IIIII

EDLIN

Purpose
EDLIN is a line editor designed to edit ASCII files. EDLIN is an external
command.

Format
EDLIN filename.ext
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to edit. If you do not specify a drive, the EDLIN command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path, the
EDLIN command uses the current directory.

Comments
Table 32-6 list the EDLIN commands.
Table 32-6

EDLIN Commands

Command

Purpose

Number

Edits a line number.
Appends lines.
Copies lines.
Deletes lines.
Ends editing.
Inserts lines.
Lists text with line numbers.
Moves lines.
Pages text.
Quits editing.
Replaces lines.
Searches text.
Transfers text.
Writes lines.

A
C
D
E
I
L
M

P
Q
R

S
T
W

32-41

IIIII

ERASE

Purpose
To delete files from a specified directory, use the ERASE command. The
ERASE command is an internal command. You can also use the DEL command
to erase files.

Format
ERASE filename.ext
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to erase. If you do not specify a drive, the ERASE command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path, the
ERASE command uses the current directory.

Example
To remove MYFILE.TXT from drive A, type:
A:\)ERASE MYFILE.TXT(Return)
A:\)

32-42

EXE2BIN 11111

EXE2BIN
Purpose
To convert .EXE files to binary format, use the EXE2BIN command. The
EXE2BIN command is an external command.

Format
EXE2BIN filenamel[.ext] [filename2.ext]
Where:
filename 1. ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to convert. If you do not specify a file extension for the
input file, the default file extension is .EXE. If you do not
specify a drive, the EXE2BIN command uses the default
drive. If you do not specify a path, the EXE2BIN command
uses the current directory.

filename2.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the created
file. If you do not specify a file name, the EXE2BIN com·
mand uses the original .EXE file name. The new file exten·
sion is .BIN. If you do not specify a drive, the EXE2BIN
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the EXE2BIN command uses the current directory.

Comments
Binary files are smaller than .EXE files and load faster.
The input file is converted to binary file format (memory image of the pro·
gram) and placed in the output file.
The input file must be in valid .EXE format produced by the linker. The
resident code and data part of the file must be less than 64K bytes.
There must be no stack segment.

32-43

IIIII EXE2BIN
Two conversions are possible, depending on whether the initial CS:IP (Code
Segment:Instruction Pointer) is specified in the .EXE file:
• If you do not specify CS:IP in the EXE file, the EXE2BIN command
assumes a pure binary conversion. If segment fixups are necessary, you

are prompted for the fixup value. This value is the absolute segment at
which the program is to be loaded. The resulting program is usable only
when it is loaded at the absolute memory address specified by a user
application. The command processor is not capable of properly loading
the program.
• If you specify CS:IP as 0000: 100H, the EXE2BIN command assumes that
the file is to run as a .COM file, with the location pointer set at lOOH
by the assembler statement ORG. The first lOOH bytes of the file are

deleted. No segment fixups are allowed, because .COM files must be
segment relocatable. Once the conversion is complete, you can rename
the resulting file with a .COM file extension. Then the command
processor is able to load and execute the program in the same way as
the .COM programs supplied on your MS-DOS disk.

Example
To convert TEST.EXE to TEST.BIN, type:
A: \)E E2B Hj TEST. EXE CRei;;~
A:\)

32-44

EXIT 11111

EXIT

Purpose
To exit from COMMAND.COM and return to a previous level, use the EXIT
command. The EXIT command is an internal command.

Format
EXIT

Comments
If you execute COMMAND.COM while in MS-Windows, you have to use the
EXIT command before you return to MS-Windows.
You can use the EXIT command when you are running an application program and want to start the MS-DOS command processor, then return to your
program.

Example
To close the COMMAND.COM file after executing it, type:
A: \) EX IT C~'"'iQ
A:\)

To return to the MS-DOS Executive window, expand the MS-DOS Executive
window icon.

32-45

IIIII

Fe
Purpose
To compare two text files, or two binary files, use the FC command. The FC
command is an external command.

Format
FC [[/A IB IC IL IN iT ;W INNN][/LB n] filenamel.ext filename2.ext]
Where:

Abbreviates the output of an ASCII comparison. Only the
beginning and ending lines in each set of differences are displayed. The intermediate lines are represented by ellipses.

Specifies a binary compare of the two files. The two files are
compared byte to byte, with no attempt to resynchronize
after a mismatch. The FC command displays the relative address of the pair of bytes, followed by the mismatched bytes
from filel and file2. If you do not specify this qualifier, the
compare is done line by line.

Ignores the case of letters. All letters in both files are considered as capital letters.

Compares the files in ASCII mode. IL is the default when you
compare files that do not have file extensions of .EXE, .COM,
.SYS, .OB], .LIB, or .BlN.

IN
IT

Displays the line numbers during an ASCII comparison.

Compresses tabs and spaces during the comparison. Tabs and
spaces are considered as a single white space. Beginning and
ending white space is ignored.

jNNN

Is a number from 1 to 9. This number specifies the number
of required, matching lines for the files to be considered
matching again after a difference is found. If you do not
specify a number, the default is 2.

32-46

Does not expand tabs to spaces. The default is to treat tabs as
8 spaces.

IIIII

jLB n

Sets the internal line buffer to "n" lines. The default internal
buffer length is 1 00 lines. Files that have more than this
number of consecutive, differing lines abort the file
comparison.

filename 1. ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the first
file in the compare. If you do not specify a drive, the Fe
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the Fe command uses the current directory.

filename2.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the second
file in the compare. If you do not specify a drive, the Fe
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the Fe command uses the current directory.

Comments
The default compare is line by line.
You can redirect output to a file.

Example 1
To display the Fe help message, type:
A:\>F

Example 2
To compare TESTl.TXT and TEST2.TXT, type:
A:\>

32·47

IIIII

Example 3
To compare TESTl.TXT and TEST2.TXT and specify that four lines constitute
a match, type:
A:\)FC 14 TEST1.TXT TEST2.TXT(Relurn)

Example 4
To perform a binary compare of TESTl.TXT and TEST2.TXT, type:
A:\)FC IE TEST1.TXT TEST2.TXT(Relum~

Example 5
To compare TESTl.TXT and TEST2.TXT and send the output to DlFFER.TXT,
type:
A:\)FC TEST1.TXT TEST2.TXT )

32-48

DIFFER.TXT(]i~~

FDISK

IIIII

FDISK

Purpose
To prepare a hard disk for use, and to add or delete partitions, use the FDISK
command. The FDISK command is an external command. Specifically, the
FDISK command enables you to:
• Set the drive type
• Initialize your hard disk
• Add or delete a partition
• Set the start-up partition
• Prepare the drive for shipping
• Select network start up priority

Format
FDISK

Comments
The FDISK command displays menus from which you make selections. You
see different menus based on different system configurations.
You can have one to four partitions on the hard disk but, you can only have
one MS-DOS start-up partition. You cannot have an MS-DOS partition larger
than 32 megabytes, or the size of the hard disk, whichever is smaller.
You choose partition sizes as a percentage of the overall storage capacity of
the hard disk. The FDISK command indicates the percentage of the overall
storage capaCity still unused.
Initializing the hard disk initializes the boot code and partition table and
initializing the hard disk erases all data stored on the hard disk. Deleting a
partition erases all data stored on that partition.

Example
To start the FDISK command, type:
A: \>FDISK (""tum)

32-49

11111 FIND

FIND

Purpose
To search for a string of text in a file or files, use the FIND command. The
FIND command is an external command.

Format
FIND [fV)[/c][/N] "string" filename.ext [... ]
Where:

Displays all lines not containing the specified string.

Prints only the count of lines that contained a match in each
of the files.

Displays each line preceded by its relative line number in
the file.

string

Is the string you want to find.

filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file
being searched. If you do not specify a drive, the FIND command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path, the
FIND command uses the current directory.

Comments
The search is case sensitive. Type the exact string you want to find.
The FIND command searches for a specified string in a specified file or series
of files. The FIND command displays all lines in the specified files containing the specified string.
If no files are specified, the FIND command takes the input on the screen

and displays all lines containing the specified string.
The string should be enclosed in double quotes. Place double quotes around
a string that already has quotes in it.

32-50

FIND

IIIII

Example 1

To display all the lines containing "VAXmate" in BOOKl.TXT and
BOOK2.TXT (in that order), type:
A:\)FIND "VAXmate" BOOK1.TXT BOOK2.TXT(Return)
---------- book1.txt
read into memory when you turn on your VAXmate workstation.
is discussed in the VAXmate System Handbook.
Local directories' on your VAXmate workstation
---------- book2.txt
A VAXmate workstation MS-DOS diskette may have either 40-tracks
Rainbow-compatible diskettes cannot be formatted on the VAXmate
The program remains resident until you turn off the VAXmate
A:\)

Example 2

To display the lines and relative line numbers that contain the word "computer" in TESTl.TXT and TEST2.TXT, type:
A:\)FIND IN "computer" TEST1.TXT TEST2.TXT(Return)
---------- test1.txt
[11Turn on your computer.
[31A printer is supplied with your computer.
[SlPlug the cable into the port marked "printer."
---------- test2.txt
[21The computer screen displays the operating system prompt.
[41Connect your printer to the computer using the cable provided.
[SlYou have successfully connected the printer to your computer.
A:\)

32-51

IIIII FIND
Example 3
To display all the lines that do not contain the word "computer" in
TESTl.TXT and TEST2.TXT, type:
A:\)FIND IV "computer" TEST1.TXT TEST2.TXT(Return)

---------- test1.txt
These
lines

do
not
---------- test2.txt
contain
the

word
A:\)

Example 4
To display the number of lines that contain the word "computer" in
TESTl.TXT and TEST2.TXT, type:
A:\)FIND

Ie "computer" TEST1.TXT TEST2.TXT(Return)

---------- test1.txt: 3
---------- test2.txt: 3
A:\)

32-52

FONT

IIIII

FONT
Purpose
To load a text font file into memory, use the FONT command. The FONT
command, an external command, loads text font files that correspond to a
specific character set. These font files only affect your screen display.

Format
FONT [[filename[.ext]] [lD] [IS]]
Where:
filename .ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the font
file. If you do not specify a drive, the FONT command uses
the default drive. If you do not specify a path, the FONT
command searches the current directory, any appended directories, the root directory, or the current search path. If
you do not specify a file extension, .FNT is used.

Loads the default character set.

Displays the current font file.

Comments
The FONT command affects only the character set displayed in text mode.
For more information on graphics mode, see the GRAFTABL command in this
chapter. For more information on text and graphics modes, see the MODE
command in this chapter.
If the MS-DOS operating system finds the .FNT file in a valid font file format,

the font is loaded. Unless you are in a window, the entire screen and video
memory immediately reflect the font change because this command affects
text fonts. MS-Windows operates in graphics mode, so nothing happens to the
screen if you are in a window.
If the .FNT file does not exist or is not in the proper format, a message is

displayed.
The FONT command does not check that the font, keyboard, and
country-specific information match. If they do not match, the results are
unpredictable.

32-53

11111

FONT

The FONT command determines whether the correct hardware and software
exist to support the loading of font files. If the hardware and software are
not correct, a message is displayed. This message describes the minimal hardware requirement to run the program.
Example 1
To display the FONT help message, type:
A:\)FONT~

Example 2
To load MCS.FNT, type:
A:\)FONT MCS~
FONT Utility Program Ver5ion 1.00
eC) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
MCS.FNT
Ha5 been 5ucce55fully loaded
A:\)

Example 3
To load the default character set (STD.FNT), type:
A:\)FONT

ID~

FONT Utility Program Ver510n 1.00
eC) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Dig~tal Equipment Corporation

The default font "STD.FNT"
A:\)

32-54

ha5 been 5ucce55fully loaded

FONT

IIIII

Example 4
To display the current font file, type:
A:\>FIJNT ISC£ijJ;;-;r.~)

Font file

STD.FNT

A:\>

32-55

11111 FOR

FOR

Purpose
To repeatedly execute an MS-DOS command in a batch file or at the MS-DOS
prompt, use the FOR command. The FOR command is an internal command.

Format
For batch processing (in a .BAT file):
FOR %%variablel IN set DO command [variable2j

For interactive processing (at the MS-DOS prompt):
FOR %variablel IN set DO command [variable2j
Where:
variable 1

Is any number or letter.

set

Is a series of file names, a file specification containing wildcards, or a count pattern.

command

Is any MS-DOS operating system command.

variable 2

Is the same character as variable 1. Specify variable2 if the
command requires a parameter.

Comments
The %%variablel is set sequentially to each member of set, and then command is evaluated.
If a member of set is an expression involving' or ?, the variable is set to

each matching pattern from the disk. In this case, only one item can be in
the set, and any item other than the first is ignored.

32-56

FOR

IIIII

Example 1
To execute from a batch file the MASM command on all your .ASM files, add
this line to your .BAT file:
FOR %%f IN (*.ASM) DO MASM %%f

Example 2
To execute from the MS-DOS prompt the MASM command on all your .ASM
files, type:
FOR %f IN (*.ASM) DO MASM %f

Example 3
To execute from a batch file the 1YPE command on all your .TXT files, add
this line to your .BAT file:
FOR %%f IN (*.TXT) DO TYPE %%f

Example 4
To execute from the MS-DOS prompt the lYPE command on all your .TXT
files, type:
A:\>FOR %f IN C*.TXT> DO TYPE %f

32-57

IIIII

FORMAT

Purpose
To format diskettes and hard disks, use the FORMAT command. The FORMAT
command is an external command.

Format
FORMAT [drv:] [/S][jV)[/I][/4][/8]
Where:
drv:

Is the drive you want to format.

Writes IO.SYS, MSDOS.SYS, and COMMAND. COM to the newly
formatted disk.

Prompts you for a volume label at the conclusion of the format
process.

Formats a diskette to be Single-sided (this is disregarded on a
single-sided drive).

Formats an 8- or 9-sector, double-sided diskette in a high-capacity
drive.
We recommend that you do not format 8- and 9-sector diskettes on
your VAXmate workstation if you plan to use these diskettes in a lowcapacity drive.

32-58

Formats the diskette with 8 sectors per track. The default is 9 sectors
for low-capacity diskettes and 15 sectors for high-capacity diskettes.

FORMAT

IIIII

Comments
The VAXmate workstation has a 5 1/4 inch, high-capacity diskette drive. The
recommended diskette type is a 1.2 megabyte high-density, double-sided
diskette.
Each sector is 512 bytes long, and you can format 8, 9, or 15 sectors per
track on a diskette, depending on the density (tracks per inch) of the
diskette.
You cannot format Rainbow-compatible diskettes on the workstation. Format
them on a Rainbow computer.
Because the diskette drive cannot tell what type of diskette is being
formatted, you must use the proper FORMAT command qualifiers. Do not
format:
• High-capacity diskettes to be low-capacity format
• Low-capacity diskettes to be high-capacity format
You can enter qualifiers in any order.
Qualifiers that you do not enter are set to the default values. The default
values are:
• 15 sectors per track
• Double-sided
NOTE

You cannot use the FORMAT command to format any network,
ASSIGNed, or SUBSTed drives.

32-59

IIIII FORMAT
Example 1
To display the FORMAT help message, type:
A: \ )FORMAT ( Return )

Example 2
To format a diskette in drive A, type:
A:\)FORMAT A: (Return)
Format Utility Program Ver5ion 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
WARNING! THIS PROGRAM WILL DESTROY ANY DATA CURRENTLY ON YOUR DISK!
Type <Ctrl/C) to quit

In5ert new di5kette for drive A:
and pre55 <Return) when ready

Formatting 80 track5, 2 5ide(5), 15 5ector5 per track.
Formatting and verifying track
Volume label (11 character5, <Return) for none)?
1213952 byte5 total di5k 5pace
1213952 byte5 available on di5k

Format another (YIN)?
A:\)

32-60

cora IIIII
GOTO

Purpose
To jump to a specified label in a batch file, use the GOTO command. The
GOTO command is an internal command.

Format
GOTO label
Where:
label

Is the label in a batch file to jump to.

Comments
The GOTO command cannot be used at the MS-DOS operating system
prompt.
If you do not specify a label, the batch file stops executing.

Example
In the following example, program execution jumps from GOTO TWO to
REM SECOND PROGRAM:

:ONE
REM FIRST PROGRAM
GOTO TWO

:TWO
REM SECOND PROGRAM

32-61

11111 GRAFTABL

GRAFTABL
Purpose
To load a graphic font file into memory, use the GRAFTABL command. The
GRAFTABL command, an external command, loads a graphic font file that
corresponds to a graphic character set.
Format
GRAFTABL [filename[.ext]]
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the graphic
font file. If you do not specify a drive, the GRAFTABL command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path, the
GRAFTABL command searches the current directory, anyappended directories, the root directory, or the current search
path. If you do not specify a file name or file extension, the
GRAFTABL command uses the current text font file name
with a .GRF file extension.

Comments
Exit from MS-Windows before using the GRAFTABL command.
The GRAFTABL command affects only the character set displayed in graphics
mode. For more information on text mode, see the FONT command in this
chapter. For more information on text and graphics modes, see the MODE
command in this chapter.
If the .GRF file does not exist or is not in the proper format, a message is

displayed.
GRAFTABL uses approximately 2K bytes of memory.

32-62

GRAFTABL

IIIII

Example 1
To load the graphic character set that corresponds to the current text font
file (STD.FNT in this example), type:
A:\)GRAFTABL~

GraphiC Character Loader VerSion 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Replacing the graphiC character set with STD.GRF
A:\)

Example 2
To load the graphic character set that corresponds to the ISO Latin-l text
font file, type:
A:\)GRAFTABL

ISD~

GraphiC Character Loader VerSion 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Replacing the graphiC character set with ISD.GRF
A:\)

Example 3
To load the graphic character set that corresponds to the French text font
file, type:
A: \)GRAFTABL FR7 .GRF ~
GraphiC Character Loader Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Replacing the graphiC character set with FR7.GRF
A:\)

32-62.1

This page intentionally left blank.

GRAPHICS

IIIII

GRAPHICS
Purpose
To print graphic video images on a graphics printer, use the GRAPHICS command. For example, to print MS-Windows screens or any application that has
graphic video images, use the external GRAPHICS command.

Format
GRAPHICS [printer type][jR]
Where:
printer type

Is STD, LA50, LA75 or LA75STD, LA75DEC, LN03, LN03DEC,
LN03STD.

Prints exact graphicS video images. If the screen has black
video images with a white background, the printer produces
black images with a white background. If the screen has
white video images with a black background, the printer produces white images with a black background.

Comments
Exit from MS-Windows before loading the GRAPHICS command.
Once you load GRAPHICS, you can print the current graphic video screen
from MS-Windows by pressing the Shift/Prt Sc keys.
Each time you change printers or set the reverse qualifier, you must load the
GRAPHICS command again.
LN03STD and LN03DEC are reserved for an LN03 Plus printer with the LN03
Plus ISO/PC cartridge.
GRAPHICS uses approximately 2K bytes of memory.
To obtain high-quality prints, the GRAPHICS command causes printers in
high-resolution video mode to print the upper-right corner of the screen on
the upper-left corner of the paper (landscape mode).

32-63

IIIII GRAPHICS
There are two ways to set the printer type:
• If you used the MODE command to set the printer type, type the

GRAPHICS command without the parameter or the qualifier. The
GRAPHICS command reads the printer setting in memory.
• If you have not used the MODE command to set the printer type, type

the GRAPHICS command with the appropriate printer type.
The GRAPHICS program stops if there is:
• No paper in the printer
• An input/output (I/O) error during the print operation

• A timeout
If a timeout occurs while the printer is in graphics mode, the printer

remains in graphics mode. To reset an LN03, LN03DEC, LA50, or
LA75DEC printer, turn the printer off or complete the graphic printout.
Example 1

To display the GRAPHICS help message, if you have not set the printer type
using the MODE command, type:
A: \ )GRAPH I CS ( Return )
Example 2

To set the printer type using the MODE command, then load GRAPHICS, type
the following sequence of commands:
A: \)MODE PRN: LA75 ~
A: \ )GRAPH I CS ( Return )
GRAPHICS Utility Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Printer type LA75
Reverse print is OFF.
Loading GRAPHICS.
A:\)

32-64

GRAPHICS

IIIII

Example 3

To change the printer from an 1A75 printer to an LN03 Plus printer, type:
A:\)GRAPHICS LN03~
GRAPHICS Utility Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Printer type LN03
Reverse print is OFF.
Loading GRAPHICS.
A:\)

Example 4

To change the printer to an LN03 Plus printer and set the reverse qualifier,
type:
A:\)GRAPHICS LN03 IR~
GRAPHICS Utility Program Version 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Printer type LN03
Reverse print is ON.
Loading GRAPHICS.
A:\)

32-65

11111 IF

Purpose
To conditionally execute commands in a batch file, use the IF command. The
IF command is an internal command.

Format
IF <condition> <command>
Where:
<condition>

ERRORLEVEL <number>
True if, and only if, the previous program executed by the
command processor (COMMAND.COM) had an exit code of
<number> or higher. An exit code is set by a specific program. It is returned by the operating system after the program finishes. Later program tasks may be performed based
on the value of this number.
<string 1> == <string2>
True if, and only if, <string1> and <string2> are identical
after parameter substitution. Strings cannot have embedded
separators.
EXIST <filename>
True if, and only if, <filename> exists.
NOT <condition>
True if, and only if, <condition> is false.

32-66

Is the command executed if the condition is true.

IIIII

Comments
The IF command cannot be used at the MS-DOS operating system prompt.
The IF command enables you to conditionally execute commands from a
batch file. When <condition> is true, <command> is executed. Otherwise,
<command> is ignored.

Example
To display the message "Can't find datafile" if DATAl does not exist, type:
IF NOT EXIST DATA1 ECHO Can't find datafile

32-67

11111 JOIN

JOIN
Purpose
To create a single directory structure from two separate disk drives, use the
JOIN command. The external JOIN command lets the disk contents be
accessed as though that disk contents were in the subdirectory of another
disk. In effect the drive that gets JOINed becomes a subdirectory of the drive
to which it is JOINed. You must specify a name for this subdirectory.
Format
JOIN [drv1: drv2:\path2]
JOIN drvl: jD
Where:
drvl:

Is the drive you want to join to another drive. Drvl: is a physical
drive.

drv2:

Is the drive to which the first drive is joined.

path2

Is the path of the drive to which the first drive is joined. Path2 must
be a subdirectory that is nonexistent or empty.

Deassigns a JOINed drive.

Comments
You can only join drv:l at its root directory.
NOTE

You cannot use the JOIN command with any network, ASSIGNed,
or SUBSTed drives.
After you issue the JOIN command, the first drive name becomes invalid. If
you try to use it, the MS-DOS operating system displays a message.
If you use the JOIN command with the jD qualifier, the JOINed drives are
deassigned, but any created subdirectory is not deleted.

32-68

JOIN

IIIII

Example J
To join drive A to the path C:\MEMOS, type:
C:\MEMOS>JOIN A:

C:\MEMOS~

C:\MEMOS>

Example 2
To display a directory listing of drive A that was joined to drive C:\MEMOS,
type:
C:\MEMOS>DIR C:\~1EMOS~

Example 3
To display joined drives, type:
C: \MEMOS>JO I N ~
A:

=> C:\MEMOS

C:\MEMOS>

Example 4
To deassign the effects of a previous JOIN command, type:
C:\MEMOS>JOIN A:

ID(Retum)

C:\MEMOS>

32-69

11111

KEYB

Purpose
To load a keyboard map file into memory, use the KEYB command. The
external KEYB command maps the character set, STD, to a keyboard layout.

Format
KEYB [filename[.ext]] [jD] [IS]
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the
keyboard map file. If you do not specify a drive, the KEYB
command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path,
the KEYB command searches the current directory, any appended directories, the root directory, or the current search
path. If you do not specify a file extension, .KEY is used.

Loads the default keyboard map file.

Displays the name of the current keyboard map file.

Comments
If the MS-DOS operating system finds the file and it is a valid keyboard map

file, the KEYB program loads the file into memory. The changes are implemented immediately.
The KEYB command does not check that the font, keyboard, and
country-specific information match. If they do not match, the results are
unpredictable.
If the .KEY file does not exist or is not in the proper format, a message is

displayed.
If you do not specify a file name, the KEYB command displays an informational help screen.
Pressing the CtrljAltjF2 keys changes the currently loaded keyboard file to
the standard keyboard file STDUS.
Pressing the CtrljAltjF3 keys changes the current keyboard file to the last
keyboard file loaded into memory. To activate this feature, a nonstandard
keyboard, such as STDFR.KEY, should have been loaded.

32-70

KEYB

IIIII

Example 1
To display the KEYB help message, type:
A: \) KEY B ( Return )

Example 2
To load the default keyboard map file (STDUS.KEY), type:
A:\)KEYB ID(Return)
Keyboard Map Loader Ver5ion 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation

The default keyboard map "STDUS.KEY" ha5 been 5ucce55fully loaded
A:\)

Example 3
To load the French multinational keyboard map file (MCSFR.KEY):
1. Ensure that the text font file and the keyboard map file match by using
the FONT command to load MCS.FNT.
2. Type:

A: \) KEYB MCSFR ( Return )
Keyboard Map Loader Ver5ion 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
MCSFR.KEY
Ha5 been 5ucce55fully loaded
A:\)

32-71

11111 LABEL

LABEL

Purpose
To create, change, or delete a diskette or hard disk volume label, use the
LABEL command. The LABEL command is an external command.

Format
LABEL [drv:][name]
Where:
drY:

Is the drive where you want to create, change, or delete a label. If
you do not specify a drive, the LABEL command uses the default
drive.

name

Is the new volume name (11 characters or less).

Comments
You cannot use wildcards or tabs in labels.
NOTE

You cannot use the LABEL command with remote network
resources.

32-72

LABEL

IIIII

Example 1

To name the volume on drive A MEMOS, type:
C: \)LABEL A ::MEMOS (Retu,';-)

C:\)

Example 2

To enter a new label on drive A, type:
C:\)LABEL A: C!!el"'~)

Volume in drive A ha5 no label
Volume label (11 character, ENTER for none)?_
Delete current volume label (V/N)?_

C:\)

32-73

IIIII

LCOUNTRY

Purpose
To install country-specific information into memory, use the LCOUNTRY
command. The LCOUNTRY command is an external command.

Format
LCOUNTRY [filename[.extll [ddd]

Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the table of
country-specific information applicable to the current font
file. If you do not specify a drive, the LCOUNTRY command
uses the default drive. If you do not specify the path, the
LCOUNTRY command searches the current directory, anyappended directories, the root directory, or the current search
path. If you do not specify a file extension, .COU is used.

ddd

Is a three-digit country code. If you specify a file name and a
three-digit country code, the country-specific information for
that character set is selected. However, if you specify only a
three-digit country code, the current country information
changes to the country just specified.
If you have no COUNTRY command in your CONFIG.SYS
file, the default country is the United States.

Comments
The LCOUNTRY command installs the following country-specific information
into memory:
• Date format
• Time format
• Currency symbols
• Decimal separators
• Case conversion information

32-74

LCOUNTRY 11111

The LCOUNTRY command does not check that the font, keyboard, and
country-specific information match. If they do not match, the results are
unpredictable.
If the .COU file does not exist or is not in the proper format, a message is

displayed.
Example 1

To load the default country-specific information (STD.COU), type:
A: \) LCOUNTRY (Return )
Load Country Dependent Information Utility Ver5ion 1.0
eC) 1985 by Digital Equipment Corporation
LCOUNTRY loaded STD.COU
Country Code = 001
A:\)

Example 2

To load the French country-specific information, type:
A:\)LCOUNTRY FR7.COU(Return)
Load Country Dependent Information Utility Ver5ion 1.0
eC) 1985 by Digital Equipment Corporation
LCOUNTRY loaded FR7.COU
Country Code = 033
A:\)

32-74.1

This page intentionally left blank.

LCOUNTRY

IIIII

Example 3
To change the country information to US (using the same character set),
type:

Example 4
To load the ISO Latin-l character set country data and specify the country as
France, type:

32-75

11111 MDRIVE

MDRIVE

Purpose
To reserve a portion of RAM to function as a memory drive, use the MDRIVE
command. MDRIVE is a device driver.

Format
The following command line must be included in your CONFIG.SYS file to
install a memory drive:
DEVICE=[drv:U\path\]MDRIVE.SYS [n] or [[nU/E]] or [IE"]
Where:
drv:

Is the drive containing the MDRIVE.SYS file. If you do not specify a
drive, the DEVICE command uses the drive from which the MS-DOS
operating system is started.

path

Is the path to the directory containing the MDRIVE.SYS file. If you do
not specify a path, the DEVICE command uses the directory from
which the MS-DOS operating system is started.

Is the memory drive disk size in 64K byte pages. The default value is
64K bytes. The range is 1 (64K bytes) to the amount of available
memory on your workstation minus 128K bytes of non-extended
memory.

Use extended memory. The memory drive buffer is in extended memory and the device driver is in lower memory.

/E"

Use all available extended memory as one memory drive.
CAUTION

We recommend you do not change your CONFIG.SYS file if you
are using your workstation in a network environment.

32-76

MDRIVE

IIIII

Comments

A memory drive works like a disk drive, but is much faster.
To save data stored on a memory drive, use the BACKUP command.
Before you turn off the power or restart the MS-DOS operating system, copy
all data that is currently on a memory drive to a non-memory drive. Otherwise, the data is lost.
The name of the memory drive depends on the number of drives you already
have. For example, if you have one diskette drive (A:) and no hard disk, the
first memory drive is C, the second is D, and so on.
Each memory drive increases the resident size of the MS-DOS operating system. The resident size is increased by about lK bytes plus the size of the
memory drive buffer you specify (if the drive is installed in low memory).
Example 1

To install one 64K byte memory drive, add this line to your CONFIG.SYS file:
DEVICE=MDRIVE.SYS

Example 2

To install one 256K byte memory drive in extended memory, add this line to
your CONFIG.SYS file:
DEVICE=MDRIVE.SYS 4 IE

Example 3

To install one memory drive using all your extended memory, add this line
to your CONFIG.SYS file:
DEVICE=MDRIVE.SYS IE*

32-77

IIIII MKDIR
MKDIR
Purpose
To create a subdirectory in the MS-DOS operating system directory structure,
use the MKDIR command. The MKDIR command is an internal command.

Format
MKDlR I MD [drv: \jpath
Where:
dry:

Is the drive on which you want to make a subdirectory. If you do not
specify a drive, the MKDIR command uses the current drive.

path

Is the path you want to make to the new subdirectory. If you do not
specify a path, the MKDIR command uses the current directory.

Example 1
To create the subdirectory USER in your root directory, type:
A : \ ) MKD I R \ USE. R ( Return )

A:\)

Example 2
To create the subdirectory JOE under the subdirectory USER, type:
A:\)MKDIR

A:\)

32-78

\USER\JOE~

MODE 11111

MODE

Purpose
To set printer, video mode, communications, printer redirection, and keyboard mode, use the MODE command. The MODE command is an external
command.
Printer Setup
Printer setup lets you configure any of the supported printers:
• IBM Pro Printer (STD)
• DEC LA50
• DEC LA75 Companion
• DEC LN03 Plus
• DEC LN03 Plus with the ISO/PC cartridge

Format
MODE [LPT#[:]] [type,width,lpi,retry,qual,bold]
Where:
#

Is a parallel port number (1, 2, or 3).

type

Is a printer type (STD, LA50, LA75DEC, LA75STD, LN03, LN03DEC,
or LN03STD).
If you use this parameter, the MODE command sets the printer type
for the specified port. If this parameter is not used, the MODE com-

mand determines the printer type from the current setting.
If the type is not set but needed, the MODE command prompts you
for the printer type.
If you specify a printer type, the MODE command sends the appro-

priate escape sequence to the printer. The LA75DEC, LN03DEC, and
LN03 printers are treated as LA50-type printers. The LA75STD and
LN03STD are treated as STD-type printers.

32-79

IIIII MODE
width

Is the number of characters on each line (80, 96, or 132).
If the printer type is an STD, IA75, IA75STD, or LN03STD, only 80
or 132 characters on each line are valid.

lpi

Is the number of lines in an inch (6 or 8).

retry

Is a parameter to enable or disable continuous retries.
p enables continuous retry on timeouts.
- disables continuous retry on timeouts.
If you do not use this parameter, the current setting remains unchanged. If the printer has been redirected to a communications

port, retry is enabled on the communications port to which it was
redirected.
qual

Is the print quality available.
d = draft
e = enhanced
h = high

bold

Is the number of passes for each printed line.
b = bold
n = normal

Comments
You can use PRN instead of LPT1 and IA75 instead of IA75STD. You can
enter parameters, separated by commas, in any order. You cannot use LN03
instead of LN03STD.

Example 1
To display the MODE help message, type:
A: \ )MODE ( Return )

32-80

MODE

IIIII

Example 2
To set up the IA75 printer for use, type:
A:\)MODE LPT1:LA75(Relurn)
Mode Setup Utility Ver~ion 1.00
eC) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Printer type set successfully.
Printer programmed successfully.
A:\)

Example 3
To set up the LN03 Plus printer for use, type:
A:\)MODE LPT1:LN03(Relurn)
Mode Setup Utility Version 1.00
eC) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Printer type set successfully.
Printer programmed successfully.
A:\)

Example 4
To set up the IA75 printer for 80 columns, 8 lines per inch, continuous
retry, draft quality, and normal, type:
A:\)MODE LPT1:LA75,80,8,p,d,n(Relurn)
Mode Setup Utility Version 1.00
eC) Copyright 1985. 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Printer type ~et successfully.
Line width set to 80 column~.
Vertical spacing set to 8 lines per inch.
Print quality set to DRAFT.
Bold print set off.
"Retry forever" set on.
Printer programmed successfully.
A:\)

32-81

11111 MODE

Video Mode

Video mode enables you to select the video mode.
Format

MODE [vidmode]
MODE [[vidmode],shift,[t]]
Where:
vidmode

Is one of the following:
40

Set to 40 columns, shades of gray unchanged.

Set to 80 columns, shades of gray unchanged.
Selecting 40 or 80 affects characters per line. These
selections are valid only in text modes. There is no
effect with the monochrome adapter except to clear
the screen.

BW40

Set to text mode, 40 columns, 2 shades of gray.

C040

Set to text mode, 40 columns, 4 shades of gray.

BW80

Set to text mode, 80 columns, 2 shades of gray.

C080

Set to text mode, 80 columns, 4 shades of gray.

BW320

Set to 320 X 200 pixels, 2 shades of gray.

C0320

Set to 320 X 200 pixels, 4 shades of gray.

BW640

Set to 640 X 200 pixels, 2 shades of gray.

DEC2

Set to 640 X 400 pixels, 2 shades of gray.

DEC4

Set to 640 X 400 pixels, 4 shades of gray.
DEC2 and DEC4 are valid only on the workstation
hardware.

MONO

32-82

Setup for monochrome screen.

MODE

IIIII

Is the direction you want to shift the video (l or r).

shift

I = left.
r = right.
Specifies that you want to test the video. The t parameter is valid
onlyif you have a video card in the expansion box.

Comments
You can use the second format to:
• Shift and align the display
• Test the video (if you have a video card in the expansion box)
NOTE

Shifting and aligning are not needed on the built-in workstation
video.
Example 1
To display the MODE help message, type:
A: \) MODE (Jj.£ltim~)

Example 2
To set the video to 640 X 200 pixels with two shades of gray, type:
A: \) MODE BW64 (J

Video mode 5et 5ucce55fully.
A:\)

32-83

IIIII MODE
Communications Setup
Communications setup enables you to set the parameters for the serial ports
and communications ports, including the DEC only serial printer port, SPP.
Format

MODE [COMn[:][[baud,parity,databits,stopbits,]retry,bypass))
MODE [SPP[:][[baud,parity,databits,stopbits,]retry,bypass))
Where:
n

Is a serial port number (lor 2).

baud

Is the baud rate.
50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200 (default), 1800, 2000,
2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 19200.

parity

Is the parity (e, 0, or n).
e = even (default).
0= odd.

n = none.
databits

Is the number of databits (5, 6, 7 (default), or 8).

stopbits

Is the number of stopbits (lor 2).
The default is 2 for 110 baud, and 1 for all others.

retry

Enables or disables continuous retry on timeouts (p or -).
p enables continuous retry on a timeout.
- disables continuous retry on a timeout.
The retry field is used if the port is being used for a serial printer. If you leave this field blank, retries are disabled.

32-84

MODE

bypass

IIIII

Is used to enable or disable modem control signals (b or m).
b bypasses modem control signals.
m uses modem control signals ..
The bypass field is used to bypass the modem control signals
coming into a port. It is usually used when a serial port is used
for a printer. If the printer uses XONjXOFF instead of modem
control, set bypass = b. Normally, modem control signals are
used, bypass = m.

Comments
You can specify the following parameters in any order. They must be separated by one or more commas. Extra commas can precede or follow any
parameter.

Example 1
To display the MODE help message, type:
A:\)MODE~

Example 2
To set up communications port 1 for 1200 baud, even parity, 7 databits, 1
stopbit, continuous retry, and bypass modem control, type:
A:\)MODE COM1:1200,E,

Mode Setup Utility Ver5ion 1.0
(C) 1985 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Serial port programmed 5ucce55fully.
A:\)

32-85

IIIII MODE
Printer Redirection
Printer redirection enables you to redirect any of the three parallel ports
(LPTI:, LPT2:, or LPT3:) to either of the communication ports (COMI: or
COM2:) or to the serial printer port (SPP:). LPTI: is the default printer port.
Because the workstation does not have a built in parallel port, LPTI: is redirected to SPP: when you turn on or restart the workstation.

Format
MODE [LPT"'[:]=COMn[:]]
MODE [LPT"'[:]=SPP[:]]
MODE [LPT"'[:]=LPT[:]]
Where:

Is a parallel port number (I, 2, or 3).

Is a serial port number (lor 2).

Comments
PRN is equivalent to LPTI.
The first two formats redirect the specified output to the specified serial
port. If you do not specify the control parameter, it remains unchanged from
its current setting.
The default setting when you start your workstation is modem control for the
communication ports and XONjXOFF for the serial port.
The third format disables redirection. Modem control remains unchanged in
case other printers are also redirected to the port.
After exiting from the MODE program, a message is displayed indicating
whether the port is redirected.

32-86

MODE

IIIII

Example 1
To display the MODE help message, type:
A: \) MODE ~i;:;;-0

Example 2
To redirect LPT1: to COM1:, type:
A: \) t~ODE LPTI: =COM1 : ~!,!m -)

Mode Setup Utility Ver5ion 1.00
eC) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Parallel port redirected 5ucce55fully.
A:\)

Example 3
To disable printer redirection, type:
A: \) MODE LPT1: ~LPT (Aelu,'!J

Mode Setup Utility Ver5ion 1.00
eC) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Parallel port redirection canceled 5ucce55fully.
A:\)

32-87

IIIII MODE
Keyboard Mode
Keyboard mode enables you to change keyboard mode and alternate keyboard
buffer size. Initially the default settings are modified mode and 16 bytes for
the buffer.
MODE [keymode[,bufsize]]
Where:
keymode

Enables or disables DIGITAL extended keys (m or u). Digital extended keys are Fll through F20 and the special editing keypad.
m disables DIGITAL extended keys.
u enables DIGITAL extended keys.
If keymode is omitted, it remains unchanged.

bufsize

Is the size of the new keyboard buffer (1 to 80 characters).
If bufsize is omitted, it remains unchanged. If bufsize is 16, the

default buffer is selected.
Example 1

To display the MODE help message, type:
A : \) !>lODE l Relurn)

Example 2

To set the keyboard to use DIGITAL extended keys, type:
A:\)MODE U(Return)

Mode Setup Program Version 1.0
(C) 1985 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Keybosrd mode set successfully.
A:\)

32-88

MODE

11111

Example 3
To set the keyboard to use DIGITAL extended keys and specify a buffer of 80
characters, type:
A:\>MDDE

U,80~

Mode Setup Program Ver5ion 1.0
(C) 1985 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Keyboard mode 5et 5ucce55fully.
Keyboard buffer in5talled 5ucce55fully.
A:\>

32-89

11111 MORE

Purpose
To view a file one screen at a time, use the MORE command. The MORE
command is an external command.

Format
command [filename.ext] I MORE
Where:
command

Is an MS-DOS operating system command.

filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to display.
Is the pipe separator.

Is the MORE filter.

Comments
Mer displaying one screen of information, the MORE command pauses and
displays the message:
--MORE--

To proceed, press the Return key. Continue pressing the Return key until all
the information has been displayed.

Example 1
To display MYFILES.TXT one screen at a time, type:
A:\)TVPE MVFILES.TXT I MORE(Return)

Example 2
To stop the display in the middle of a file, press:
( etrl!e )

Example 3
To display a directory listing of drive A, type:
A: \)D I R I MORE ( Return)

32-90

MOUSE

IIIII

MOUSE
Purpose
To make the DIGITAL mouse emulate the Microsoft mouse while using your
workstation, use the MOUSE command. The MOUSE command, an external
command, allows many applications that assume a Microsoft mouse is present
to run with a DIGITAL mouse.

Format
MOUSE

Comments
There are two drivers supplied with the MOUSE command:
• MOUSE.COM, which is run before you run an application outside of
MS-Windows
• MOUSE.SYS, which should be placed in your CONFIG.SYS file if you
frequently use a mouse outside of MS-Windows
If you unplug your mouse after running the MOUSE command, and then plug
the mouse back in, it will not work. To activate the mouse again, you must
restart the workstation by pressing the CtrljAltjDel keys.

Example 1
To load MOUSE.COM as you need it, type:
A\)MOUSE~

Example 2
To place MOUSE.SYS in your CONFIG.SYS file, type:
DEVICE=MDUSE.SYS

32-91

11111 NET

NET
Purpose
To connect to the network and its resources, use the NET command.
Format
NET option
Table 32-7 lists the NET command options.
Table 32-7

NET Command Options

Command

Function

NET CLEAR

Removes DEC net node names.

NET CONTINUE

Continues your network connection.

NET DEFINE

Assigns a DECnet node name.

NET HELP

Gets help.

NET LIST

Displays a list of remote nodes.

NET PAUSE

Temporarily stops your network connection.

NET PRINT

Prints a file on a remote printer.

NET START LAT

Starts network communications services.

NET START RDR

Connects to a network.

NET TEST

Tests the remote node.

NET TIME

Gets the date and time.

NET USE

Connects to a resource.

For more information about network commands, see Chapter 33.

32-92

PATH

IIIII

PATH
Purpose
To tell the MS-DOS operating system which directories to search for external
command, use the PATH command. The PATH command is an internal
command.

Format
PATH [drv:\path][;drv:\path][; ... ][;]
Where:
drv:

Is the drive containing the directory you want searched.

path

Is the path to the directory you want searched.

Comments
The MS-DOS operating system always searches your current directory first.
You must specify the complete path to each directory you want the MS-DOS
operating system to search. Otherwise, the MS-DOS operating system does a
relative search and mayor may not search the desired directory.
The MS-DOS operating system searches the path names in the order specified
in the PATH command.
The default value is no path. The MS-DOS operating system searches only the
current directory.
If you define a new path, it overwrites the old path.

32-93

11111 PATH

Example 1
To set the path to search the directory JOE for external commands, type:
A: \) PATH \USER\JDE ( Return)
A:\)

Example 2
To set the path to search your current directory and the directories JOE, SUE,
and DEVon drive A, type:
A: \) PATH \USER\JDE; \USER\SUE; \BI N\DEV ( Return )
A:\)

Example 3
To display the current path, type:
A : \) PATH ( Return )
PATH-\USER\JDE;\USER\SUE;\BIN\DEV
A:\)

Example 4
To set the NUL path, type:
A: \) PATH ; ( Return)
A:\)

32-94

PAUSE

IIIII

PAUSE
Purpose
To suspend program execution in a batch file, use the PAUSE command. The
PAUSE command is an internal command.

Format
PAUSE [comment]
Where:
comment

Is a message displayed by the PAUSE command.

Comments
The PAUSE command cannot be used at the MS-DOS operating system
prompt.
When you execute a batch file, you can change disks or perform some other
action. The PAUSE command suspends execution until you press any key,
except (Ctrl/C ) .
If you press (Ctrl/c) while executing a batch file, the MS-DOS operating sys-

tem stops execution and displays the following message:
Terminate batch job (YIN)?

If you press the Y key, the MS-DOS operating system exits from the batch job
and displays its prompt. If you press the N key, the MS-DOS operating system

displays its prompt, followed by the next command in the batch file.
Use the PAUSE command to break a batch file into pieces, enabling you to
end the batch command file at any intermediate point.

32-95

11111 PAUSE

Example
To run the CHKDSK command and display the files on drive C, create a batch
file that looks like this:
ECHO OFF
This file runs the CHKDSK command on drive C.
REM
It also runs the DIR command on drive C.
REM
It is named CHECK.BAT.
REM
PAUSE
CHKDSK C:
DIR C:

When the command processor encounters the PAUSE command, it displays:
Strike a key when ready . . .

Press a key to continue executing the commands in the batch file.

32-96

PERMIT

IIIII

PERMIT

Purpose
To offer a single session, single connection file server, use the PERMIT command. The PERMIT command is an external command.
For more information about the PERMIT command, see Chapter 33.

32-97

11111 PRINT

Purpose
To print a text file, use the PRINT command. The PRINT command is an
external command.

Format
PRINT [lD:][/B:][JU:][lM:][lS:][/Q:] [filename.ext] [/T][lC][lP]
Where:
ID:

Specifies the print device. If not specified, the default device
is PRN. You can only specify this qualifier the first time you
use the PRINT command after starting the MS-DOS operating
system.

IB:

Sets the size in bytes of the internal buffer. Increasing the
value of /B speeds up the PRINT command. The range for /B
is 5 12 to 16384 bytes. You can only specify this qualifier the
first time you use the PRINT command after staning the
MS-DOS operating system.

fU:

Specifies the number of computer clock ticks that the PRINT
command waits for the printer to be available. If the PRINT
command waits longer than this value, it gives up its
timeslice (see IS qualifier). The range for IU is 1 to 255
clock ticks. If you set this value equal to or greater than 1M,
IU is ignored. You can only specify this qualifier the first
time you use the PRINT command after starting the MS-DOS
operating system.

IU: 10 specifies that if the printer is not available in 10 clock
ticks since the CPU gave print control, then return control to
the CPU on the 11 th clock tick without printing.

1M:

Specifies the number of computer clock ticks available to
print a file. The default value is 2 clock ticks. The range for
1M is from 1 to 255 clock ticks. You can only specify this
qualifier the first time you use the PRINT command after
staning the MS-DOS operating system.
IM:8 specifies that if you are printing, use 8 consecutive
clock ticks to print before returning control to the CPU.

32-98

IS:

IIIII

Specifies the time slice value. The default is 8. The range for
IS is 1 to 255. If you set IS to 1, you get the attention of the
CPU 1/2 the time. You can only specify this qualifier the first
time you use the PRINT command after starting the MS· DOS
operating system.
IS:7 specifies to skip 7 clock ticks and give control to print
on the 8th clock tick. Therefore, the printer has 1/8 of the
CPU's processing time, assuming that 1M is set to 1. If IS is
set to 1, the PRINT command gets Ij2 the CPU's processing
time.

IQ:

Specifies the number of files allowed in the print queue if
you want more than 10. The range for IQ is 4 to 32. You can
only specify this qualifier the first time you use the PRINT
command after starting the MS·DOS operating system.

filename.ext

Is the drive, path file name and file extension of the file you
want to print. If you do not specify a drive, the PRINT com·
mand uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path. the
PRINT command uses the current directory.

Deletes all files in the print queue (waiting to be printed). A
message to this effect is displayed.

Turns on cancel mode. The file preceding IC and all files
following it are removed from the print queue.

Turns on print mode. The file preceding IP and all files fol·
lowing it are added to the print queue.

Comments
The computer clock is like a regular clock. A computer clock ticks n times
in one second. When you set the preceding qualifiers, you specify computer
clock ticks.
Use the following formula to determine the amount of time the PRINT com·
mand gets from the CPU:
T1me • Maxt1cks/(1+T1mesl1ce) * 100

32·99

11111 PRINT

Example 1
To display the contents of the print queue without affecting the queue, type:
A: \) PRINT( Return)
A:\)

Example 2
To empty the print queue, type:
A: \) PRI NT IT ( Return)
A:\)

Example 3
To remove TEMPl.TST, TEMP2.TST, and TEMP3.TST from the print queue,
type:
A:\)PRINT TEMP1.TST IC TEMP2.TST TEMP3.TST(Return)
A:\)

Example 4
To remove TEMPl.TST from the print queue and add TEMP2.TST and
TEMP3.TST to the print queue, type:
A:\)PRINT TEMP1.TST IC TEMP2.TST IP TEMP3.TST(Return)
A:\)

32-100

PRINT \\\\\

Example 5
To specify (after starting the MS-DOS operating system) a 512-byte buffer,
maxticks = 100, and timeslice = 1, type:
A:\)PRINT 18:512 IM:100 IS:1(RMum)
A:\)

Example 6
To specify the print device (the first time you use the PRINT command after
starting the MS-DOS operating system) as LPTI: and to print the file
MEMO.TXT, type:
A:\)PRINT ID:LPT1 MEMO.TXT(RMum)
Re5ident part of PRINT in5talled
A:\MEMO.TXT i5 currently being printed
A:\)

32-101

IIIII PROMPT
PROMPT

Purpose
To change the MS-DOS operating system command prompt, use the PROMPT
command. The PROMPT command is an internal command.

Format
PROMPT text
Where:
text

Is the prompt character string that specifies what you want displayed
as the prompt.

Comments
If you type no text, the prompt is the default prompt, which is the default
drive designation followed by the ">" character (for example, A».

Table 32-8 lists the characters you must specify to get a specific prompt.
Table 32-8 Prompt Characters
Type

For the prompt

The'S' character

The current time

The current date

The current directory of the default drive

The version number

The default drive

The '>' character

The '<' character

The 'I' character

A carriage return-line feed sequence

A space (leading only)

ASCII code X'IB' (escape)

32-102

PROMPT

IIIII

Examples
Table 32-9 contains examples you can enter into your AUTOEXEC.BAT file to
display a specific prompt.
Table 32-9 System Prompt Examples
Type

To get

PROMPT $p

A:\

PROMPT $p$g

A: \> (Recommended)

PROMPT $$

PROMPT $n

PROMPT $g

PROMPT $1

To set the prompt to display the default drive letter, the current directory
and the >, type:
A)

PROMPT SPSG ( Return )

A:\)

32-103

11111 RECOVER

RECOVER

Purpose
To recover a file or disk containing bad sectors, use the RECOVER command.
The RECOVER command is an external command.

Format
RECOVER drv:[\path\][filename.ext]
Where:
drY:

Is the drive you want recovered.

path

Is the path to the directory containing the file you want
recovered. If you do not specify a path, the RECOVER command uses the current directory.

filename .ext

Is the file name and file extension of the file you want
recovered.

Comments
If a sector on a disk is bad, you can recover either the file containing that
sector (without the bad sector) or the entire disk (if the bad sector was in a
directory) .

The MS-DOS operating system reads the file or disk sector by sector and skips
the bad sectors. When it finds bad sectors, it marks them and no longer
allocates them to store your data.
NOTE

You cannot use the RECOVER command with a remote network
resource as the target.

32-104

RECOVER

IIIII

Example 1

To recover all of the MEMO.TXT file (except the bad sectors), type:
A: \) RECOVER MEMO. TXT ( Return)
A:\)

Example 2

To recover all of drive C (except the bad sectors), type:
A: \) RECOVER C: ( Return)

A:\)

32-105

IIIII REM
REM
Purpose
To display remarks from a batch file, use the REM command. The REM command is an internal command.

Format
REM comment
Where:
comment

Is the text following the REM command.

Comments
The REM command cannot be used at the MS-DOS operating system prompt.
ECHO must be on to display remarks.
You can use the REM command without a comment in your file to add blank
lines for readability.

Example
To display comments using the REM command, use the following batch file
as an example:
REM
Thi~ file run~ the CHKDSK command on drive C
REM
It also runs the DIR command on drive C
REM
It i~ named CHECK.BAT
PAUSE
CHKDSK C:
DIR C:

32-106

REN

IIIII

REN
Purpose
To rename a file, use the REN command. The REN command is an internal
command.

Format
REN filenameI.ext filename2.ext
Where:
filename I.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the current
file. If you do not specify a drive, the REN command uses the
default drive. If you do not specify a path, the REN command
uses the current directory.

filename2.ext

Is the new file name and file extension.

Comments
You must supply a drive name if the file is not on the default drive.
You cannot rename files across drives.
Wildcards can be used in both file names and file extensions.

Example 1
To change all .LST files to .PRN files, type:
A : \ ) REN" . L ST" " P RN ( Relum )
A:\)

Example 2
To rename CHAPIO on drive C to PARTIO, type:
A: \ )REN C: CHAP 10 PART1 0 ( Return )

A:\)

The file remains on drive C.

32-107

11111 RESTORE

RESTORE

Purpose
To restore and make usable back-up files from a back-up disk created using
the BACKUP command, use the RESTORE command.
In addition to restoring files to local drives, the RESTORE command allows
you to restore files to a network drive.

Format
RESTORE [drv!: drv2:[\path\][filename.ext] [/S][/P]]
Where:
drY!:

Is the drive containing the BACKUP source files.

drv2:

Is the destination drive.

path

Is the path to the directory where the back-up files must be
restored. It must exist, unless you use the IS qualifier. If you
use the IS qualifier, a subdirectory will be created if it does
not exist.

filename.ext

Is the file name and file extension of the restored file.

Restores subdirectories. If the destination disk does not contain the subdirectories from which the files were backed up,
they are created, and the files are restored.
The IS qualifier can be used without specifying a path if the
target directory is below the current directory.

Prompts you for permission to restore read-only files.

Comments
The RESTORE command only restores files to the directory area where the
files originated. For example, if you backed up files to A:\TEST from
C:\TEST, you can only restore the files from A:\TEST to C:\TEST.

32-108

RESTORE

IIIII

DIGITAL stores back-up files on a hard disk in a subdirectory called
\BKSUBDIR (if you back up files to a hard disk or a network drive). The
industry-standard BACKUP command stores back-up files on a subdirectory
called \BACKUP. When using the RESTORE command with industry-standard
files, you must explicitly specify \BACKUP as the source of the restore. If
you do not, the defaults used by the RESTORE command will not find the
files.

Example 1
To display the RESTORE help message, type:
A:\)RESTORE<Return)

Example 2
To determine the original directory needed to restore the file TEST.TXT,
type:
C:\)RESTORE A:\TEST.TXT<Return>
File TEST.TXT
Restore Path \TEST\TEST.TXT
C:\)

Example 3
To restore all .ASM files from C:\ASMBK to their original directory on drive
A, type:
A:\)RESTORE C:\ASMBK\*.ASM IS<Return>

Example 4
To restore all the files from network drive I to drive C, type:
I:\)RESTORE I: C: IS<Return)
Files were backed up on 12-1-1986
Restoring files from drive I:

1:\)

32-109

11111

RMDIR

Purpose
To remove a subdirectory from the MS-DOS operating system directory structure, use the RMDIR command. The RMDIR command is an internal
command.

Format
RMDlR I RD subdirectory
Where:
subdirectory

Is the subdirectory you want to remove.

Comments
You must delete all files in a subdirectory before you use the RMDIR
command.

Example
To remove JOE from the directory structure, type:
A: \>RMDI R \USER\JOE ~

A:\>

32-110

SELECT

IIIII

SELECT

Purpose
To append or create information in the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS
files, use the SELECT command. The SELECT command is an external
command.

Format
SELECT [cc cs kb [drY:]]
Where:
cc

Is the country code (three digits).
001

United States

002

Canada

031

Netherlands

032

Belgium

033

France

034

Spain

039

Italy

041

Switzerland

044

United Kingdom

045

Denmark

046

Sweden

047

Norway

049

Germany

061

Australia

358

Finland

972

Israel

Is the character set code (three characters).
CA7

Canadian 7-bit NRC

CH7

Swiss 7 -bit NRC

DE7

German 7 -bit NRC

DK7

Danish 7 -bit NRC

ES7

Spanish 7 -bit NRC

FI7

Finnish 7 -bit NRC

FR7

French 7 -bit NRC

ISO

ISO Multinational

IT7

Italian 7 -bit NRC

MCS

DIGITAL Multinational

N07

Norwegian 7 -bit NRC

SE7

Swedish 7 -bit NRC

ST2

IBM NorwayjDenmark
Extended

STD

IBM Extended

UK7

United Kingdom 7 -bit
NRC

32-111

IIIII

SELECT

Is the country keyboard abbreviation (two characters).

dry:

Canadian

Swiss

German

Danish

Spanish

Finnish

French

Italian

Norwegian

Swiss (German)

Swedish

Swiss (French)

English

American English

Is the destination drive. If you do not specify a drive,the SELECT
command uses the default drive.
CAUTION

We .recommend you do not change your AUTOEXEC.BAT file or
your CONFIG.SYS file if you are using your workstation in a
network environment.

Comments
The SELECT command appends or creates the following information in the
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files:
• Date and time formats
• Character set selection
• Keyboard layout
This information determines the base system configuration when you start the
workstation, or when you restart the MS-DOS operating system.
The destination disk must be formatted and you must be able to start the
MS-DOS operating system from it.

32-112

SELECT 11111

Table 32-10 shows how the SELECT command affects the CONFIG.SYS file
and the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
Table 32-10

How SELECT Affects CONFlG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT

File

Exists

CONFIG.SYS

Yes

No line begins with
COUNTRY.

The new line is added
to beginning of the file.

CONFIG.SYS

Yes

One or more lines be·
gin with COUNTRY.

The first occurrence of
the line beginning with
COUNTRY is replaced.
The remaining lines beginning with COUNTRY
are deleted.

AUTOEXEC.BAT

Status

What Happens
The CONFIG.SYS file is
created. It contains the
single command line
COUNTRY=cc.

The AUTOEXEC.BAT
file is created. It contains the lines:
FONT cs
KEYB cskb
LCOUNTRY cs

AUTOEXEC.BAT

Yes

No lines begin with
FONT, KEYB, or
LCOUNTRY.

The new lines are ad·
ded at the beginning of
the file. These files
must be in the root
directory.

AUTOEXEC.BAT

Yes

One or more lines be·
gin with FONT, KEYB,
or LCOUNTRY.

The first occurrence is
replaced with the new
line. All remaining occurrences are deleted.

32-113

IIIII SELECT
Example 1
To display the SELECT help message, type:
A: \) SELECT (Return )

Example 2
To load the French country-specific information, the multinational character
set, and the French keyboard map file, type:
A: \) SELECT 033 MCS FR ( Return)
Country Configuration Utility Ver5ion 1.00
(C) Copyright 1985, 1986 by Digital Equipment Corporation
Adding "COUMTRY=033" to \COMFIG.SYS
Adding "FOMT MCS" to \AUTOEXEC.BAT
Adding "KEYB MCSFR" to \AUTOEXEC.BAT
Adding "LCOUMTRY MCS" to \AUTOEXEC.BAT
Configuration 5ucce55fully completed.
A:\)

32-114

SET 11111

SET

Purpose
To set one string value in the environment equal to another sting value, use
the SET command. The SET command is an internal command.

Format
SET [stringl=string2]
Where:
stringl

Is the current string.

string2

Is the new string.

Comments
When the MS-DOS operating system sees a SET command, it inserts the entire
string into a part of memory reserved for environment strings. If stringl
already exists in the environment, it is replaced by string2. If you type the
SET command with only stringl, the associated string name is removed from
the environment.
By examining its environment, an application program can get a listing of all
values that have been set. The environment values are passed in the Program
Segment Prefix.
If you use the SET command in batch processing, you can define your
replaceable parameters with names instead of numbers. If your batch file

contains the statement LINK %FILE%, you can set the name that the MS-DOS
operating system uses for that variable with the SET command.
CAUTION

We recommend you do not change your AUTOEXEC.BAT file if you
are using your workstation in a network environment.

32-115

IIIII SET
Example 1
To specify that the COMMAND.COM file is located in the subdirectory SYS on
drive A, add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
SET COMSPEC=A:\SYS\COMMAND.CDM

This line is needed if the COMMAND.COM file has to be reloaded after you
run an application program.

Example 2
To replace the %FILE% parameter with the file name DOMORE in all your
batch files, add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
SET f i le~DOMORE

Therefore, you do not need to edit each batch file to change the replaceable
parameter names.
When you use text (instead of numbers) as replaceable parameters, end the
name with a percent sign.

Example 3
To display the current environment settings, type:
A: \ ) SET eRelurn )
COMSPEC-A:\COMMAND.COM
PROMPT=$P$G
PATH=A:\SYS;A:\SYS\DOS;A:\SYS\WIN;A:\SYS\NET
A:\)

32-116

11111

SHARE
Purpose
To install file sharing and locking, use the SHARE command. The SHARE
command is an external command.

Format
SHARE [/F:space] [/L:locks]
Where:
IF:space

Allocates file space (in bytes) for the area the MS-DOS operating system uses to record file-sharing information. Each
open file needs the length of the full file name plus 11 bytes
(the average path name is 20 bytes). The default value for IF
is 2048 bytes.

IL:locks

Sets the number of opened files that are locked. Only one
user can open a locked file. The default value for IL is 20
locks.

Comments
Use the SHARE command only when using the network.
You can include the SHARE command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file to install
file sharing.
Once you have run the SHARE command in an MS-DOS operating system
session, the MS-DOS operating system checks all read and write requests.
If you want to change the allocated file space or the number of open files

that get locked, you must restart the workstation and run the command with
the new values.

Example 1
To load file sharing and use the default values for the IF and IL qualifiers,
type:
A : \ > S I-HIP E ~. . '_'-._C;"'''.j

32-116.1

This page intentionally left blank.

IIIII

Example 2

To allocate 4096 bytes of file space for file-sharing information, type:
A: \)SHARE/F: 4096 ~

Example 3

To lock 9 opened files, type:
A:\)SHARE/L:9~

32-117

IIIII SHIFT
SHIFT
Purpose
To access more than 10 replaceable parameters in a batch file, use the SHIFT
command. The SHIFT command is an internal command.
Format
SHIFT
Comments
The SHIFT command cannot be used at the MS-DOS operating system prompt.
Usually, command files are limited to handling 10 parameters (%0 through
%9). To access more than 10 parameters, use the SHIFT command to change
the command line parameters.
There is no backward shift. Once the SHIFT command is executed, the 0
parameter (%0) that existed before the shift cannot be recovered.
The first parameter (%0) before any shifts is the name of the batch file.
Example
Assume that the file TEST.BAT contains the following command lines:
SHIFT
TYPE %0
TYPE %1
SHIFT
TYPE %0

32-118

SHIFT

IIIII

Assume, also, that the parameters are:

%0
%1
%2

TEST
FILE1.TXT
FILE2.TXT

To shift the parameters one position, type:
A:\)TEST ~-ILE1.TXT FILE2.TXT~

The new parameters are:

%0
%1
%2

FILE1.TXT
FILE2.TXT

The first TIPE %0 command displays the contents of FILE1.TXT. The TIPE
%1 command displays the contents of FILE2 .TXT. The SHIFT command shifts
each parameter one position. The new parameters are:

%0
%1
%2

FILE2.TXT

The second TIPE %0 command displays the contents of FILE2 .TXT again.
If more than 10 are on a command line, those that appear after the 10th

(%9) parameter are successively shifted one at a time into %9.

32-119

IIIII SORT
SORT
Purpose
To read, sort, and display standard input, use the SORT command. The SORT
command is an external command.

Format
SORT [jR] [j+n]
Where:
/R

Reverses the sort order (from Z to A).

/+n

Specifies that the SORT command should start with column n
(where n is some number). If you do not specify this qualifier,
the SORT command begins sorting from column 1.

Comments
The SORT program checks the name of the currently loaded font file and
searches for the corresponding .SRT file. This sort file contains the collating
sequence for each character in the font character set.
If the .SRT file does not exist or is not in the proper format, a message is

displayed.
The SORT program contains the default sort table STD.SRT.
You can use the SORT command to alphabetize a file by columns.
You can also use SORT with redirection for input and output to a file.

32-120

SORT

IIIII

Example 1
To read the file UNSORT.TXT, reverse the sort, and write the output to
SORT.TXT, type:
A:\)SORT IR ( UNSORT.TXT ) SORT.TXT(Return)
A:\)

Example 2
To sort the file UNSORT.TXT when the ISO.FNT file is loaded, type:
A:\)SORT ( UNSORT.TXT (Return)
The SORT command then uses the ISO.SRT file to do the sorting.

Example 3
To sort the directory listing by file type (the file type starts in column 10)
and send the output to the screen, type:
A: \ ) DI R : SORT I + 1 0 ( Return )
MORE
ASSIGN
APPEND

COM
COM
COM

282
1509
1724

2-10-86
2-10-86
5-05-85

11:13a
10:21a
12:02a

ANSI
MDRIVE

SYS
SYS

1903
2996
A:\

2-06-86
2-06-86

3:25p
2:00p

Directory of
A:\)

32-121

IIIII SORT
Example 4
To sort the directory listing by file size (the file size starts in column 14)
and send the output to the screen, type:
A:\)DIR : SORT /+14(Return)

00351C41
3-01-86
11 :51a
0
00351EOF
0
3-01-86
11:51a
COHFIG
SYS
72
1-11-86
1:21p
AUTOEXEC BAT
2:43p
211
1-11-86
SORT
EXE
2144
2:58p
2-06-86
COMMAHD COM
23450
12-06-85
2:56p
Directory of A:\
6 Flle(s)
1148416 bytes free
Volume in drive A is HOHAME
A:\)

Example 5
To sort the directory listing by file size and send it to the screen, one screen
at a time, type:
A:\)DIR : SORT /+14

32-122

MORE ( Return )

SUBST

IIIII

SUBST
Purpose
To substitute a logical drive letter for a valid path name, use the SUBST
command. The external SUBST command deletes a logical drive or creates a
logical drive by associating a path name with a drive letter.

Format
SUBST [drY!: drv2:\path2]
SUBST drvl: jD
Where:
drvl:

Is the logical drive for the substituted path name. This drive cannot
be ASSIGned or in use when you execute the SUBST command.

drv2:

Is the drive you want to substitute with a logical drive.

path2

Is the path you want to substitute with a logical drive.

Deletes the logical drive for the path name.

Comments
When the MS-DOS operating system sees a drive that was created with the
SUBST command, it replaces the reference with the substituted path name.
NOTE

You cannot use the SUBST command with any network, ASSIGNed,
or JOINed drives.

32-123

IIIII SUBST
Example 1

To create a logical drive E for the path name A:\DSR\FRED\FORMS, type:
A:\>SUBST E: A:\USR\FRED\FORMS(Return)
A:\>

Example 2

To display the files in A:\DSR\FRED\FORMS, type:
A: \ >DIRE : ( Return )

Example 3

To display the names of the logical drives, type:
A:\>SUBST~

A:\USR\FRED\FORMS

A:\>

Example 4

To delete the logical drive E, type:
A:\>SUBST E:
A:\>

32-124

/D~

SYS 11111

SYS

Purpose
To copy the system files IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS from one disk to another,
use the SYS command. The SYS command is an external command.

Format
SYS drY:
Where:
drY:

Is the drive where you want to transfer the system files.

Comments
The destination disk must be completely blank or already contain the system
files IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS. If IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS exist on the destination disk, the IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS you are copying to the destination disk
must be the same size, or smaller.
IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS are both hidden files that are not displayed when you
type the DIR command.
Use the COpy command to copy COMMAND.COM.
NOTE

You cannot use the SYS command to copy the MS-DOS operating
system to a remote resource. You can use the SYS command to
copy the MS-DOS operating system from a remote resource to a
local drive.

32-125

IIIII SYS
Example 1
To copy IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS from a remote resource to drive A:, first
make the remote resource the default drive, and then type:
SYS A: ( Return)

Example 2
To copy the .MS-DOS operating system files to drive C, type:
A:\)SYS C:(Return)
SY5tem tran5ferred
A:\)

32-126

TIME

IIIII

TIME

Purpose
To set and display the time, use the TIME command. The TIME command is
an internal command.

Format
TIME [hh][:mm][:ss][.cc]
Where:
hh

Is the hours (00 through 24).

Is the minutes (00 through 59).

Is the seconds (00 through 59).

Is the hundredths of seconds (00 through 99).

Comments
The time format is country-specific. If you enter an invalid time, the MS-DOS
operating system displays a message and prompts you to enter the time again.

Example 1
To enter a new time, type:
A: \) TI ME ( Return )

Current time is 1:25:45.00
Enter new time:
A:\)

Press the Return key if you do not want to change the time shown.

Example 2
To set the time to 4:15 PM, type:
A: \) TI ME 16: 15 ( Return )
A:\)

32-127

IIIII

TYPE

Purpose
To display the contents of an ASCII file, use the lYPE command. The lYPE
command is an internal command.

Format
lYPE filename.ext
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the file you
want to display. If you do not specify a drive, the lYPE command uses the default drive. If you do not specify a path, the
lYPE command uses the current directory.

Comments
When you use the lYPE command to display a file with tabs in it, all tabs
expand to 8 spaces.
Do not use the lYPE command to display a binary file. A binary file usually
has a .BIN or .COM file extension.

Example 1
To display the file MEMO.TXT on the screen, type:
A:\) TYPE MEMD.TXT(Return)
A:\)

32·128

TYPE 11111

Example 2
To display the file REPORT.TXT in the subdirectory \USER\SCOTT on the
screen, type:
A: \) TYPE \USER\SCOTT\REPORT. TXT (Retur~J
A:\)

Example 3
To display the file REPORT.TXT in the subdirectory \USER\SCOTT on the
screen and display -MORE- at the bottom of each screen display, type:
A:\)TYPE \USER\SCOTT\REPORT.TXT ! MOREcReturn)
A:\)

32-129

IIIII

VER

VER
Purpose

To display the MS-DOS operating system version number, use the VER command. The VER command is an internal command.
Format

VER
Example

To display the MS-DOS operating system version number, type:
A: \) VER (Return )
Di9ital Equipment Corporstion MS-DOS Version 3.10

A:\)

32·130

VERIFY

IIIII

VERIFY

Purpose
To verify that a file is written correctly to a disk, use the VERIFY command.
The VERIFY command is an internal command.

Format
VERIFY [ON I OFF]

Comments
VERIFY OFF is the default when you turn on the workstation.
This command has the same purpose as the COpy command with the IV
qualifier.
The MS-DOS operating system performs a VERIFY each time you write data to
a disk. If the VERIFY command is unable to successfully write your data to
disk, a message is displayed.
VERIFY ON remains in effect until you turn it off.

Example 1
To set VERIFY to ON, type:
A : \) VE R I F YON ( Return )
A:\)

Example 2
To display the current setting of VERIFY, type:
A:\) VERIFY~
VERIFY i5 on
A:\)

32-131

IIIII VOL
VOL

Purpose
To display the default drive's label, use the VOL command. The VOL command is an internal command.

Format
VOL [drv:]
Where:
drY:

Is the drive whose volume label you want to see. If you do not
specify a drive, the VOL command displays the volume label of the
default drive.

Example
To display the label of the disk in drive C, type:
A:\) VOL C: (Return)

Volume in drive C i5 MSDOSV310
A:\)

32·132

Chapter 33
Using the
Network With MS-DOS

This chapter discusses:
• Network commands
• What a network is
• What a server is
• How to connect to the network
• How to connect to a resource
• How to use a resource
• How to disconnect from a resource
• How to automatically connect to a resource
Table 33-1 lists the network commands and what they do.
Table 33-1

Network Commands

Command

Function

NET CLEAR

Removes DECnet node names.

NET CONTINUE

Continues your network connection.

NET DEFINE

Assigns a DECnet node name.

NET HELP

Gets help.

NET LIST

Displays a list of remote nodes.

NET PAUSE

Temporarily stops your network connection.

NET PRINT

Prints a file on a remote printer.

33-1

IIIII Using the Network With MS-DOS
Table 33-1

Network Commands (cont_)

Command

Function

NET START IAT

Starts network communications services.

NET START RDR

Connects to a network.

NET TEST

Tests the remote node.

NET TIME

Gets the date and time from a node.

NET USE

Connects to a resource.

PERMIT

Offers a single session, single connection file server.

What Is a Network?
A network is two or more computers connected together to transfer data and
share resources, such as directories, files and printers. In a network, each
computer runs independently, even though it can communicate with other
computers on the network.
A network gives you the communication and space-saving advantages of
shared files, and the convenience and economy of a shared printer.
The network lets you and other users access files and printers that belong to
other computers. These computers can be in your office, in the next room,
or several floors away. Using a network, you can access files and printers on
other computers as if they were attached to the computer on your desk. You
can also read and edit existing files, or create new ones. And, you can use
files on other computers while you are using application programs.

33-2

Using the Network With MS· DOS

IIIII

What Is a Server?
A server stores the resources (directories, files, and printers) accessible by
workstations (a computer used to access the resources available through the
network). It is called a server because it serves the other workstations on the
network when they request file and printer services. There can be many
servers on one network.
The system administrator determines which resources are shared on the
network. When a resource is shared, it is made available to users on the
network. The system administrator also sets access restrictions, if any, to
these resources.
Each workstation on the network can use the resources that reside on the
workstation (locally) or on the server (remotely). If the system administrator
offers a remote resource to the network, a workstation can access that
resource as if it were local.
You can only use resources on another workstation when it functions as a
server.
On the network, you can use most of the MS· DOS operating system com·
mands, and you can run most programs designed to run under the MS-DOS
operating system. You cannot use the following MS-DOS operating system
commands with remote network resources:
CHKDSK

DlSKCOPY

JOIN

LABEL

RECOVER

SUBST

SYS'

• The SYS command can be used to copy the system files from a remote network
resource.

33-3

IIIII Using the Network With MS-DOS
Before Using the Network
Before you can use the network and a resource on the network, you must
connect to:
• The network
• A resource

Getting Help
To display a list of the commands for which help is available, type:
A: \ > NET HELP ( Return)

To get help on a specific command, type:
A:\>NET HELP

command(R~urn)

Where:
command

Is the command for which you want help.

Connecting to the Network (NET START RDR)
To connect to the network, use the NET START REDIRECTOR (or, NET START
RDR) command. The NET START RDR command executes the MSNET.lNI file.
This file contains network commands and a script to execute each of them.
When the network commands in the MSNET.lNI file execute successfully,
your workstation connects to the network. If the network commands in the
MSNET.INI do not execute successfully, a message is displayed indicating
that a problem occurred.
To use the NET START RDR command, type:
A:\>NET START RDR(Return)

33-4

Using tbe Network Witb MS· DOS

IIIII

If the connection is successful, information similar to the following informa-

tion is displayed:
Network kernel ver510n 1.00
Datallnk - Ver510n 1.00
DECnet DNP Ver510n T1.00
DECnet Node Name 'YELLOW' (9.999)
DECnet 5tarted
MS-NET/DECnet Se55ion Ver510n 1.00
DECnet LAT Ver510n 1.00
MS-NET Redirector 1.00
Command completed 5ucces5fully.

The AUTOEXEC.BAT file on your key diskette automatically executes the NET
START RDR command. Therefore, when you start the MS· DOS operating system from the key diskette, you also automatically connect to the network.

Specifying Device Names
When you specify a device on the command line, you specify either a physical device or a logical device.
A physical device is a device that exists on your workstation, for example,
drive A. If you specify a physical printer, for example PRN:, you are specifying your workstation printer.
A logical device is a device (for example, drive H) that exists on a server. If
you specify a logical printer, for example LPTl:, you are specifying a remote
printer. You use the logical device as if it existed on your workstation. If you
connect to a server using logical devices, you save your physical devices for
work with physical disks or printers.
The MS-DOS operating system allows you to have 26 logical devices (A
through Z), although the default for the LASTDRIVE command in the
CONFIG.SYS file is E. The installation procedure, when creating the
CONFIG.SYS file, sets LASTDRIVE equal to M.

33-5

IIIII Using the Network With MS·DOS
Connecting to a Resource (NET USE)
To connect to a resource, use the NET USE command. The first time you use
the NET USE command, it establishes a session and a connection. Any further
NET USE commands establish connections.
The NET USE command enables you to connect to a directory resource, from
which you can access files, or to connect to a printer resource, from which
you can print files. After connecting to the network, your requests for remote
resources are sent over the network to the designated server.
The NET USE command has the format:
[NEl1 USE device: \ \nodename\alias [password I 0]
Where:
device:

Is the name of a device you want to assign a directory. De·
vice is a drive letter, such as C or D.

nodename

Is the DECnet node name of the server to which you want to
connect.

alias

Represents the directory you want to access. The alias is
assigned by your system administrator.

password

Is the password for the node.
Prompts you for the password.

For example, to assign the resource specified by the alias ACCOUNTS on the
DECnet node DANCER to drive E, type:
A:\)HET USE E:

\\DAHCER\ACCOUHTS(R~um)

Command completed successfully.
A:\)

Then, to assign the resource specified by the alias ORDERS on the DECnet
node DANCER to drive F, type:
A:\)HET USE F: \\DAHCER\ORDERS(Rerum)
Command completed successfully.
A:\)

33·6

Using the Network With MS-DOS

IIIII

Connecting to a Directory (NET USE)
To connect to a directory, use the NET USE command_ For example, to connect a directory, specified by the alias ACCOUNTS, on the DECnet node
ORANGE to drive D of your workstation, type:
A:\)NET USE D: \\ORANGE\ACCOUNTS(Return)
Command completed successfully.
A:\)

Use the NET USE command to connect to your personal directory on a server.
For example, to connect to the directory GALLAGHER on the DECnet node
WISDOM to drive E, type:
A:\)NET USE E: \\WISDOM\GALLAGHER(Relurn)

You can connect more than one logical drive to the same directory. For
example, to assign ACCOUNTS on DANCER to drive E, type:
A: \) NET USE E: \ \DANCER\ACCOUNTS (Return )
Command completed successfully.
A:\)

Then, to assign ACCOUNTS on DANCER to drive F, type:
A:\)NET USE F: \\DANCER\ACCOUNTS(Return)
Command completed successfully.
A:\)

Connecting to a Remote Printer (NET USE)
To connect to a server's printer, use the NET USE command. You use the
same format you use when you connect to a remote directory, except now:
• Printername is the alias of the printer and corresponds to a print service
offered by the server
• device refers to a printer rather than a drive

33-7

IIIII Using the Network With MS-DOS
When connecting to a remote printer, the NET USE command has the format:
[NET) USE device: \ \nodename\printername
Where:
device:

Is PRN, LPTl, LPT2, or LPT3. A printer device can be connected to only one printer at a time.

node name

Is the DECnet node name of the server offering the printer.

printername

Is the alias of the printer.

For example, to connect the local device LPTI to the printer specified by the
alias PRINTER on the DEC net node DANCER, type:
A:\) NET USE LPn:

\\DANCER\PRINTER(Fietu,,u

Command completed successfully.
A:\)

Listing Remote Connections (NET USE)
To list remote resources connected to your workstation, use the NET USE
command:
A: \) NET USE (Relu.i!)

A list similar to the following list is displayed:
Status

33-8

Local Device

Network Name

\ \orange\accounts

\ \dancer\accounts

LPTl:

\ \dancer\printer

Using the Network With MS-DOS 11111

Using Resources
Now that you are connected successfully to the network and to its resources,
you use the resources on a server as if they were on your own workstation.

Changing to Another Drive
You change from one drive to another by typing the letter (followed by a
colon) of the drive to which you want to change:
A:\>D:~

After changing to drive D, you use the files in the directory specified by the
alias ACCOUNTS on the DEC net node ORANGE as if they were on a disk in
your workstation.

Printing a Remote File (NET PRINT)
To display the server's print queue, display another print queue, or print a
file on a remote printer, use the NET PRINT command.
If you are connected to the VAX/VMS Server for MS-DOS and issue the NET

PRINT \ \nodename command, the server returns information about the
generic queue SYS $ PRINT. If the queue is not enabled, see your system
administrator.
The NET PRINT command has the format:
[NET] PRINT \ \nodename
[NET] PRINT [filename] device
Where:
nodename

Is the node name of the server to which you are connected.

filename

Is the file you want to print.

device

Is LPT 1, LPT2, or LPT3.

33-9

IIIII

Using the Network With MS-DOS

For example, to show the print queue for the server ORANGE, type:
A:\>NET PRINT \\ORANGE(Return)
To show the print queue for the device LPTI, type:
A:\>NET PRINT LPT1(Return)
To send the file MEMO.TXT to the remote printer assigned to the device
LPTI, type:
A:\>NET PRINT MEMO.TXT LPT1: ~

Temporarily Disconnecting From Network Resources
(NET PAUSE)
You can temporarily disconnect from network resources to connect your
devices to your own physical disks, directories, or printers.
NOTE

To suspend disk redirection, you must first exit from MS-Windows.
For example, if you connected your device LPTI to a network printer, you
cannot use that device for your own physical printer. To temporarily
disconnect from the network, use the NET PAUSE command. The NET PAUSE
command has the format:
NET PAUSE [disk redirection I print redirection]
NET PAUSE [drdr I prdr]

33-10

Using the Network With MS·DOS

IIIII

Where:
drdr

Is disk redirection. It temporarily suspends disk redirection, enabling
you to use a previously redirected device to access your own disks.

prdr

Is print redirection. It temporarily suspends print redirection, ena·
bling you to use a device to access your own printer.

For example, to temporarily suspend print redirection, type:
A: \ >NET PAUSE PRDR ~
You can now use any of your local printers.

Restarting After a NET PAUSE Command (NET CONTINUE)
To continue redirection to a network resource, use the NET CONTINUE
command.
NOTE

To use the NET CONTINUE command for disk redirection, you
must set your current directory to your local (A: or C) \DECNET
directory.
The NET CONTINUE command has the format:
NET CONTINUE [drdr I prdr]
Where:
drdr

Is disk redirection. It enables you to resume your connection
to the network resource.

prdr

Is print redirection. It enables you to resume your connection to the network printer.

For example, to continue printer redirection, type:
A:\>NET CONTINUE

prdr~

You can now use the network printer as you did before you issued the NET
PAUSE command.

33-11

11111

Using the Network With MS-DOS

Disconnecting From a Resource
You can only connect to one remote resource per device. If you want to
connect to another remote resource with a previously connected device, you
must first disconnect the device from its current remote resource.

Disconnecting From a Remote Directory
To disconnect from a remote directory, use the NET USE command with the
jD qualifier.
NOTE

Make sure you insert a space before the jD parameter.
For example, to disconnect drive D from the network, type:
A:\>NET USE D:

ID(Return)

You can now use drive D for a different directory resource.

Disconnecting From a Remote Printer
To disconnect from a remote printer, use the NET USE command with the jD
qualifier.
For example, to disconnect LPTI from the network, type:
A : \ > NET USE L P T 1 I D ( Return)

You can now use device LPTI for a different printer resource.

33-12

Using the Network With MS-DOS \\\\\

Other Network Commands
NET CLEAR
The NET CLEAR command removes DECnet node names from the
DECNODE.DAT file on the key diskette. These names are used by NCP. The
NET CLEAR command removes the specified DECnet node name or all
DEC net node names known to the local node.
The NET CLEAR command has the format:
[NET] CLEAR nodename
Where:
node name

Is the DECnet node name you want to remove from the
DECNODE.DAT file.

For example, to remove the DECnet node HOBBIT from the DECNODE.DAT
file, type:
A:\) NET CLEAR HOBBIT(ReiumJ

NET DEFINE
The NET DEFINE command assigns a DECnet node name and access control
information to a unique DECnet node address. During execution, the NET
DEFINE command automatically sets the MS-NET flag. This flag indicates that
the specified node is a part of the VAXmate network. To set the LAT flag, use
NCP. The LAT flag indicates which nodes are preferred nodes. When LAT is
invoked, the LAT service table is created containing the names of no more
than 10 preferred nodes. These preferred nodes are used by the terminal
emulators. The NET DEFINE command has the format:
[NET] DEFINE name address
Where:
name

Specifies the DECnet name to be associated with the node
address.

address

Specifies the DECnet address of the node being defined.

For example, to assign the DECnet node name MADRID to the DEC net node
address 2.65, type:
A:\) NET DEFINE MADRID

2,65~

33-13

IIIII Using the Network With MS-DOS
NET LIST
The NET LIST command displays a list of remote nodes recognized by your
workstation. The NET LIST command has the format:
[NET] LIST
The NET LIST command displays the following information:
• Node address
• Node name
• Number of active logical links
• Node status, which indicates whether it is an MS-NET node or a preferred LAT host
• Access control information, which is output as account information
For example, to display the node address, node name, number of active logi. cal links, and the access control information, type:
A:\) NET UST(Return)

Node Summary a5 of

1-Jan-1986 10:05:00

Executor node

• 9.999 (YELLOW)

State
Identification

• On
• DECnet-DOS Y1.1

Node
Addre!!i5

Node
Name

Active
Links

LATI
MS-NET

9.901
9.902
9.903
9.999

BLUE
GREEN
RED
YELLOW

0
1
0

Account
Information

Command completed succe!!isfully.
A:\)

Your workstation can only access nodes defined as MS-NET ("M").

33-14

Using the Network With MS-DOS

IIIII

All nodes defined with a key disk or the NET DEFINE command are automatically listed as MS-NET (" M") .

NET START LAT
The NET START LAT command enables you to use network communications
in the terminal emulator. You use this command when you do not want to
start the entire network.
The NET START LAT command has the format:
[NET] START LAT
LAT is started when NET START RDR is executed.

NET TEST
The NET TEST command invokes the loop test for the remote node. It verifies
that your node can communicate with a specified remote node.
When the test is complete, a success message is displayed. If the test is
unsuccessful, an error message is displayed.
The NET TEST command has the format:
[NET] TEST name
Where:
name

Is the name of a remote node. A node name is a 1 to 6 character
(alphanumeric) string that identifies a specific node. A node address is a numeric character string consisting of an area number and
a specific node number. The node address also serves to uniquely
identify the node in the network.

For example, to specify the node GRAHAM as the remote node to be used in
the remote node test, type:
A:\)NET TEST GRAHAM~~'lJ

33-15

IIIII Using the Network With MS-DOS
NET TIME
The NET TIME command gets the date and time from a node you specify, or
from the first available node. Then, the MS-DOS operating system DATE and
TIME can be set.
The NET TIME command has the format:
NET TIME [node name]
NETTIME [node name]
Where:
nodename

Is a DECnet node name.

For example, to get the date and time from the DECnet node named
YELLOW, type:
A:\)NET TIME YELLOW( Return)
The current date is 03/02/86
The current time is 09:21:05.97
A:\)

To get the date and time from any DECnet node, type:
A:\)NET TIME~
Time/Date serviced by node YELLOW
The current date is 03/02/86
The current time is 09:21:05.97
A:\)

33-16

Using the Network With MS-DOS

11111

PERMIT
PERMIT is an external command that lets you use your workstation as a
single-session, single-connection file server. The PERMIT command waits for
the other workstation to create the connection. After the connection is made,
no other workstations can connect to the server. The session is terminated
when the connected workstation executes a NET USE command with the jD
qualifier, or when you press CtrljC twice on the server workstation.
You cannot use a password with the alias. You can, however, restrict access
to a particular workstation.
The network must be started before you use the PERMIT command.
Both workstation nodes must be defined in each other's network definition
file. To add a node, see your system administrator.
The permit command format is:
PERMIT alias=drv:path [lpermissionsj node name I •
Where:
alias

Is a name representing the complete path name of the shared
directory.

dry:

Is the drive for the existing directory offered to the network.

path

Is the path name for the existing directory offered to the network.

jpermissions

Controls the user's ability to modify or create files in the
directory.
jR lets the user read and copy files in the directory.
jRW lets the user read, copy, and change (write to) files
in the directory.
jRWC lets the user read, copy, change, and create files in the
directory. This is the default.

nodename

Is the DEC net node name of the workstation on the network
with which you exclUSively want to share your disk or
directory.
Specifies that any single workstation can share your disk or
directory.

33-17

IIIII Using the Network With MS-DOS
For example, to offer read access in the directory named A:\TOOLS to the
DECnet node named BUBBLE, type:
A:\)PERMIT TDDL=A:\TOOLS IR BUBBLE (Return )
To offer file creation access in the directory named A:\ TOOLS to any DECnet
node, type:
A:\)PERMIT TOOL=A:\TOOLS

33-18

Ie * (Return )

Chapter 34
Using Network
File Transfer (NFT)

This chapter describes the Network File Transfer (NFl') utility, a network
program that enables you to access local and remote files. After you install
the DECnet-VAXmate software, you can use NFT to:
• Append two or more files
• Copy files between the local and remote nodes
• Delete local and remote files
• List files located on a local or remote directory
• Define and display access control information
• Run batch files on remote nodes
• Display the contents of a local or remote file
• Print files on remote printers
This chapter tells you how to:
• Run NFT
• Specify access control information
• Specify remote files
• Identify types of files and systems
• Use NFT commands
NOTE

You have to execute NET START RDR before you can use NFT.

34-1

11111 Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

Running NFT
You perform NFl' functions by entering:
• A single command
• A batch file that contains Nfl commands
• Multiple commands
To enter a single command, type:
C:\)NFT command(Return)

C: \)

To enter a batch file, type:
C: \) NFT f i 1 e. ex t ( Return )

C:\)

When you run Nfl in batch mode, you receive an error-level value of 0 to
indicate success and of 1 to indicate failure.
To enter multiple commands, type:
C: \) NFT (Return )
NFT) command ( Return)
NFT) command ( Return)

HFT) EX I T ( Return)
C:\)

The EXIT command exits you from Nfl.

34-2

Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

IIIII

Using Access Control Information
Access control information is security information that enables you to access
a specified remote node with the privileges of a specific user.

Format for Access Control Information
Access control information includes:
Username

A character string, consisting of 1 to 39 alphabetic characters,
that identifies the user at the remote node.

Password

A character string, consisting of 1 to 39 alphabetic characters,
that identifies the user's password.

Account

A character string, consisting of 1 to 39 alphanumeric characters,
that identifies the user's account.

The node name or node address (area. number) is followed by the username,
password, and account, enclosed in quotation marks ("). The entire string
ends with a double colon (::).
For example, to provide the node LONDON with access control information,
type:
LONDON"SMITH OPEN"::

Storing Default Access Control Information
You can store access control information for as many as ten nodes. To store
access control information, you specify a remote node with:
• Any NFT command
• The SET command
After you store access control information in an NFT session, you do not need
to specify it with the commands that follow for that session. This stored
information is the default access control information.
The default access control information is not saved when you exit from NFT.
Therefore, you cannot use default access control information specified for a
previous NFT session.

34-3

11111 Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

NOTE

You can also specify default access control information with NCP
(see the VAXmate System Administrator's Guide). You can use
default access control information stored with NCP for more than
one NFT session. To override these defaults, use new access
control information for the NFT commands.
When you use only a node name with a command, NFT determines the
default access control information by following this procedure:
1. NFT checks if you specified the access control information earlier in the
same NFT session.
2. If you did not specify any access control information in the same session, NFT checks if you specified it with NCP.
3. If you did not specify access control information with NCP or the same
NFT session, NFT assumes that the remote node does not require the
information and attempts the current operation.

Changing Default Access Control Information
You can change the default access control information by using different
access control information for the same node name in an NFT operation. NFT
replaces the original access control information in its temporary table with
the new information.
You can also change the access control information with the SET command.
In this case, you can only replace the information in the NFT table by using
another SET command.
To display the current access control information, use the SHOW command.

34-4

Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

IIIII

Specifying Remote Files
DECnet-VAXmate can copy files to and from nodes running different operating systems. Table 34-1 lists the file specifications that you can use with
different operating systems.
Table 34-1 Operating Systems and File Specifications
Operating System

File Specification

VAX/VMS

dev:[directory]filename.ext;ver

TOPS·20

dey: [directory]filename. ext;ver

TOPS·10

dev:[directory]filename.ext

RSX

dev:[DIRECTORY]filename.ext;ver

P/OS

dev:[DlRECTORY]filename.ext;ver

MS-DOS

dev:dir\dir\. .. \filename.ext

ULTRIX·32

dirI dirI ...jfilename .ext

RSTS/E

dev:[DlRECTORY]filename.ext

NOTE
Most systems accept square brackets [ 1or angle brackets < > to
delimit a directory name, and a period ( . ) or a semicolon ( ; ) to
delimit a version. NFT accepts all of these delimiters.

If any field of the file specification is omitted, NFT assumes the default. File
specifications of any other format are foreign to NFT.
When you type a foreign file specification, you must enclose it in quotation
marks. For example, to copy the RSTSjE file from the remote node BOSTON
to the local node, type:
liFT> COPY BOSTON:: "DK2: [ 1 0 0 , 1 0 0 1 NAMES. DAT" Of~rn )

34-5

11111

Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

Identifying Types of Files and Systems
Files can have different data types that are used in different systems. Accessing a remote file with a specific data type or system can change its data.
This section describes the possible data types and systems for a remote file
and how this information can change when the file is accessed in NFT.
Files can be one of two data types:
• Binary
A binary (image) file contains data that is copied without interpretation
or changes to the data. In other words, the file is copied and received
as a carbon copy of itself. The most common example of this type of
file is an executable file.
• ASCII
An ASCII file has records that end with a carriage return and a line feed
<CR><LF>.

Systems can be one of two types:
• Stream
With a stream system, a file is a series of continuous characters.
Most stream systems, including the MS-DOS operating system, do not
support attributes such as fixed or'variable length records. If a file with
these attributes is copied to the local system, the attributes are lost.
• Nonstream
With a nonstream system, the data in a file is in a specific record format. Examples of nonstream systems are fixed length, variable length,
and variable with fixed length control (VFC).
Fixed length records have the same size. The size is determined when
you create the file, and you cannot change it.
Variable length records can have different lengths, to a maximum size
that you specify. The maximum size is determined when you create the
file, and you cannot change it.
VFC records include a fixed length control field that precedes the variable length data. This format enables you to add data that labels the
contents of the variable length portion of the record.

34-6

Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

IIIII

Table 34.2 describes the changes to the data types and system types when
you copy or append a file from a remote node.
Table 34·2

Copying or Appending Files From a Remote Node

Data
Type

System Type

Record Attributes

Binary

Not applicable

Ignored

It is stored as it is received from the remote
node.

ASCII

Stream

Ignored

It is stored as it is received from the remote
node; however, a carriage
control is embedded.

ASCII

Nonstream

Other than implied <CR>
<LF>, PRN (print file carriage return), or FrN
(FORTRAN carriage
return)

It is stored as it is received from the remote
node.

ASCII

Nonstream

Implied <CR> <LF>

A <tR> <LF> is added to
each record.

ASCII

Nonstream

PRN or FTN

Data is converted
correctly.

How the Copied File Is
Stored

NFT converts embedded carriage control characters by default. To cancel this
conversion, specify the /NOCONVERT qualifier.
Although NFT can usually determine whether a file is ASCII, you should use
the COPY/IMAGE command to copy a non·ASCII file to a remote node.

34·7

IIIII Using Network File Transfer (NFT)
Table 34-3 describes the changes that occur when you copy or append a file
to a remote node.
Table 34-3

Copying or Appending Files to a Remote Node

Data
Type

System Type

Record Attributes

How the File Is Sent

ASCII

Stream

None

The file remains unchanged. Its records are
determined by the number of line feeds.

ASCII

Nonstream

Variable, implied
<CR> <LF>

The carriage return and
line feed are dropped. Its
records are determined by
the number of line feeds.

Binary

Stream

None

The file remains
unchanged.

Binary

Nonstream

Fixed: 128 bytes

The file remains
unchanged.

Using NFT Commands
NFT provides commands that enable you to manipulate files located on local
and remote nodes. The following sections discuss NFT command conventions, then describe the NFT commands in alphabetical order. Each command
description includes the following information:
• Purpose
• Format
• Comments
• Examples

34-8

Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

IIIII

Command Conventions
The following conventions apply to NFT commands:
• A file specification can be local or remote.
• You can abbreviate every command and qualifier as long as it is unique
to NFT.
• You can continue a command line on more than one line by pressing
the <LF> key.
A space must separate the last word on the first line from the first word
on the second line; you can enter the space immediately before or after
the <LF> key.
• If you type an incomplete command line, the command prompts you for

the needed information.
• If you type a valid qualifier that does not affect certain commands, NFT

does not display a message. However, if you type a qualifier that NFT
does not accept, NFT displays a message.
• You can use the following wildcards to specify file names: the question
mark (?), the percent sign (%), and the asterisk (').
See the individual Comments sections for those commands that do not
accept wildcards.

34-9

IIIII Using Network File Transfer (NFT)
Table of Commands
Table 34-4 lists and briefly describes each NFT command. Use this table as a
quick reference once you become familiar with the NFT commands.
Table 34-4 Valid NFT Commands
Command

Function

APPEND

Appends files from the local node to an existing file on the remote
node, or copies and appends files from the remote node to an existing file on the local node.

COpy

Copies files from the local node to the remote node or from the
remote node to the local node.

DELETE

Deletes a local or remote file.

DIRECTORY

Purpose
To list local or remote file names, including the size (in blocks) and the
time and date the file was last modified or created, use the DIRECTORY
command.

Format
DIRECTORY[/qualifier] [file]
Where:
/qualifier

file

Is a valid DIRECTORY qualifier.
/BRIEF

Displays only the name of one or more files.

/FULL

Displays complete file information for one or more
files. The information for each file includes: file name;
file size; file owner; date and time the file was last
modified or created; the type of file organization,
record format, and record attributes; and the file
protection.

Is any valid local or remote file specification. If you omit the
filespecification, NFl' assumes the local disk and the current default directory.

Comments
If you type the DIRECTORY/FULL command for a file on a remote node, all

the information for the directory is displayed.
If you type the DIRECTORY/FULL command for a file on a local node, only

the size of the file and the time and date the file was last modified or created
is displayed.
If a file name contains more than 19 characters, NFl' truncates the name to

eight characters in the directory listing.

34-21

IIIII DIRECTORY
Example 1

To display the file name TAX.LST;4 on node LONDON, type:
NFT) DIRECTORY LONDON: :TAX.LST;4(Relurn)
Directory of: LONDON"SMITH
TAX.LST;4

pa~5word"::SYSSSYSROOT:[SMITH]

09-JUL-85

12:30:52

Example 2

To display complete information for the file REPORT.DAT on the remote
node LONDON, type:
NFT) DI RECTORY /FULL LONDON:: REPORT. DAT; 4 ( Return)
Directory of: LONDON"SMITH password"::SYSSSYSROOT:[SMITH]
REPORT.DAT;4
Size:
8/9
Owner: [910,20]
Created:
22-MAR-85 15:38:36
File organization:
Sequential
Record Format: Variable length, maximum 128 bytes
Record Attributes:
Carriage return carriage control
File protection:
System: RWED, Owner:RWED, Group:RW, World:R
Example 3

To list briefly all the file names on the node LONDON, type:
NFT) DIRECTORY/BRIEF LONDON:: (Return)
Directory of: LONDON"SMITH password"::SYSSSYSROOT:[SMITHl
APNDXA.DOC;3
NEWS.DOC;10
TEXT .DOC;8

34·22

CHAP1.DOC;2
MEMO.TXT;1

CHAP2.DOC;13
TEST2.TST;6

DATA.DAT;9
TEST3.TST;2

EXIT

IIIII

EXIT
Purpose
To exit from an NFT operation and return control to the MS·DOS operating
system, use the EXIT command.

Format
EXIT

Comments
In addition to using the EXIT command, you can press CtrljZ to exit from
NFT.

Example
To exit from the NFT utility, type:
NFT> EX IT (Return )

34·23

11111 HELP

HELP

Purpose
To display information about NFT commands and qualifiers, use the HELP
command.

Format
HELP [/qualifier] command
Where:
command

Is any valid NFT command verb.

qualifier

Is any qualifier acceptable to NFT commands.

Example 1
To display a summary of all NFT commands, type:
NFT> HELP ( Return )

Example 2
To display a summary of the SHOW command, type:
NFT> HELP SHOW c::fu'lurn )

Example 3
To display a summary of the effects of the /ASCII qualifier, type:
NFT> HELP lASe I I (Return )

34-24

PRINT 11111

PRINT
Purpose
To queue a remote file to a remote printer, use the PRINT command. The
remote printer is the system's default printer.

Format
PRINT[/qualifierj file
Where:
/qualifier

file

Is a valid PRINT qualifier.
/DELETE

Deletes the file from the remote node after the file is
printed.

/NOLOG

Disables printing a notification line when the PRINT
command is executed.

Is any valid remote file specification.

Comments
You cannot print files using wildcards, and you cannot print a list of files.

Example 1
To print the file TAX.LST;3 on the remote VMS node LONDON to the default
system printer for LONDON, type:
tiFT) PRINT LONDON: :TA.lLLST;3(Retll,")

Example 2
To print the file CHAPTERl.MEM, located on the remote node ROME, to the
default system printer for ROME, type:
tiFT) PR I NT ROME:: CHAPTER 1. MEM ~

34-25

11111 SET

SET

Purpose
To set default access control information and disk and directory information,
use the SET command. You can set default information for a maximum of ten
nodes.

Format
SET node::[fileJ
Where:
node

Is a remote node name.

file

Is the file specification. It includes disk and directory information
for the remote node; it does not include the file name and version
number.

Example 1

To set default access control information for the node LONDON, the disk
SYS$USER-DlSK, and the subdirectory USER.FILES, type:
NFT> SET LONDON"SMITH OPEN": :SVS$USER_DISK: [USER.FILES] (Return)

Example 2

To set default access control information for the node PARIS, the username
JONES, and the password NEW, type:
NFT> SET PAR I S"JONES NEW":: ( Return )

34-26

SHOW

IIIII

SHOW
Purpose
To display the temporary default table of remote access control information,
use the SHOW command.

Format
SHOW [node::]
Where:
node:: Is a valid remote node name.
If you do not specify a node name, NFT displays the contents of the
access control information table for all nodes in the NFT temporary
default table.

Comments
If NFT does not find the specified node name in the table, it checks to see if
you used NCP to define the default remote access control information.

Example 1
To display the contents of the access control information table for all nodes
known to NFT, type:
/'1FT> SHOW~

Example 2
To display the access control information for the node LONDON, type:
/'1FT> SHOW LONDON:: (§turn )

34·27

11111 SUBMIT

SUBMIT
Purpose
To request that a command file run on a remote node, use the SUBMIT command. The specified remote node must support command file submission and
execution.

Format
SUBMIT[/NOLOG] file
Where:
/NOLOG

Disables printing a notification line when the SUBMIT command
is executed.

file

Is the remote file specification.

Comments
Command files contain one or more commands that are recognized and run
by the remote node's operating system. Therefore, the commands must conform to the standards of the remote system.
The remote file specification has two formats. In its longest form, it consists
of node and access control information, followed by a file specification
required by the remote node.
In its shortest form, the file specification consists of a node name, followed
by a file specification appropriate to the remote node.
You cannot submit files using wildcards, and you cannot submit a list of
files.

Example
To submit the command file BACKUP.COM to run on the remote node PARIS,
type:
!'1FT> SUBM I T PAR IS: : BACKUP COM '-"'-"=_J
0

34-28

TYPE

IIIII

TYPE

Purpose
To display the contents of a local or remote file, use the TYPE command.
You should use this command only for ASCII files.

Format
TYPE file [, file ][, ... ]
Where:
file

Is any valid local or remote file specification.

Comments
You can type one to ten input files. The input files must be separated by
commas, and the first input file sets default attributes for the following input
files.

Example
To display the contents of the file PREFACE.DOC, located on the remote
node LONDON, type:
NFT> TYPE LONDON:: PREFACE. DOG '-:':~''''''...J

34-29

Chapter 35
Connecting to a
Remote Host With
SETHOST

This chapter describes:
• Using the SETHOST utility with network virtual terminal services
• Using the SETHOST command
• Using the SETHOST menu
• Using Your Workstation as a VTI02 Terminal
• Editing text during a remote session
• Exiting from SETHOST
NOTE

You have to execute NET START LAT or NET START RDR before
you can use SETHOST.

Using SETHOST
The SETHOST utility connects your system to a host node, enabling the system to emulate a terminal connected to the host node.
When your workstation emulates a host terminal, you can perform standard
terminal functions, access resources, and access the DEC Multinational Character Set as if the workstation is a terminal directly connected to the host
node.
Each time you log onto a host node, SETHOST creates a connection called a
session. With SETHOST, you can create and maintain multiple sessions. The
maximum number of sessions depends on:
• The maximum number of network links you have established with the
DEFINE EXECUTOR MAXIMUM LINKS command.

35-1

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
For more information about this command, see the VAXmate System
Administrator's Guide.
• The number of links that are currently active for the virtual disk or the
virtual printer.
You can create a session by either of the following protocols:
• LAT
LAT is a local area transport protocol that communicates over the
Ethernet only. LAT supports TDMS (Terminal Data Management System)
applications. It can only be used for single sessions .
• CTERM
CTERM is a wide area virtual terminal protocol that communicates over
both the Ethernet and asynchronous DDCMP (Digital Data Communications Message Protocol); it lets you access the entire DECnet network.
CTERM does not support TDMS applications. It can be used for multiple
sessions.
When you create a session, SETHOST determines whether LAT is available. If
it is available, SETHOST attempts to connect your node to a LAT line. This is
the default.
If LAT is not available, SETHOST attempts to connect your node using

CTERM. To select CTERM without trying LAT, use the SETHOST ICTERM
command.
The first time you run SETHOST from an IBM workstation, it prompts you
for the type of keyboard you are using. The SETHOST utility saves this information in a file in the \DECNET directory.
To use SETHOST, the host node must support terminal emulation from
remote nodes and run Phase IV of the DECnet software on one of the following operating systems:
• VAX/VMS, Version 4.0 or later
• RSX-IIM-PLUS, Version 3.0 or later
• RSX-IIM, Version 4.2 or later
• Micro-RSX, Version 3.0 or later
• TOPS-I0, Version 7.03 or later
• TOPS-20, Version 6.1 or later
• ULTRIX-32, Version 1.1 or later

35-2

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

Using the SETHOST Command
To create, record, and modify your remote sessions, use the SETHOST command. You can specify parameters and qualifiers in the command line or at
the SETHOST prompt. When you specify parameters and qualifiers in the
command line, you must separate each with a space.

Format
SETHOST {nodellatname} [jquaIifierj
Where:
node

Specifies the DECnet node name or DECnet node number for
establishing a remote CTERM session.
Node can also include access control information, such as
the user's password or account. The format for access control
information is [jUSERjPASSWORDjACCOUNTj. Access control
information is only used by ULTRIX hosts.

latname

Specifies the LAT service name for establishing a remote LAT
session.
LAT service names are defined by accumulation over time by
the LAT driver or by the following NCP command:
NCP SET NODE address NAME name LAT
For more information about NCP, see the VAXmate System
Administrator's Guide.
If the LAT service name you specify with SETHOST is not
known by the driver, or if you have not set it with the NCP
SET command, the LAT connection can fail.

35-3

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
jqualifier

Is a valid SETHOST qualifier.
jABORT=n

jSAVEDEFAULT

jCTERM

jSERVICE

jEDIT=mode

jSESSION=n

jEXIT

jSETUP

jHELP=topic

jSHOW

jKEYBOARD

jSWITCH

jLOG=filename

jTAKE=filename

The jEDIT, jSAVEDEFAULT, jSESSION and jSHOW qualifiers
are used with CTERM only.
These qualifiers are described individually in the following
sections.
The following sections describe the SETHOST qualifiers in more detail.

35-4

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

/ABORT
To abort a session, use the /ABORT qualifier. You can abort a single session
or all sessions. To view the current sessions, use the SETHOST /SHOW
command.
Format
/ ABORT={nlALL}
Where:
n

Is the specific session number you want to abort.

ALL

Aborts all the current sessions.

Comments
You can abort the current session or a session that was saved previously. If
you abort the current session, it is deleted, your link disconnects, and
SETHOST exits.
Example
To abort session number 3, leaving all other sessions intact, type:
SETHOST IABORT=3 ~

35-5

11111

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

/CTERM
To use CTERM protocol for the current connection, use the jCTERM qualifier. It overrides the default, which attempts to use LAT protocol first. If the
LAT is unavailable or if the LAT attempt fails, CTERM completes the connection. Only CTERM supports multiple sessions.
Format

jCTERM
Example

To connect to the remote session THRUSH using the CTERM protocol, type:
SETHOST THRUSH

ICTERM~

/EDIT
To control the type of command line editing you can perform during your
remote session, use the JED IT qualifier. This qualifier only applies to CTERM
hosts or sessions that support command line editing.
Format

jEDlT=mode
Where:
mode

35-6

Is one of the three modes you can use for editing a command line.
OVERSTRIKE

Inserts the new character to replace the character at
the current cursor position.

INSERT

Inserts the new character to the left of the character
at the current cursor position.

NONE

Turns off command line editing.

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

Comments
You can toggle between INSERT and OVERSTRIKE (within a single command
line) by pressing CtrljA.
The default mode is OVERSTRIKE unless you change it with the jEDIT qualifier, or if it is a saved default (see the jSAVEDEFAULT qualifier for more
information). The default editing mode is reset at the beginning of each line.

Example
To change the editing mode to INSERT, type:
SETHOST

ED IT" INSERT ~~

/EXIT
To exit from SETHOST, use the jEXIT qualifier. You enter this qualifier after
you type the SETHOST command.

Format
jEXIT

Example
To start SETHOST, request help for NODESPEC, then exit from SETHOST,
type:

SETHOST>

~i'I

SETHOST> lEX IT (Rei"," )

35-7

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
/HELP
To display the main help text screen for SETHOST, use the jHElP qualifier.
You can also get help on specific topics.

Format
jHElP=topic
Where:
topic

Is one of the specific SETHOST options for which you can view help
text. The SETHOST help topics are:
nodespec

jSESSION

jTAKE

jlOG

jHElP

jSAVEDEFAUlT

jSHOW

jEDIT

jABORT

jEXIT

jCTERM

jKEYBOARD

jSWITCH

jSERVICE

jSETUP

context-switching

syntax

changing-default-line-editing-mode

Example
To display help text for the syntax of the SETHOST qualifiers, type:

SETHOST IHELP=syntax

35-8

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST 11111

/KEYBOARD
To change the default keyboard, use the /KEYBOARD qualifier.

Format
/KEYBOARD

Comments
The first time you run SETHOST from an IBM workstation, it prompts you for
the type of keyboard you are using. To change your keyboard type at a later
date, use the /KEYBOARD qualifier to display the SETHOST keyboard menu.
You can select your keyboard type from the menu.
The \DECNET directory contains keyboard files that show the position of the
DIGITAL keys on each keyboard. These files have the files extension .HLP.

Example
To start a SETHOST session and request a change of keyboard type, type:
SETHOST IKEYBOARD (Return )

/LOG

To record the terminal session in a log file, use the /LOG qualifier.

Format
/LOG[=filename]
Where:
filename

Is the name of the file for recording your session. You can specify a maximum of 8 characters for the name and 3 characters for
the file extension. The default file name is SESSION.LOG.

Example
To specify SESSION4.LOG as the file for recording the session, type:
SETHOST

/LOG=SESSION4.LOG~

35-9

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
/SAVEDEFAULT
To save the jEDIT or jCTERM qualifier settings as the default for all future
sessions, use the jSAVEDEFAULT qualifier. If you specify this qualifier and do
not specify any editing qualifiers to be saved, the command has no effect.
When you specify jSAVEDEFAULT, SETHOST places your specified qualifier
settings in a file called SETHOST.DEF in the DECnet directory. SETHOST
reads this file whenever you start SETHOST.

Format
jSAVEDEFAULT [/EDIT] [/CTERM]

Example
To save the edit mode INSERT as the default in the SETHOST.DEF file, type:

SETHOST IEDIT=INSERT

ISAVEDEFAULT~

/SERVICE
To display the workstation's LAT driver service-name table, use the jSERVICE
qualifier.

Format
jSERVICE

Comments
The IAT driver service name table lists the services that are available to the
IAT. To connect to any of the services, use the LAT protocol and the
SETHOST command with the latname parameter.

Example
To display the LAT driver service name table, type:

SETHOST I SERV I CE ( Return )

35-10

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

/SESSION
To specify the session number so you can reconnect to a host computer, use
the /SESSION qualifier.

Format
/SESSION=n
Where:

Is the session number you use to reconnect to the host computer.

Comments
Use the /SESSION qualifier only when you used the /CTERM qualifier to
connect to the host computer.
You can use the /SHOW qualifier to find which multiple sessions are available. You can use the /SESSIONS qualifier to reconnect to a particular session.

Example
To reconnect to session number 2, type.
SETHOST/SESSION=2(Return )

35-11

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
/SETUP
To start the Set-Up utility, use the /SETUP qualifier.

Format
/SETUP

Comments
Use the arrow keys to move among options in the Set-Up utility menu. Press
the Return key or the Enter key to select the option you want.
To select character sets, use the General menu.
To save the new default values, select the Save Parameters command from the
Action menu.

Example
To start the Set-Up utility for a SETHOST session, type:
SETHOST /SETUP ( Return )

35-12

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST 11111

jSHOW
To list the current sessions and the hosts that connect them to your node, use
the /SHOW qualifier. This qualifier only works if you are connected to the
host with CTERM.
Format

/SHOW
Example

To display the current sessions on the hosts CLOUD and SUN, type:
SETHOST ISHOW ~

Session

Host
CLOUD

SUN

jSWITCH
To set the character you use to access the SETHOST menu, use the /SWITCH
qualifier. The default is Ctrl/4. Use the /SWITCH qualifier if you want to
change the default.
Format

/SWITCH=n
Where:
n

Is the ASCII decimal character (1-26) to which you want to
change the first character. ASCII character 1 is equivalent to A;
character 2 is equivalent to B, and so on.

Example

The following command changes the default for accessing the SETHOST
menu, Ctrl/4, to Ctrl B:
SETHOST ISWITCH=2 ~

35-13

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
/TAKE
To send text from a local file to the remote node as if you typed it at the
remote node's keyboard, use the jTAKE qualifier.
You must leave a space after the name of the remote node.
NOTE

Some remote systems or services may not be able to process more
than one line of text correctly.
Format
jTAKE[=filename1
Where:
filename

Is the name of the file containing the text you want to send to
the remote node. The default file name is SESSION.BAT.

Example
To take text from the file SESSCOM.BAT and send it to node WINTER, type:
SETHOST WINTER ITAKE=SESSCOM.BAT(Relurn)

35-14

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

Using the SETHOST Menu
The SETHOST menu is displayed when you interrupt a session by pressing
Ctrl/4. The SETHOST menu lists various options for recording or changing your
remote session.
The following example illustrates a sample SETHOST menu.
Ctrl/4 <Return>
<Return> to exit 5ETH05T
<H>elp
<L>og session
off
<R>econnect to session 1
<E>diting mode is overstrike
<5>ession
<A>bort session
<N>ew session
Command:
$

The angle brackets indicate the key or letter you need to press to request one
of the menu functions. Type only the first letter of the command you want to
specify. You do not need to press the Return key after you enter the letter.
The Editing mode option applies only to CTERM hosts or sessions that support command line editing.
The following sections describe each of the menu options in more detail.

Return Option
When using CTERM, to save the current session and exit from SETHOST, use
the Return key. To return to the current session or re-establish a previous
session, type SETHOST and the appropriate session number. For example, to
reestablish session number 2, type:
C:>5ETH05T 15E55ION=2

When you are using LAT, the Return key disconnects you from the host and
does not save the session.

35-15

11111

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

Logging off the remote host does not save the current session.
To see the saved sessions, type SETHOST and press the Return key. The system displays a listing of available session numbers, as well as the host system
to which they are connected.

(H)elp Option
To display the help text for the SETHOST menu, use the Help option.

(L)og Option
The Log option records your entire session in a file. Pressing the L key toggles the Log option between ON and OFF. If the menu displays "Log session
off" and you press the L key, SETHOST changes logging to ON and prompts
you for the file name for recording the session. The default file name is
SESSION.LOG.
When you redisplay the SETHOST menu, the Log option displays "Log session
on" with the specified file name.
If the menu displays "Log session on
filename" and you press the L key,
SETHOST changes logging to OFF and closes the log file. When you redisplay
the SETHOST menu, the Log option displays "Log session off".

(R)econnect Option
The Reconnect option exits from the SETHOST menu and returns you to the
current session, indicated in the menu. In the preceding menu example, the
session number is 1.

(E)dit Option
The Edit option changes the default mode for command line editing. This
option only applies to CTERM hosts or sessions that support command line
editing.

35-16

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

When you select the Edit option, SETHOST displays a submenu with options.
Table 35-1 describes the Edit submenu options.
Table 35-1

Options for the Edit Submenu

Submenu Option

Description

OVERSTRIKE

Inserts the new character to replace the character at the
current cursor position

INSERT

Inserts the new character to the left of the character at the
current cursor position

NONE

Turns off command line editing

(S)ession Option
The Session option connects you to another session that you have previously
saved. This option only applies to CTERM hosts or systems that support multiple sessions.
When you select this option, SETHOST displays a list of the available sessions. You are prompted for the session number to which you want to
connect.

(A)bort Session Option
The Abort Session option aborts a single session. You can abort the current
session or a session that you previously saved.
When you select this option, SETHOST prompts you for the number of the
session to be aborted. If you abort the current session, indicated by
"<R>econnect to session n", it is deleted, your link is disconnected, and
SETHOST exits.

(N)ew Session Option
The New Session option begins a new session. When you select this option,
you are prompted for a node name or a IAT service name for starting the
next session.

35-17

11111

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

Using Your Workstation as a VTI02 Terminal
The SETHOST Set·Up utility enables your workstation to emulate a VTI02
terminal. Some of the features that you can set are:
• Cursor style (block or underline)
• Screen background (dark or light)
• Automatic repeating of keyboard keys
We recommend that you do not change the settings for terminal features
unless you are familiar with DECnet concepts. If you are not familiar with
these concepts, contact your system administrator.

Entering Set-Up Mode
Before you can enter Set·Up mode, your workstation must be connected to a
host computer.
To enter Set·Up mode, press the F3 key. Your workstation displays the first
Set·Up screen, which is the Set·Up Directory. This directory has five major
headings, each representing a function.
Each major heading includes Set·Up menus for changing parameters that con·
trol how your terminal is set. The major headings and their corresponding
Set·Up menus are:
Set· Up Directory
Action
Display
General
Screen
Exit

Action Set·Up
Main Directory
Clear Display
Factory Parameters
Save Parameters
Recall Parameters

35·18

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

Display Set- Up
Main Directory
No/Auto Wrap
Dark Text, Light Screen/Light Text, Dark Screen
No/Text Cursor
Block Cursor Style/Underline Cursor

General Set- Up
Main Directory
VT52 Mode/VT100 Mode
Return = CR/Return = CR/LF
Numeric Keypad/Application Keypad
Normal Cursor Keys/Application Cursor Keys
NOTE

The numeric keypad causes the auxiliary keypad to transmit ASCII
character codes that correspond to the numeric characters on the
key.
The application keypad causes the auxiliary keypad to transmit
control codes used by an application program.
The normal cursor keys transmit ANSI cursor control sequences
(up, down, left, and right).
The application cursor keys transmit application program control
functions.
Screen Set- Up
Main Directory
Color enabled/black/white
Screen foreground color
Screen background color
Pulldown foreground color
Pulldown background color

When using the Screen Set-Up menu, you can only set the "Color
black/white" parameter for your workstation.

35-19

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
Selecting a Set-Up Menu
The Set-Up menus are listed as parameters in the Set-Up directory. To select a
Set-Up menu, use the arrow keys to move to the specific menu. When you
select a menu, it is displayed in reverse video. To invoke that menu, press
the Enter key.
To select a parameter from the selected Set-Up menu, use the arrow keys.
When you select a parameter, it is displayed in reverse video. To change the
parameter's value or to perform its function, press the Enter key.
For example, to select a block cursor style:
1. Press the F3 key to invoke the Set-Up directory.
2. Select the Display parameter by pressing the right arrow key. The
parameter is displayed in reverse video.
3. Press the Enter key to move to the Display Set-Up menu.
4. Press the appropriate arrow keys to move to the block cursor style
parameter.
'). Press the Enter key to change this value.
The selected value is displayed in reverse video.
6. Press the F3 key to exit from the Set-Up directory.

Saving Set-Up Values
To save the parameter settings that you selected in Set-Up mode, select the
Save Parameters option from the Action Set-Up menu. This option places the
current parameters in the DEenet directory in a file called VT102.DAT.
By storing the parameters in this file, SETHOST can restore saved parameters
when it runs from any directory.

35-20

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

IIIII

Using Set-Up Values
If you do not save parameters after you change them, your workstation uses
the new values until you:
• Change the Set-Up features again
• Exit from SETHOST or turn your workstation off
• Recall the original features by selecting the Factory Parameters from the
Action Set-Up menu
• Run an application that changes the features

Recalling Set-Up Values
If you save parameters, they are automatically read when you run the
SETHOST utility. To recall the values you previously stored in the
VTI02.DAT file in the DEC net directory, select the Recall Parameters Set-Up
menu.

Exiting From Set-Up Mode
To exit from Set-Up mode, press the F3 key or select the Exit parameter from
the Set-Up menu.

35-21

IIIII Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST
Editing Text During a Remote Session
You can edit text that is typed on the current line during a remote session
with one of the following methods:
• Press either the Word Char key or the backspace key to delete the last
character you typed.
• Press CtrljW to delete the last word you typed.
You can press CtrljW as long as this sequence is not required by the
program you are running.
• Press CtrljU to delete the line you are typing.
You can press CtrljU provided this sequence is not required by the
program you are running.
The remote host may provide other special characters for editing text.

Disconnecting From a Host
To disconnect from the host and break the logical link connection, either:
• Log off using the standard log-off procedure established for that operating system. This procedure also exits from the SETHOST utility.
For example, to log off the VAX host, type:
$

LOGOUT

(Return)

• Press Ctrlj4 ( Return) ( Return) . You exit from SETHOST, but you save the
session and retain a link to the host.
If you then press the A key, the session is deleted, and the link to the

host is disconnected.
If the session is the current session (or if you only have one session

established), you also exit from SETHOST.

35-22

Chapter 36
MS-DOS Editing
and Function Keys

This chapter discusses:
• MS-DOS editing keys
• MS-DOS control characters
• Industry standard compose sequences

MS-DOS Editing Keys
The MS-DOS operating system editing keys enable you to:
• Repeat a command line instantly
• Edit and execute a command line with a minimum of typing
When you type a command on the command line and press the Return key,
the command line is sent to the command processor for execution. A copy of
the command line is also sent to a template, which is a special storage area.
Table 36-1 lists the MS-DOS operating system editing keys you can use to edit
or repeat the command line.
Table 36-1

MS-DOS Editing Keys

Key

Editing Function

CID

Copies one character from the template to the command line.

@) Character

Copies characters up to the specified character in the template
and puts these characters on the command line.
Copies all remaining characters in the template to the command line.

36-1

IIIII

MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys

Table 36-1

MS-DOS Editing Keys (cont.)

Key

Editing Function

(]![)

Skips over (does not copy) a character in the template.

CfD Character

Skips over (does not copy) the characters in the template up to
the specified character.
Enters/exits insert mode.
Makes the new line the new template.

Example 1
To display information about the file PROG.COM, type:
A:\)DIR PROG.COM(Reiurn)

The command line (DIR PROG.COM) is saved in the template. To repeat the
command, press:

When you press the F3 key, the contents of the template are copied to the
command line. When you press the Return key, the command line is sent to
the command processor for execution.

Example 2
To display information about a file named PROG.ASM, use the contents of the
template from Example 1 and press:

This copies all characters from the template to the command line, up to, but
not including, C. The MS-DOS operating system displays:
A:\)DIR PROG.

Now type:
ASM

36-2

MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys

11111

The result is:
A:\>DIR PROG.ASM

The command line DIR PROG.ASM is now in the template and ready to be
sent to the command processor for execution. To execute the command,
press:

To cancel the command, press:

Control Character Functions
A control character function affects the command line. Table 36-2 contains
control character functions.
Table 36-2
Control
Character

Control Character Functions
Function
Stops the current command.
Removes the last character from the command line, and erases the
character from the screen.
Sends output from the workstation to a local printer only. If you
press ~ again, no more output is sent to the printer.
Suspends the display of output on the screen. Press any key to continue.

(]@D

Cancels the current command line.

( Ct,I/W )

Removes the last word from the current line and from the screen.

@ill[)

Inserts an end-of-file character into the new template.

36-3

IIIII MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys
The Prt Sc Key
You can use the Shift and the Prt Sc keys together to print an image of the
information displayed on your workstation screen. However, escape
sequences and bolding are not recognized. For example, to print a screen
image of the information displayed on your workstation screen, press:
(Shift/Prt Sc )

Industry Standard Compose Sequences
You can use industry standard compose sequences on your workstation.
Therefore, regardless of the current keyboard map file, you can display the
character at a given location.
To display the character at location 124, press and hold the Alt key and press
the 1, 2, and 4 keys on the numeric keypad. When you release the AIt key,
the character at location 124 is displayed.

36-4

Chapter 37
Batch Processing

This chapter discusses:
• Batch processing
• Batch files with replacement parameters
• The AUTOEXEC.BAT file

What Is Batch Processing?
Batch processing enables you to execute a batch of commands as if you typed
each command separately on the command line. However, because the commands are in a batch file, you only type the batch file name. Therefore, batch
processing saves time and keystrokes.
The REM and PAUSE Commands

You use the REM and PAUSE commands in batch files. The REM command
enables you to include remarks and comments in your batch files. These
remarks are not executed as commands. The PAUSE command prompts you
with an optional message. The PAUSE command also permits you to either
continue or stop the batch process at a given point.

37-1

IIIII

Batch Processing

Batch File Creation
To create a batch file named NEWDISK.BAT that formats and checks a new
diskette:
1. Type:
A:\>COPV CON NEWDISK,BAT(Return)

This statement tells the MS-DOS operating system to copy the
information from the keyboard into the NEWDISK.BAT file.
2. Type:
REM This is a file to check new disks(Return)
REM It i5 named NEWDISK.BAT(Relum)
PAUSE Insert new disk in drive A: (Return:J
FORMAT A: (Return )

D I R A: ( Return )

CHKDSK A: ~

3. Press:

Batch File Execution
Before you execute a batch process using the MS-DOS operating system, read
the following information:
• You only need to type the file name to execute a batch file. If you
include the file extension, the MS-DOS operating system also executes
the batch file.
• If you press Ctrl/C while the batch file is running, the following mes-

sage is displayed:
Terminate batch job (YIN>?

To stop processing the batch file and return to the MS-DOS operating
system prompt, press the Y key.
To continue processing with the next command in the batch file, press
the N key.

37-2

Batch Processing

IIIII

• If you remove the diskette containing a batch file that is being

executed, the MS-DOS operating system prompts you to insert it again
before the next command can be read.
• The last command in a batch file can be the name of another batch file.
This enables you to call one batch file from another when the first is
finished.
• You can redirect output in a batch file using the < and> symbols.
To execute the NEWDISK.BAT file, type:
A:\)NEWDISK~

Each command is executed as if you entered it from the keyboard.

Batch Files With Replacement Parameters
When used in MS-DOS commands, a parameter is an option that you define.
With the MS-DOS operating system, you can create a batch file with replacea.
ble parameters. These parameters, named %0 through %9, can be replaced by
values supplied when the batch file executes.
To create a batch file that deletes your destination file from a previous
append, appends two files together into a third file, and print the destination
file:
1. Type:
A:\)CoPY CON NEWFILE.BAT(Return)

This tells the MS-DOS operating system to copy the information from
the keyboard into the NEWFILE.BAT file.
2. Type:
DEL %3. DOC ( Return )
COPY %1.DoC + %2.DoC
PRINT %3.DOC~

%3.DoC~

3. Press:

37-3

IIIII Batch Processing
The MS-DOS operating system responds with the following messa1ge:
1 File(s) copied

A:\>

The file NEWFILE.BAT, which consists of three commands, now resides on
the disk in the default drive.
The parameters %1 and %2 are replaced sequentially by the parameters you
supply when you execute the file. The parameter %0 is always replaced by
the drive designator, if specified, and the file name of the batch file (for
example, NEWFILE).
You can specify a maximum 10 replacement parameters (%0 through %9).
Each command line, including those generated by replacement characters,
can contain 1 to 128 characters.
NOTE

To use a percent sign in a file name within a batch file, you must
type the percent sign twice.
Executing NEWFILE.BAT

To execute the NEWFILE batch process, type:
A:\>NEWFILE A:MEM01 B:MEM02 B:BIGFILE(Return)

A:MEM01 is substituted for %1, B:MEM02 for %2, and B:BIGFILE for %3.
The result is the same as if you typed:
A:\>DEL B:BIGFILE(Return)
A:\>COPV A:MEM01 + B:MEM02 B:BIGFILE(Return)
A: \ >PR I NT B: B I GF I LE ( Return)

The replacement parameter %0 is always replaced by whatever you type to
invoke the batch file. If you do not refer to the batch file, start your replace·
ment parameters with %1.

37-4

Batch Processing

IIIII

The AUTOEXEC.BAT File
Use an AUTOEXEC.BAT file to execute programs automatically whenever you
start the MS-DOS operating system.
When you start the MS-DOS operating system, the command processor
searches the MS-DOS operating system disk for a file named AUTOEXEC.BAT.
If the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is found, it is executed automatically.
If the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is not found, the date and time prompts are
displayed.
The AUTOEXEC.BAT file must be located in your root directory.
CAUTION

We recommend you do not change your AUTOEXEC.BAT file if you
are using your workstation in a network environment.
Creating an AUTOEXEC.BAT File
To create an AUTOEXEC.BAT file that changes your MS-DOS operating system
prompt, reads the COMMAND.COM file on drive C, and prompts you for the
date and the time,
1. Type:
A: \ >COPV CON AUTOE)(EC. BAT (}leiu!iQ

This statement tells the MS-DOS operating system to copy the
information from the keyboard into the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
2. Type:
PRDMPT

;1;

5,::1 COMSPEC=A: \COMr1AND. COM CRet.:i'--L)
DATE C!!elu!ii)
Tl ME CCI'liz")

3. Press:

37-5

11111 Batch Processing

NOTE
If you use an AUTOEXEC.BAT file, the MS-DOS operating system

does not prompt you for a current date and time unless you
include the DATE and TIME commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
You should include these two commands in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
file, because the MS-DOS operating system uses this information to
keep your directory current.
If your workstation has the optional expansion box containing a

battery, the date and time are set automatically.

37-6

Chapter 38
Redirecting
Input and Output

This chapter discusses:
• Redirecting input and output
• Using filters
• Using pipes
The MS-DOS operating system assumes that input comes from the keyboard
and that output goes to the workstation screen. However, using the less-than
sign «) and the greater-than sign (», you can redirect the flow of command
input and output.
Table 38-1 describes the options for redirecting input and output.
Table 38-1

Options for Redirecting Input and Output

Option

Description

Gets input for a command from a file.

Sends output of a command to a file.

Appends the output from a command to the end of a file.

38-1

11111

Redirecting Input and Output

Redirecting Input
Use the less-than sign «) to send input to a command from a file. For
example, to send a list of names in the file named NAMES.TXT to the SORT
command, type:
A:\)SORT <

NAMES.TXT(Retur~

The SORT command sorts the names in the file named NAMES.TXT and displays the sorted names on the workstation screen.

Redirecting Output
Use the greater-than sign (» to send output from a command to a file. For
example, to send the DIR command output to a file named NEWFILES.TXT,
type:
A:\)DIR) NEWFILES.TXT(Retum)

If the file named NEWFILES.TXT does not exist, the MS-DOS operating system
creates it and stores your directory listing in it.
If the file named NEWFILES.TXT exists, the MS-DOS operating system overwrites the old data with the new data.
You can redirect input to a command and redirect the output to a file. For
example, to sort the names in the file named NAMES.TXT and send the sorted
output to the file named LISTl.TXT, type:
A:\)SDRT

« NAMES.TXT ) LIST1.TXT(Return)

To append information to another file, use two greater-than signs ( » ).
Two greater-than signs tell the MS-DOS operating system to append the output of the command (such as a directory listing) to the end of the specified
file. For example, to append a directory listing to the existing information in
a file named NEWFILES.TXT, type:
A:\) DIR

NEWFILES.TXT([eturn)

If the file named NEWFILES.TXT does not exist, it is created.

38-2

Redirecting Input and Output

IIIII

Filters
A filter is a command that reads input, acts upon it, and then transmits it,
usually to your workstation or to a file. Because filters can be put together in
many different ways, a few filters can take the place of a large number of
specific commands.
The MS-DOS operating system filters are MORE and SORT. The MORE filter
displays output one screen at a time. The SORT filter sorts text.

Pipes
A pipe is a method for using more than one command at a time. For example, you can send the output from one program to another program as input.
A typical case is a program that produces output in columns. You can use a
pipe to sort the output before it is displayed on the screen.
You pipe by separating commands with the pipe separator ( I). For example,
to display an alphabetically sorted listing of your directory, type:
A:\) DIR

I SORT(Return)

The vertical bar causes all output generated by the left side of the bar to be
sent to the right side of the bar for processing.
You can also use piping to send data to a file. For example, to sort a directory listing and send it to a file named DlREC.FIL, type:
A : \) D I R ISO RT ) D IRE C • F I L ( Return:J

To sort a directory listing and send it to a file named DlREC.FIL on drive C,
type:
A : \) D I R ISO RT ) C: D IRE C • F I L ( Return )

A pipe can consist of more than two commands. For example, to sort your
directory, display one screen at a time, and display -MORE- at the bottom of
the screen, type:
A:\) DIR i SORT

MOR E ( Return )

38-3

Chapter 39
DEBUG

This chapter discusses:
• DEBUG program headers
• Information common to all DEBUG commands
• Specific DEBUG commands

DEBUG Program Headers
When you start DEBUG, it sets up a program header at offset 0 in its program
work area. Previous versions allowed you to overwrite the program header
without problems. This is still true for the default program header if you
start DEBUG and specify no file name.
If you debug a .COM or .EXE file, you must not tamper with the program
header of the program below address 5CH. If you do, the system will proba-

bly crash.
Do not try to restart a program once the "program terminated normally"
message is displayed. To restart a program, first reload it using the NAME and
LOAD commands.

Information Common to All DEBUG Commands
Each DEBUG command consists of a single letter followed by one or more
parameters.
You can use any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters in commands and parameters.

39-1

IIIII DEBUG
All DEBUG commands accept parameters, except the QUIT command. You
can separate parameters by delimiters (spaces or commas), but a delimiter is
required only between two consecutive hexadecimal values. Thus, the following commands are equivalent:
dcs:100 110
d cs:100 110
d,cs:100,110

Table 39-1 lists the DEBUG commands and their formats.
Table 39-1 DEBUG Commands
Command

Format

Assemble

A [<address>]

Compare

C <range> <address>

Dump

D [<range>]

Enter

E <address> [<list>]

Fill

F <range> <list>

G [=<address1> [<address2> ... 1l

Hex

H <value1> <value2>

Input

I <value>

Load

L [<address> [<drive> <record1> <record2>]]

Move

M <range> <address>

Name

N <filename> [<filename>]

Output

o <value> <byte>

Ptrace

P [=<address>] [<value>]

Quit

R [<registername>]

S <range> <list>

Trace

T [=<address>] [<value>]

Unassemble

U [<range>]

Write

W [<address> [<drive> <record1> <record2>1l

39-2

ASSEMBLE

IIIII

ASSEMBLE

Purpose
To assemble 8086/8087/8088 mnemonics directly into memory, use the
ASSEMBLE command.

Format
A [<address>1
Where:
<address>

Is a two-part designation consisting of either an alphabetic
segment register plus an offset value or a four-digit segment
address plus an offset value. The default segment is DS.

Comments
All numeric values are hexadecimal and can be entered as 1 to 4 characters.
If a syntax error is encountered, DEBUG responds with A Error and redisplays

the current assembly address. For example:
dcs:100 cs:110
A

Error

Enter prefix mnemonics in front of the opcode to which they refer. You can
also enter them on a separate line.
The segment override mnemonics are CS:, DS:, ES:, and SS:.
String manipulation mnemonics must explicitly state the string size. For
example, the MOVSW must move word strings and MOVSB must move byte
strings.

39-3

IIIII ASSEMBLE
The mnemonic for the far return is RETF.
The assembler automatically assembles short, near or far jumps and calls
depending on the byte displacement to the destination address. You can override these with the NEAR or FAR prefix. For example:
OCBE:0500 JMP
OCBE:0502 JMP
OCBE:0505 JMP

502
NEAR 505
FAR 50A

a 2 byte 5hort jump
a 3 byte near jump
a 5 byte far jump

The NEAR prefix can be abbreviated to NE.
DEBUG cannot tell whether some operands refer to a word memory location
or a byte memory location. In this case, the data type must be explicitly
stated with the prefix WORD PTR or BYTE PTR. DEBUG also accepts the
abbreviations WO and BY. For example:
NEG
DEC

BYTE PTR [128]
WO [SI]

DEBUG cannot tell whether an operand refers to a memory location or to an
immediate operand. DEBUG uses the common convention that operands
enclosed in square brackets refer to memory. For example:
MOV
MOV

AX,21
AX,£21]

;Load AX with 21H
;Load AX with the content5
;of memory location 21H

The DB opcode assembles byte values directly into memory.
DB
DB
DB

1,2,3,4,"THIS IS AN EXAMPLE"
'THIS IS A QUOTE: '"
"THIS IS A QUOTE: I"

The DW opcode assembles word values directly into memory. For example:
DW

39-4

1000,2000,3000,"BACH"

ASSEMBLE

IIIII

DEBUG supports all forms of the register indirect commands. For example:
ADD
POP
PUSH

BX,34[BP+2].[SI-1]
[BP+DI]
[S I ]

DEBUG supports all opcode synonyms. For example:
LOOPZ
LOOPE

100
100

JA
JHBE

200
200

For 8087 opcodes, you must explicitly specify the WAIT or FWAIT prefix.
For example:
FWAIT FADD ST,ST(3)
FLD TBYTE PTR [BX]

Thi5 line will a55emble a FWAIT prefix
Thi5 line will not

39-5

11111 COMPARE

COMPARE

Purpose
To compare a portion of memory specified by <range> to a portion of the
same size beginning at <address>, use the COMPARE command.

Format
C <range> <address>
Where:
<range>

Is either <address><address> or <address>L<value>.
<Value> is the number of lines the COMPARE command
should compare. A length of 80 is assumed. If another hex
value follows <range>, you cannot use the form
<address>L<value> because the second hex value is interpreted as the second address.

Is a two-part designation consisting of either an alphabetic
segment register plus an offset value, or a four-digit segment
address plus an offset value. The default segment is DS.

Comments
If the two areas of memory are identical, DEBUG displays its prompt. If there

are differences, they are displayed:
addre551 byte1 byte2 addre552

39-6

COMPARE

IIIII

Example
To compare the block of memory from 100H to 1FFH with the block of
memory from 200H to 2FFH, type:
C100,1FF 200
OCBE:0100 41
OCBE:0101
52
OCBE:0102 43
OCBE:0103 45
OCBE:0104 49
OCBE:0105 53
OCBE:0106 55
OCBE:0107 48
OCBE:0108 40
OCBE:0109 42
OCBE:010A 41
OCBE:010B 47
OCBE:010C 46
OCBE:010D 53
OCBE:010E 55
OCBE:010F 41

52
41
45
54
47
43
51
47
49
54
55
51
49
52
50
43

OCBE:0200
OCBE:0201
OCBE:0202
OCBE:0203
OCBE:0204
OCBE:0205
OCBE:0206
OCBE:0207
OCBE:0208
OCBE:0209
OCBE :,020A
OCBE:020B
OCBE:020C
OCBE:020D
OCBE:020E
OCBE:020F

OCBE:01FF

OCBE:02FF

39-7

IIIII DUMP
DUMP

Purpose
To display the contents of the specified region of memory, use the DUMP
command.

Format
D [<range>]
Where:
<range>

Is either <address><address> or <address>L<value>. <Value> is
the number of lines the DUMP command should work on. A
length of 80 is assumed. If another hex value follows <range>,
you cannot use the form <address>L<value>, because the second
hex value is interpreted as the second address.

Comments
If you specify a range of addresses, the contents of the range are displayed. If
you type the D command without parameters, 128 bytes are displayed at the
first address (DS: 1 00) after the address displayed by the previous DUMP
command.

The DUMP command is displayed in two portions:a hexadecimal dump (each
byte is shown as a hexadecimal value) and an ASCII dump (the bytes are
shown in ASCII characters). Nonprinting characters are denoted by a period
( . ) in the ASCII portion of the display. Each display line shows 16 bytes
with a hyphen between the eighth and ninth bytes. At times, displays are
split in this manual to fit them on the page. Each displayed line begins on a
16-byte boundary.

39-8

DUMP 11111

Example 1
To display the contents of the 10 bytes at CS:I00 through CS:II0, type:
dcs:100 110(Relurn)
OCBE:0100 37 50 B3 C4 02 BB FF FF-5E BB E5 5D C3 55 BB EC

Example 2
To display the contents of 128 bytes in memory, type:
D~

Each line of the display begins with an address, incremented by 16 from the
address on the previous line. Each subsequent D (typed without parameters)
displays the bytes immediately following the previous bytes displayed.

Example 3
To display 20H bytes in memory, type:
Des: 1 0 0 L

OCBE:0100
OCBE:0110

20 ( Return )
37 50 B3 C4 02 BB FF FF-5E BB E5 5D C3 55 BB EC
SA EB 04 01 56 33 CO 50-BB 50 04 D1 E3 FF B7 9B

If you then type the command:
Des: 1 0 0 1 1 5 ( Return )

OCBE:0100
OCBE:0110

37 50 B3 C4 02 BB FF FF-5E BB E5 5D C3 55 BB EC
SA EB 04 01 56 33

the display is formatted as described above, but all the bytes in the range of
lines from 100H to 115H in the CS segment are displayed.

39-9

11111 ENTER

ENTER
Purpose
To enter byte values into memory at the specified address, use the ENTER
command.

Format
E <address> [<list>]
Where:
<address>

Is a two-part designation consisting of either an alphabetic
segment register plus an offset value, or a four-digit segment
address plus an offset value. The default segment is DS.

<list>

Is a series of byte values or string values. <List> must be the
last value on the command line.
Where:

39-10

<byte>

Is a two digit hex value to be placed in or read
from an address or register.

Is any number of characters enclosed in either
single or double quotes. If quotes appear in the
string, they must be doubled.

ENTER 11111

Comments
If you specify <list>, the replacement of byte values occurs automatically.
If you specify <address> without specifying <list>, DEBUG displays the

address and its contents, then repeats the address on the same line and waits
for your input. Perform one of the following actions:
• Type a new value to replace the current value. If you type either an
illegal hex value or more than two digits, the illegal or extra character
is not echoed.
• Press the spacebar to advance to the next byte. If you space beyond an
eight byte boundary, DEBUG starts a new display line with the address
displayed at the beginning.
• Type a hyphen (-) to return to the previous byte. To change a byte
behind the current position, typing the hyphen returns the current position to the previous byte. When you type the hyphen, a new line is
started with the address and its byte value displayed.
• Press the Return key to terminate the ENTER command. You can do this
at any time.

Example
Assume you type the following command:

DEBUG displays:
OCBE:0100

EB._

To change EB to 41, type:
41

39-11

IIIII ENTER
The line looks like:
OCBE:0100

EB.41_

To step through the subsequent bytes, press the spacebar:
OCBE:0100

EB.41

10.

00.

To change Be to 42, type:
42

The line looks like:
OCBE:0100

EB.41

10.

00.

BC.42_

To change 10 to 6F, press the hyphen key until you return to the 10 (in this
example you press the hyphen key twice), and type 6F:
OCBE:0100
OCBE:0102
OCBE:0101

EB.41
00._
10.SF_

10.

00.

Press the Return key to end the ENTER session and return to the DEBUG
command level.

39-12

FILL 11111

FILL

Purpose
To fill the addresses in <range> with the values in <list>, use the FILL
command.

Format
F <range> <list>
Where:
<range>

Is either <address><address> or <address>L<value>. <Value> is
the number of lines the FILL command should work on. A length
of 80 is assumed. If another hex value follows <range>, you
cannot use the form <address>L<value> because the second hex
value is interpreted as the second address.

<list>

Is a series of byte values or string values. <List> must be the last
value on the command line.
Where:
<byte>

Is a two digit hex value to be placed in or read from
an address or register.

Is any number of characters enclosed in either single
or double quotes. If quotes appear in the string, they
must be doubled.

39-13

IIIII

FILL

Comments
If <range> contains more bytes than the number of values in <list>, <list> is
used repeatedly until all bytes in <range> are filled. If <list> contains more

values than the number of bytes in <range>, the extra values in <list> are
ignored. If any of the memory in <range> is bad or nonexistent, an error
occurs in all succeeding locations.

Example
To fill the lOOH bytes beginning at location OCBE:IOO, type:
Foe BE: 1 DOL

1 DO 42 45 52 54 4 1 ( Return )

DEBUG fills the memory locations OCBE:IOO through OCBE:IFF with the
bytes specified. The five values are used repeatedly until the lOOH bytes are
filled.

39-14

GO 11111

GO
Purpose
To executes the program currently in memory, use the GO command.

Format
G [=<addressl> [<address2> ... ]]
Where:
<address 1 >

Is the start address. It is a two-part designation consisting of
either an alphabetic segment register plus an offset value, or
a four-digit segment address plus an offset value. The default
segment is CS.

Are optional breakpoint addresses. Each address is a two-part
designation conSisting of either an alphabetic segment register plus an offset value, or a four-digit segment address plus
an offset value. The default segment is CS.

Comments
If you type the GO command without parameters, the program is executed as
if it was started at CS:lP.
If you specify <=addressl>, execution begins there. The equal sign is

required so that DEBUG can distinguish the start address from the breakpoint
addresses.
If you specify the optional addresses, DEBUG stops execution at the first

address it encounters, regardless of the position of that address in the list of
addresses to stop program execution or program branching. When DEBUG
reaches a breakpoint, the registers, the flags, and the decoded instruction are
displayed for the last instruction executed. The result is the same as if you
typed the REGISTER command for the breakpoint address. If you want to set
more breakpoint addresses after one is reached, you have to reenter them
again.

39-15

IIIII GO
You can set up to 10 breakpoints, and each breakpoint can only be set at an
address containing the first byte of an 8086 opcode. If you set more than 10
breakpoints, an error message is displayed.
The user stack pointer must be valid and have six bytes available for the GO
command. The GO command uses an IRET instruction to jump to the program under test. The user stack pointer is set, and the user flags and CS:IP
are pushed on the stack. If the user stack is not valid or is too small, the
operating system can crash. An interrupt code (OCCH) is placed at the specified .breakpoint addresses.
When an instruction with the breakpoint code is encountered, all breakpoint
addresses are restored to their original instructions. If execution is not halted
at one of the breakpoints, the interrupt codes are not replaced with the
original instructions.

Example
To execute a program and halt it at CS:7550, type:
GCS: 7550 (Return )

Program terminated normally

DEBUG displays the registers and flags, and then the GO command
terminates.
If you type the GO command again after a breakpoint is encountered, the
program resumes execution at the instruction following the breakpoint.

39-16

HEX

IIIII

HEX
Purpose
To perform hexadecimal arithmetic on the specified parameters, use the HEX
command.

Format
H <value1> <value2>
Where;
<value1>

Is a hexadecimal number with a maximum of four digits in
length.

Is a hexadecimal number with a maximum of four digits in
length.

Comments
DEBUG first adds the two values, then subtracts <value2> from <value1>.
The sum and the difference are displayed on one line.

Example
To find the sum and difference between 19FH and lOAH, type:
H 19F

02A9 0095

39-17

11111 INPUT

INPUT
Purpose
To input and display one byte from the port specified by <value>, use the
INPUT command.

Format
I <value>
Where:
<value>

Is a hexadecimal number with a maximum of four digits in
length. <Value> specifies a port number.

Comments
You can specify a 16-bit address for <value>.

Example
Assume that the byte at the port is 42H. If you type the following command,
DEBUG inputs the byte and displays it:
I 2F8 ( Return )

39-18

LOAD 11111

LOAD

Purpose
To load a file into memory, use the LOAD command.

Format
L [<address> [<drive> <record 1> <record2>]]
Where:
<address>

Is a two-part designation consisting of either an alphabetic segment register plus an offset value or a four-digit
segment address plus an offset value. If the segment is
omitted, the default segment is used. CS is the default
segment for the LOAD command.

<drive>

Is a one-digit hex value that indicates which drive a file
will be loaded from or written to. Valid values are O=A:,
I=B:, 2=C:, 3=D:.

Is a one to three-digit hex value used to indicate the
logical record number on the disk. Logical records
correspond to sectors, but their numbering is different
because they represent the entire disk space.

Is a one to three-digit hex value used to indicate the the
number of disk sectors to be loaded or written.

Comments
Set BX:CX to the number of bytes read. The file has to have been named
either when DEBUG was started or using the NAME command. Both the
DEBUG invocation and the NAME command format a file name properly in
the normal format of a file control block at CS:Sc.
If you type the LOAD command with no parameters, DEBUG loads the file
specified with the NAME command into memory beginning at CS: 100 and
sets BX:CX to the number of bytes loaded.
If you type the LOAD command with <address>, loading begins at <addl,"ess>.
If you type the LOAD command with all parameters, absolute disk sectors are

loaded, not a file. The records are taken from <drive>. DEBUG begins loading with <recordl>, and continues until the number of sectors specified in
<record2> have been loaded.

39-19

11111 LOAD

If the file has a .EXE file extension, it is relocated to the load address specified in the program header of the .EXE file. <Address> is always ignored for
.EXE files. The program header itself is stripped off the .EXE file before it is
loaded into memory. Thus the size of the .EXE file on disk differs from its
size in memory.
If the file has a .HEX extension and you type the LOAD command with no

parameters, DEBUG loads the file beginning at the address specified in the
.HEX file.
If the file has a .HEX extension and you type the LOAD command with

<address>, DEBUG adds <address> to the address found in the .HEX file to
determine the start address for loading the file.

Examples
Assume you type the following commands:
A: \) DEBUG ( Return )

- NF I LE. COM ( Return )

Now, to load FILE.COM, type:
L~

DEBUG loads the file and displays its prompt.
Assume you want to load only portions of a file or certain records from a
disk. To do this type:
LOCBE: 100 2 OF 6D ~Ium )

DEBUG loads 109 (6DH) records into memory at OCBE:I00, beginning with
logical record number OFH. When DEBUG finishes loading the records, it
displays its prompt.

39-20

MOVE 11111

MOVE

Purpose
To move a block of memory specified by <range> to the location beginning
at <address>, use the MOVE command.

Format
M <range> <address>
Where:
<range>

Is either <address><address> or <address>L<value>.
<Value> is the number of lines the MOVE command
should work on. A length of 80 is assumed. If another hex
value follows <range>, you cannot use the form
<address>L<value> because the second hex value would be
interpreted as the second address.

Is a two-part designation consisting of either an alphabetic
segment register plus an offset value or a four-digit segment
address plus an offset value. If the segment is omitted, the
default segment is used. DS is the default segment for the
MOVE command.

Comments
You can perform overlapping moves (moves where pan of the block overlaps
some of the current addresses) without loss of data. Addresses that could be
overwritten are moved first. The sequence for moves from higher addresses
to lower addresses is to move the data beginning at the block's lowest
address and then to move towards the highest. The sequence for moves from
lower addresses to higher addresses is to move the data beginning at the
block's highest address and then to move towards the lowest.
NOTE
If the addresses in the block being moved will not have new data

written to them, the data there before the move will remain. The
MOVE command copies the data from one area into another, in the
sequence described, and writes over the new addresses.

39-21

11111 MOVE

Example
Assume that you type:
MCS:100 110 CS:500(Return)

DEBUG first moves address CS:II0 to address CS:510, then CS:I0F to CS:50F,
and so on until CS:I00 is moved to CS:500. Use the DUMP command, with
the address specified for the MOVE command, to see the results of the move.

39-22

NAME

IIIII

NAME
Purpose
To set file names and format file control blocks (FCB) for the first two file
names, use the NAME command.

Format
N <filename!> [<filename2> ... ]
Where:
<filename!>

Is the file name of the first file for which you want an FCB
set up.

Is the file name of the second file for which you want an
FeB set up.

Comments
The NAME command assigns a file name for a later LOAD or WRITE operation. Therefore, if you start DEBUG without naming any file to be debugged,
you must type the following command before a file can be loaded:

The NAME command assigns file name parameters to the file being debugged.
In this case, NAME accepts a list of parameters that are used by the file being
debugged.
These two functions overlap. Consider the following DEBUG commands:
- NF I LE 1 "EXE ( Relu,-;;)
- L ( Rei"," )
- G ( Return )

39-23

11111

NAME

The NAME command performs the following steps:
1. The NAME command assigns the file name FILE 1.EXE to the file name to
be used in any later LOAD or WRITE operations.
2. The NAME command assigns the file name FILE 1.EXE to the first file
name parameter used by any program that is later debugged.
3. The LOAD command loads FILEl.EXE into memory.
4. The GO command causes FILEl.EXE to be executed with FILEl.EXE as
the single file name parameter (that is, FILEl.EXE is executed as if you
typed FILE 1.EXE from the command line).
Consider the following DEBUG command:
- NF I LE 1 . EXE ( Return )
- L ( Return )

-NFILE2.DAT FILE3.DATCReturn)
- G ( Return )

The NAME command sets FILE 1.EXE as the file name for the subsequent
LOAD operation. The LOAD command loads FILEl.EXE into memory. The
next NAME command specifies the parameters to be used by FILE1.EXE. The
GO command executes FILE 1.EXE as if you typed the following on the com·
mand line:
FILE1 FILE2.DAT FILE3.DAT(R~urn )
NOTE

If you execute the WRITE command at this point, FILE 1.EXE
would be saved as FILE2.DAT. To avoid such results, you should
always execute the NAME command before either a LOAD or
WRITE operation.

39·24

NAME

IIIII

The NAME command can affect four regions of memory:
CS:5C

FCB for the first file parameter given to the NAME command.

CS:6C

FCB for the second file parameter (if one is typed) given to the
NAME command.

CS:80

Contains the number of characters typed in the NAME command (excluding the N).

CS:81

Contains the actual stream of characters typed in the NAME command
(excluding the N). This stream of characters can contain switches
and delimiters that would be legal in any command typed at the
MS-DOS command level.

Example
To debug PROG.COM and specify the parameters PARAMI and PARAM2/C,
type:
DEBUG PROG. COM ( Return )
- NPARAM1

PARAM2/C LRetum )

-G~

The GO command executes the file in memory as if you typed:
A: \ > PRDG PARAM 1 PARAM2! C (Relu,.!!:J

39-25

IIIII OUTPUT
OUTPUT
Purpose
To send the byte specified to the output port specified by <value>, use the
OUTPUT command.

Format

o <value> <byte>
Where:
<value>

Is a hexadecimal number up to four digits in length that specifies a port number

<byte>

Is a two-digit hex value placed in or read from an address or
register

Comments
You can specify a 16-bit address for <value>.

Example
To output the byte value 4F to port 2F8, type:
02F8 4F ( Return )

39-26

PTRACE

IIIII

PTRACE

Purpose
To execute one instruction and display the contents of all registers and flags,
and the decoded instruction, use the TRACE command.

Format
P [=<address>] [<value>]
Where:
<address>

Is a two-part designation consisting of either an alphabetic
segment register plus an offset value or a four-digit segment
address plus an offset value. If the segment is omitted, the
default segment is used. CS is the default segment for the
PTRACE command. If specified, the PTRACE begins at this
address.

<value>

Is a hexadecimal number up to four digits in length that
specifies the number of steps for the PTRACE command.

Comments
The PTRACE command is identical to the TRACE command except that it
automatically executes and returns from any calls or software interrupts it
encounters. The TRACE command always stops after executing the call or
interrupt, leaving execution control inside the called routine.
The PTRACE command uses the hardware trace mode of the 8086 or 8088
microprocessor. Therefore, you can also trace instructions stored in ROM.

39-27

11111 PTRACE

Examples

To display the registers, flags, and one decoded instruction, type:

AX-OEOO BX-OOFF CX-0007 OX-01FF SP-0390 BP-OOOO SI-OOSC 01-0000
OS-04BA ES=04BA SS-04BA CS-04BA IP-011A HV UP 01 HG HZ AC PE HC
OCBE:011A C021
IHT
21
If you now type:

P=011A 10(Retum)
AX-OOOO BX-OOOO CX-OOFE OX-OOOO SP-FFFE BP-0001 SI-OOSC 01-0000
OS-OCA4 ES-OCA4 SS-OCB4 CS-OCBE IP-011B HV UP EI PL HZ HA PO CY
OCBE:011B 52
PUSH
OX
AX-OOOO BX-OOOO CX-OOFE OX-OOOO SP-FFFE BP-OOOO SI-OOSC 01-0000
OS-OCA4 ES-OCA4 SS-OCB4 CS-OCBE IP-011C HV UP EI PL HZ HA PO CY
OCBE:OllA 54
PUSH
SP

AX-OOOO BX-OOOO CX-Ol01 OX-0003 SP-FFF2 BP-0004 SI-OOSC 01-0000
OS-OCA4 ES-OCA4 SS-OCB4 CS-OCBE IP-012A HV UP EI PL HZ HA PO CY
OCBE:012A 52
PUSH
DX

DEBUG executes 16 (10H) instructions, beginning at OCBE:0110, displaying
all registers and flags for each instruction as it is executed. Press <Ctrl/S> to
stop the scrolling of the display. Press any other key to continue.

39-28

QUIT

IIIII

QUIT
Purpose
To end the DEBUG session, use the QUIT command.

Format
Q

Comments
The QUIT command ends the DEBUG session without saving the file currently being operated on.
The QUIT command returns to the MS-DOS command level.

Example
To end the debugging session, type:

39-29

IIIII REGISTER
REGISTER

Purpose
To display the contents of one or more CPU registers, use the REGISTER
command.

Format
R [<registername>1
Where:
<registername>

Is the name of a CPU register. Valid registernames are
AX, BX, CX, DX, CS, DS, ES, SS, BP, SP, DI, SI, IP, PC,
and F.

Comments
If you do not specify a register, the REGISTER command dumps the register

save area and displays the contents of all registers and flags.
If you specify a register, the 16-bit hex value of that register is displayed.
Then a colon is displayed as the prompt. Type a value to change the contents
of the register, or press the Return key for no change.
If you specify F as the register, DEBUG displays each flag with a two-letter

alphabetic code. To alter any flag, type the opposite two-letter code.

39-30

IIIII

Table 39-2 lists the flags and the two-letters codes for set and clear.
Table 39-2

Flags

Flag

Set

Clear

Overflow

Direction

DN (decrement)

UP (increment)

Interrupt

EI (enable)

DI (disable)

Sign

NG (negative)

PL (plus)

Zero

Auxiliary
Carry

Parity

PE (even)

PO (odd)

Carry

When you type the command RF, the flags are displayed ~n the order shown
in Table 39-2. At the end of the list of flags, DEBUG displays a hyphen. You
can enter new flag values as two-letter codes in any order. You do not have
to leave spaces between the flag entries. Flags for which you did not enter
new values remain unchanged.
To exit from the REGISTER command, press the Return key.
If you type an invalid two-letter code, a message is displayed. DEBUG

changes the flags up to the invalid code. DEBUG does not change the flags at
or after the error.
At start up, the segment registers are set to the bottom of free memory. IP is
set to OIOOH. All flags are clear. The remaining registers are set to zero.

39-31

11111 REGISTER

Examples

To display all registers, flags, and the decoded instruction at the current
location, type:
AX=OEOO BX-OOFF CX=0007 OX-01FF SP-0390 BP-OOOO SI-00SC 01-0000
OS-04BA ES=04BA SS-04BA CS-04BA IP-011A HV UP 01 HG HZ AC PE HC
OCBE:011A C021
IHT
21

To display the flags, type:
HV UP Dl HG HZ AC PE HC - _

To change any or all flags, type valid flag designations, in any order, with or
without spaces:
NV UP 01 HG HZ AC PE HC -RF
HV UP El PL HZ AC PE CY -

To leave the flags as they now are, press the Return key.

39-32

IIIII

Purpose
To search the range specified for the list of bytes specified, use the SEARCH
command.

Format
S <range> <list>
Where:
<range>

Is either <address><address> or <address>L<value>. <Value> is
the number of lines the SEARCH command should work on. A
length of 80 is assumed. If another hex value follows <range>,
you cannot use the form <address>L<value> because the second
hex value would be interpreted as the second address.

<list>

Is a series of byte values or string values. <List> must be the last
value on the command line.
Where:
<byte>

Is a two digit hex value to be placed in or read from
an address or register.

Is any number of characters enclosed in either single
or double quotes. If quotes appear in the string, they
must be doubled.

39-33

11111 SEARCH

Comments
<List> can contain one or more bytes, separated by a space or comma. If
<list> contains more than one byte, only the first address of the byte string is
returned. If <list> contains only one byte, all addresses of the byte in
<range> are displayed.

Example
If you type:

scs: 100 110 41 '-'-"'=_-'
OCBE:0104
OCBE:010D

39-34

TRACE 11111

TRACE

Purpose
To execute one instruction and display the contents of all registers and flags,
and the decoded instruction, use the TRACE command.

Format
T [=<address>] [<value>]
Where:
<address>

<value>

Is a hexadecimal number up to four digits in length that
specifies the number of steps for the TRACE command.

Comments
The TRACE command uses the hardware trace mode of the 8086 or 8088
microprocessor. Therefore, you can also trace instructions stored in ROM.

39-35

11111 TRACE

Examples
To display the registers, flags, and one decoded instruction, type:

AX-OEOO BX-OOFF CX-0007 DX=01FF SP-039D BP-OOOO SI-OOSC DI-OOOO
DS=04BA ES-04BA SS-04BA CS-04BA IP-011A HV UP DI HG HZ AC PE HC
OCBE:011A CD21
IHT
21
If you now type:

AX=OOOO BX-OOOO CX-OOFE DX-OOOO SP-FFFE BP-0001 SI"OOSC DI-OOOO
DS"OCA4 ES-OCA4 SS·OCB4 CS-OCBE Ip·011B HV UP EI PL HZ HA PO CY
OCBE:011B 52
PUSH
DX
AX=OOOO BX-OOOO CX-OOFE DX=OOOO SP=FFFE BP=OOOO SI-OOSC DI-OOOO
DS=OCA4 ES·OCA4 SS=OCB4 CS-OCBE Ip·011C HV UP EI PL HZ HA PO CY
OCBE:011A 54
PUSH
SP

AX-OOOO BX-OOOO CX-0101 DX-0003 SP-FFF2 BP·0004 SI-OOSC DI-OOOO
DS=OCA4 ES-OCA4 SS-OCB4 CS-OCBE IP-012A HV UP EI PL HZ HA PO CY
OCBE:012A 52
PUSH
DX

DEBUG executes 16 (10H) instructions, beginning at OCBE:0110, displaying
all registers and flags for each instruction as it is executed. Press <CtrljS> to
stop the scrolling of the display. Press any other key to continue.

39-36

UNASSEMBLE

IIIII

UNASSEMBLE

Purpose
To unassemble bytes and display the source statements that correspond to
them, with addresses and byte values, use the UNASSEMBLE command.

Format
U [<range>]
Where:
<range>

Is either <address><address> or <address>L<value>. <Value> is
the number of lines the UNASSEMBLE command should work on.
A length of SO is assumed.

Comments
If you type the UNASSEMBLE command without parameters, DEBUG
unassembles 20H bytes at the first address after that displayed by a previous
UNASSEMBLE command.
If you type the UNASSEMBLE command and specify <range>, DEBUG unassembles all bytes in <range>. If <range> is an address, DEBUG unassembles
20H bytes instead of SOH bytes.

Examples
To unassemble 16 bytes beginning at OCBE:I00, type:
U!1CBE:!11DO
OCBE:0100
OCBE:0103
OCBE:0104
OCBE:0106
OCBE:0109
OCBE:010A
OCBE:010B
OCBE:010C
OCBE:010D
OCBE:010E
OCBE:010F

L 1 'f) Ul_oe!~iC~)

206472
69
7665
207370
65
63
69
66
69
63
61

AND
DB
JBE
AND
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB

[SI+721,AH
69
016B
[BP+DI+701,DH
65
63
69
66
69
63
61

39-37

IIIII UNASSEMBLE
To unassemble the bytes from OCBE:OIOO to OCBE:OI08, type:
UOCBE:0100 0108 ( Return )
OCBE:0100
OCBE:0103
OCBE:0104
OCBE:0106

206472
69
7665
207370

MID
DB
JBE
AND

[SI+721,AH
69
016B
[BP+DI+701,DH

If the bytes in some addresses are altered, the UNASSEMBLE command alters

the instruction statements. You can type the UNASSEMBLE command for the
changed locations, the new instructions viewed, and the unassembled code
to edit the source file.

39-38

WRITE

IIIII

WRITE
Purpose
To write the file being debugged to a disk file, use the WRITE command.

Format
W [<address> [<drive> <record1> <record2>]]
Where:
<address>

<drive>

Is a one-digit hex value that indicates which drive a file
will be loaded from or written to. Valid values are O=A:,
1=B:, 2=C:, 3=D:.

Is a one to three-digit hex value used to indicate the
number of disk sectors to be loaded or written.

39-39

IIIII WRITE
Comments
If you type the WRITE command with no parameters, make sure you first set

BX:CX to the number of bytes to be written. The file is written beginning
from CS:100.
NOTE

If you want to use the WRITE command without parameters, and
you have already used a GO or TRACE command, make sure you
reset BX:CX.

If you type the WRITE command with an address, the file is written beginning from the address.
If you load a file and modify it, the name, length and statting address are all
set correctly to save the modified file (as long as the length has not
changed).
If you type the WRITE command with parameters, the write begins from the

memory address specified. The WRITE command writes the file to <drive>.
DEBUG writes the file beginning at the logical record number specified by
<record1>. DEBUG continues to write the file until the number of sectors
specified in <record2> have been written.

Examples
To write the currently debugged file to disk, type:

To write 2BH records, beginning at address CS:100, to drive B and begin
writing at logical record 37H, type:
WCS: 0 1 00

39-40

1 37 28 ( Return)

Chapter 40
Messages

This chapter lists and discusses:
• Disk and device messages
• MS-DOS operating system messages
• MS-Windows messages
• NFT messages
• SETHOST messages
• Terminal emulator messages
Many of the MS-Windows messages are displayed in dialog boxes with an OK
and a Cancel option. To make the dialog box and the message disappear
before you proceed, select the OK option. Some dialog boxes include a Retry
option. To retry an operation, select the Retry option.
These messages can be displayed while running any MS-Windows application.
The messages are listed alphabetically, followed by an explanation and action
to correct the problem.
Each message has at least one word or one abbreviation after it, capitalized
and enclosed in parentheses, to indicate the utility or program that generated
the message. Most of these words and abbreviations are self-explanatory,
except for the following abbreviations:
(BR)

Messages generated by either the BACKUP command or the RESTORE
command

(MS)

Messages generated by the MS-DOS operating system

(TE)

Messages generated by the terminal emulator

(WIN) Messages generated by MS-Windows

40-1

IIIII Messages
Disk and Device Errors
If a disk or device error occurs at any time during a command or program,
the MS-DOS operating system displays the following message:
(type) (action) drive x
Abort,Retry,Ignore:_

Where:
type

Is one of the following:
Bad call format error

Bad command error

Bad unit error

Data error

FeB unavailable

General failure

Invalid disk change

Lock violation

Non-DOS disk error

No paper error

Not ready error

Read fault error

Sector not found error

Seek error

Sharing violation

Write fault error

Write protect error
action

Is either reading or writing.

drive

Is the drive in which the error occurred.

The MS-DOS operating system waits for you to respond in one of the following ways:
A

Aborts the program requesting the disk read or write.

Retries the operation. Use this response after you correct the error.

Ignores the bad sector as if the error did not occur.

40-2

Messages

IIIII

Messages
Allocation error in file, size adjusted (MS)

Cause: The size of the file indicated in the directory is inconsistent with
the amount of data actually allocated to the file.
Action: To make sure the data in the file is still valid, run the CHKDSK
program and specify the jF qualifier. The CHKDSK command will try to
correct the error. You may need to restore the back-up copy of this file.
Allocation error, size adjusted (MS)

Cause: An invalid cluster number was found in the file allocation table
(FAT). The file was truncated at the end of the last valid cluster.
Action: To make sure the data in the file is still valid, run the CHKDSK
program and specify the jF qualifier. The CHKDSK command will try to
correct the error. You may need to restore the back-up copy of this file.
Allocation quantity too large_ (NFT)

Cause: The disk on the remote system is too full to process your
request.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system or contact the
system administrator for the remote system. You may have to specify a
smaller quantity.
APPENDj ASSIGN conflict (APPEND) (ASSIGN)

Cause: The ASSIGN command was used, followed by the APPEND
command.
Action: Both ASSIGN and APPEND are terminated and stay resident programs. The APPEND command must be used before the ASSIGN command if they are used together. Restart the workstation.

40-3

IIIII Messages
Application still active (WIN)
Cause: You tried to end the MS-Windows session while a standard application is still running.
Action: Close any standard applications that are running. For most applications, this means using the application's QUIT or EXIT command.

Bad call format reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system found a request header of incorrect length for the specified device.
Action: To stop the command, press the A key. Review the source code
of the program that produced the message.

Bad disk
Press any key (MS)
Cause: When you started your workstation, a hardware problem
occurred which prevented the disk from being read.
Action: Turn off the workstation and restart it again. If this message is
displayed again get another system diskette.

Bad file (Fe)
Cause: One of the specified files is defective.
Action: Restore the back-up copy of the file.

Bad or missing 'filename' (MS)
Cause: The CONFIG.SYS file contains a reference to an invalid device.
Action: Make sure the DEVICE command is correct in the CONFIG.SYS
file.

40-4

Messages

IIIII

Bad command error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system found an invalid command in the
command code field of the request header for the specified device.
Action: To stop the command, press the A key. Review the source code
of the program that produced the message.

Bad command or file name (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system cannot find the specified command or file name.
Action: Make sure you typed the command correctly. Then, make sure
you typed the file name correctly. Finally, make sure the file exists on
the disk using the DIR command.

40-4.1

This page intentionally left blank.

Messages

IIIII

Bad or missing Command Interpreter (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system cannot find the COMMAND.COM
file.
Action: Make sure the COMMAND.COM file is in your root directory. If
it is in your root directory, it may be invalid. Either restart the system
or copy the COMMAND.COM file from your back-up diskette to the disk
you are currently using.

Bad unit error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system found an invalid subunit code in
the request header for the specified device.
Action: To stop the command, press the A key. Review the source code
of the program that produced the message.

Because bad record size (NFT)
Cause: The record size is invalid or illegal for the specified operation.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the
remote system's system administrator.

Because cannot assign address - possibly node name is undefined
(NFT)
Cause: The remote node name does not correspond to any node name
defined at the local node.
Action: Make sure the remote node name is defined.

Because cannot open file (NFT)
Cause: An error occurred on a file open operation.
Action: Specify another file name. Make sure you have enough disk
space to open a file. Read the documentation for the remote system and
contact the remote system's system administrator.

40-5

11111 Messages

Because cannot position to end of file (NFT)
Cause: NFT cannot append the specified input file to the end of the
specified output file.
Action: Make sure the input file is open. Make sure the two files have
the save file format. Read the documentation for the remote system and
contact the remote system's system administrator.

Because device is write locked (NFT)
Cause: The device is write locked. The specified output file cannot be
created.
Action: Change the protection for the device or write to another device.
Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the remote
system's system administrator.

Because directory full (NFT)
Cause: You tried to copy a file to a remote node and the remote directory is already full.
Action: Try copying the file to another directory. Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the remote system's system
administrator.

Because directory not found (NFT)
Cause: You specified a directory that does not exist on the node/device.
Action: Specify another directory. Read the documentation for the
remote system and contact the remote system's system administrator.

Because disk quota exceeded (NFT)
Cause: You tried to perform a remote file operation and there is no
room on the remote disk.
Action: Try using another disk. Read the documentation for the remote
system and contact the remote system's system administrator.

40-6

Messages 11111

Because error in directory name (NFT)
Cause: The specified directory does not conform to the format of the
target system.
Action: Specify another directory, using the destination system's format.
Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the remote
system's system administrator.

Because error in file name (NFT)
Cause: The specified file name does not conform to the format of the
target system.
Action: Specify another file name, using the destination system's format.
Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the remote
system's system administrator.

Because error in record attribute (NFT)
Cause: You specified remote file record attributes that are invalid.
Action: Specify only valid remote file record attributes.

Because error in record format (NFT)
Cause: You specified remote file record formats that are invalid.
Action: Specify only valid remote file record formats.

Because file locked by other user (NFT)
Cause: Another user currently has the specified file locked or open for
writing. This message is also displayed in a full directory listing.
Action: Wait until the other user has closed the file. Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the remote system's system
administrator.

40-7

11111 Messages

Because file not found (NFT)
Cause: The specified file or files do not exist.
Action: Specify a valid local file. For remote files, read the documentation for the remote system and contact the remote system's system
administrator.

Because file read error (NFT)
Cause: An unrecoverable error occurred while reading on the device.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the
remote system's system administrator.

Because file write error (NFT)
Cause: An unrecoverable error occurred while writing on the device.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the
remote system's system administrator.

Because illegal record attributes (NFT)
Cause: The file's record attributes are invalid, or unsupported, by NFT.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the
remote system's system administrator.

Because incorrect user access information (NFT)
Cause: The network rejected an attempted connection because the specified access control information did not match a valid account on the
remote node.
Action: Specify valid access control information.

Because invalid record format (NFT)
Cause: The file's record format is invalid, or unsupported, by NFT.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the
remote system's system administrator.

40-8

Messages

IIIII

Because invalid wildcard operation (NFT)
Cause: The remote system rejected the wildcard specification as inappropriate for the operation.
Action: Specify a valid wildcard. Read the documentation for the remote
system and contact the remote system's system administrator.

Because privilege violation (NFT)
Cause: You attempted an operation for which you have no privileges.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system. You may need to
change the access control list or login command file.

bf Error (DEBUG)
Cause: You tried to alter a flag and specified an invalid flag
specification.
Action: Enter a valid flag specification and retry the command.

bp Error (DEBUG)
Cause: You tried to set more than 10 breakpoints as parameters for the
GO command.
Action: Specify 10 parameters or less for the GO command.

br Error (DEBUG)
Cause: You specified an invalid register name for the REGISTER
command.
Action: Enter a valid register and retry the command.

Can't share 'pathname'
Drive is redirected (PERMIT)
Cause: The path specified was redirected over the network and cannot
be shared with the PERMIT command.
Action: Specify the actual path.

40-9

11111 Messages

Cannot Access Comm Port 'portnumber' [- Exit Set-Up?] (TE)
Cause: The indicated serial communications port is not installed or cannot be initialized.
Action: Make sure the port is properly connected to the modem or communications line. If you are using the VT240 terminal emulator, you
have to define the emulator when you enter it.
If this message occurs ~hile trying to exit Set-Up, you have the option

of remaining in Set-Up or exiting Set-Up, in which case no connection is
made.
Cannot Access Network [- Exit Set-Up?] (TE)
Cause: The requested Network Terminal Service cannot be initialized.
Action: Make sure the hardware is properly connected and the network
is operational.
Make sure the requested Network Terminal Service is currently available
from the host.
On rare occasions this message may indicate that some limited resource
of the network or host (such as maximum number of simultaneous sessions) has been exceeded.
If this message occurs while trying to exit Set-Up, you have the option

of remaining in Set-Up or exiting Set-Up, in which case no connection is
made.
Cannot access printer port (TE)
Cause: The VT220 terminal emulator cannot open the printer port LPTI.
The printer may be unable to allocate the necessary queue or the hardware may not be present.
Action: Make sure there is a printer port LPTI. You may have to close
some of your applications to use the printer.

40-10

Messages

11111

Cannot change directory to 'directoryname' (WIN)
Cause: You specified a file name instead of a directory name using the
Change Directory command.
Action: Select or type a directory name, then retry the Change Directory
command.

Cannot Chdir to 'filename'
Tree past this point not processed (MS)
Cause: The CHKDSK command is unable to check the specified directory. All subdirectories and files under this directory cannot be verified.
Your directory structure could be corrupt. You could also have more
subdirectories than are allowed by the MS-DOS operating system.
Action: To save the files that you can, run the CHKDSK program and
specify the IF qualifier. The CHKDSK command will try to correct the
error. You may need to restore lost files from your back-up diskette.

Cannot CHKDSK a Network drive (MS)
Cause: You tried to check drives that are redirected over the network.
Action: Make sure the drive is not redirected before you issue the
CHKDSK command.

Cannot Chdir to root Processing cannot continue (MS)
Cause: The CHKDSK command cannot to return to the root directory.
The CHKDSK command cannot continue checking the remaining subdirectories to the root. Your disk structure could be corrupt.
Action: Remember the path that would not allow you to reach the root.
Try restarting the MS-DOS operating system. If this error persists, you
cannot use the disk.

Cannot close file 'filename' (GRAFTABL)
Cause: The file 'filename' cannot be closed. Either the file handle could
not be closed or the file handle is invalid.
Action: Retry the GRAFTABL command.

40-11

IIIII Messages
Cannot connect to self (NET)
Cause: You tried to connect to a remote resource but incorrectly specified your network name as the computer name of the server.
Action: Specify a valid computer name for a server.
Cannot copy file to itself (WIN)
Cause: You tried to copy a file to the same file name either on the same
disk or in the same directory. This is not allowed because it overwrites
the file.
Action: Copy the file again, specifying a different destination file name.
Cannot copy more than one file to a single file (WIN)
Cause: You selected more than one file name and specified a single file
as the destination.
Action: Select the file you want to copy and start again. To copy multiple files, specify a directory to copy them into.
Cannot create 'filename' (WIN)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• You tried to save your work to a read-only file.
• You tried to create a file on a network drive that is read-only.
Action: Specify another file name or drive name when you save your
work.
Cannot create a temporary file on destination diskette (SELECT)
Cause: The destination diskette's directory is full.
Action: Delete some files from the diskette, or use another diskette.

40-12

Messages

IIIII

Cannot create directory 'directoryname' (WIN)

Cause: Any of the following things occurred:
• You tried to create a directory using a name that already exists in
the current directory.
• You tried to create a directory on a disk that is write-protected.
• You tried to create a directory on a disk that is read-only.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Retry the command with a unique directory name.
• If the disk is read-only, use the ATTRIB command to change its
attributes.
• If you tried to create the directory on a diskette that is write-

protected, remove the write-protection tab. Retry the command.
Cannot create new output file (SELECT)

Cause: The destination diskette's directory is full.
Action: Delete some files from the diskette, or use another diskette.
Cannot delete 'filename' (WIN)

Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• You tried to delete a file on a write-protected diskette.
• You tried to delete a read-only file.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Remove the write-protection tab and retry the command.
• Use the ATTRIB command to change the file's attributes so that
you can delete it.

40-13

IIIII Messages
Cannot delete file: 'filename' (NFT)
Cause: You tried to delete a directory file or you tried to delete a file
that is read-only.
Action: To delete a directory file, delete all files in the directory and
change the protection of the directory file. Now you can delete the
directory file. To delete a read-only file, change the read-only attribute.
Now you can delete the file.
Cannot delete the current directory (WIN)
Cause: You tried to delete the current directory. This is not allowed,
even if the directory is empty.
Action: Move to the directory above your current directory and retry the
RMDIR command.
Cannot disconnect from current drive (NET)
Cause: You cannot disconnect your current drive.
Action: Change the default drive and retry the NET USE command.
Cannot DISKCOPY a network resource (DISKCOPY)
Cause: You tried to use the DISKCOPY command on a network
resource.
Action: Do not try to execute the DISKCOPY command on a remote
network resource.
Cannot DISKCOPY an ASSIGNed or SUBSTed drive (DISKCOPY)
Cause: You tried to use the DISKCOPY command with a drive for which
you used the ASSIGN or SUBST command.
Action: Do not try to execute the DISKCOPY command on a drive for
which you used the ASSIGN or SUBST command.

40-14

Messages

IIIII

Cannot do binary reads from a device (MS)
Cause: You tried to execute the COPY command with the jB qualifier
when copying from a device.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Remove the jB qualifier and retry the COpy command.
• Specify an ASCII copy using the jA qualifier. Retry the COPY
command.

Cannot edit .BAK file - rename file (MS)
Cause: You tried to edit a back·up copy made by EDLIN.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Rename the .BAK file and give it another file extension.
• Copy the .BAK file and give it a different file extension.

Cannot Find 'filename' (TE)
Cause: You selected an action requiring a file, and the MS·DOS Execu·
tive cannot find the file in the directory or on the disk.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly. You may need to
change directories to locate the file, or you may need to type a path
name before the file name. If the file is not on the diskette, insert the
diskette containing the file into the drive. Select the command and try
again.

Cannot find 'filename' (WIN)
Cause: The MS· DOS Executive cannot find the file in the directory or on
the disk.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly. You may need to
change directories to locate the file, or you may need to type a path
name before the file name. If the file is not on the diskette, insert the
diskette containing the file in the drive. Select the command and try
again.
If the file contains special characters, try the operation through the

MS·DOS operating system.

40·15

IIIII Messages
Cannot find system file on current drive (WIN)
Cause: You ran Make System Disk from a drive that does not contain the
system files.
Action: Change your current drive to a drive containing your system
files.

Cannot FORMAT a Network drive (MS)
Cause: You tried to format a drive that is redirected over the network.
Action: Do not try to format a drive that has been redirected over the
network.

Cannot format an Assigned drive (MS)
Cause: You tried to format a drive whose input/output (I/O) is sent to
another drive.
Action: To clear all drive assignments, type:
A>ASS I GN ( Return )

Cannot format diskette (WIN)
Cause: The diskette is defective or a read-only diskette.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Replace the diskette if it is defective and retry the command.
• Remove the write-protect tab and retry the command.

Cannot format drive. (FDISK)
Cause: You set the drive type improperly.
Action: Make sure you specify the correct drive type for your workstation hard disk.

40-16

Messages

IIIII

Cannot JOIN a network drive. (MS)

Cause: You tried to join a network drive.
Action: Specify a drive other than a network drive.
Cannot LABEL a SUBSTed or ASSIGNed drive (LABEL)

Cause: You tried to label a drive that was assigned using the ASSIGN
command or substituted using the SUBST command.
Action: Use the LABEL command only with valid drives.

40-16.1

This page intentionally left blank.

Messages 11111

Cannot label a network drive (LABEL)
Cause: You tried to label a drive that is shared on a network.
Action: Do not try to label a network drive.

Cannot Open 'filename' (TE)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system cannot find the file you specified,
or you tried to open a file that is in a read-only access area.
Action: Make sure the file exists. If the file exists, make sure the path is
a valid path. Make sure you typed the file name correctly.

Cannot open back-up id file on back-up destination disk (BR)
Cause: The BACKUP or RESTORE command cannot open the
BACKUPID.@@@ file on the destination disk.
Action: Make sure you typed the information on the command line correctly. Then make sure the BACKUPID.@@@ file is where you specified it to be.

Cannot open file 'filename' (MS) (GRAFTABL) (SORT)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system cannot find the file you specified.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly. Then, make sure
the file exists. If the file exists, make sure the path is valid. Finally,
retry the command.

Cannot Open Printer (TE)
Cause: MS-Windows cannot allocate the memory needed for a print
operation.
Action: Reduce the number of processes you are running or close some
of your applications in MS-Windows.

40-17

11111

Messages

Cannot print (WIN)
Cause: You did not properly install your printer (this includes having
proper settings in the WIN .INI file).
Action: Check the printer connections and Control Panel printer settings. Set your printer up properly and start again.

Cannot put MS-DOS system on the diskette (WIN)
Cause: The diskette cannot be formatted with the system files.
Action: Put a blank, formatted diskette in the drive and retry the SYS
command.
The source diskette must contain the folloWing:
• COMMAND. COM in the root directory
• IO.SYS
• MSDOS.SYS
The destination diskette must meet these requirements:
• The first two directories are empty.
• The first n clusters are free, where n is enough room for IO.SYS
and MSDOS.SYS.
• There is enough room on the disk for IO.SYS, MSDOS.SYS, and
COMMAND.COM.
Or, the destination diskette must meet these requirements:
• The first two directory entries are IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS.
• The first n clusters are allocated to these files, where n is enough
room for IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS.
• There is enough room on the disk for IO.SYS, MSDOS.SYS, and
COMMAND.COM after deleting the original files.

Cannot Read 'filename' (TE)
Cause: An error occurred while reading the specified file.
Action: Try again.

40-18

Messages

IIIII

Cannot read from device 'devicename' (WIN)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• MS-Windows could not read from the specified device.
• The specified device was not available for input.
Action: Make sure the device is properly set up (and, if appropriate,
turned on). Select Retry to try the operation again, or Cancel to end the
operation.

Cannot read from drive 'drivename' (WIN)
Cause: Any of the following things occurred:
• There was no disk in the specified drive.
• The disk drive door was open or the disk was not inserted
properly.
• MS-Windows could not read the disk in the drive you specified.
• The disk was defective, damaged, or not formatted.
• There was a network error or disconnect from the device.
Action: Select Retry to try the operation again. If a floppy drive is specified, make sure the diskette is properly inserted. If you continue to
receive this message, select the Cancel option.

Cannot read graphic font file 'filename' (GRAFTABL)
Cause: GRAFTABL cannot read from the file you specified on the command line. The file could be closed to reading.
Action: Retry the GRAFTABL command. If the message is displayed
again, restore the font file from your back-up diskette.

Cannot recover. entry, processing continued (MS)
Cause: The. entry (current directory) is corrupt.
Action: Restore the files and directory structure from your back-up
diskette.

40-19

11111 Messages

Cannot recover ., entry (MS)
Cause: The directory above your current directory is defective. The disk
area is probably corrupt.
Action: Use your back·up diskette to restore the files and the directory
structure.
Cannot recover a Network drive (MS)
Cause: You tried to recover files on a drive that is redirected over the
network.
Action: Do not try to recover file in redirected drives.
Cannot redirect a network printer (MODE)
Cause: You tried to redirect a printer that is a network device.
Action: To delete the connection, type:
A>NET USE dev ID (Return )

Now, retry the redirection.
Cannot rename 'filename' (WIN)
Cause: One of the following occurred:
• The existing file is not in the current directory or on the disk.
• You did not specify a valid destination file name.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Make sure the file you want to copy exists and that you have
named it correctly, then retry the command. You cannot rename a
directory.
• Retry the command, specifying a valid MS· DOS destination file
name.

40-20

Messages

IIIII

Cannot run 'filename' (WIN)
Cause: An error occurred while you were running a program.
Action: Retry the Run command. If the command still does not work,
make sure you are trying to run the correct file. Make sure the file is a
program or invokes a program through the extension settings in the
WIN .INI file.
Cannot run with other applications (WIN)
Cause: The program you selected is a special application that loads and
stays resident and has the Modifies Memory option set in its .PIF file.
Action: Close all applications except the MS-DOS Executive before you
can start this program.
Cannot set volume name (WIN)
Cause: Any of the following things occurred:
• The diskette is write protected.
• The diskette is full.
• The drive is a network device.
Action: Try one of the following:
• If you are trying to set the volume name for a diskette, remove the
write-protect tab. Retry the command.
• Check the directory to see if any files can be removed, then try
again.
Cannot share a SUBSTed drive (SUBST)
Cause: You specified a drive letter that is directed to another drive with
the SUBST command.
Action: Specify the actual path.

40-21

IIIII Messages
Cannot share a SUBSTed drive (PERMIT)
Cause: You specified a drive letter that is directed to another drive with
the SUBST command.
Action: Specify the actual path.

Cannot startup from drive n (FDISK)
Cause: You entered the Mark Start-up Partition Menu when a drive other
than drive 1 was selected.
Action: Make drive 1 the start-up partition.

Cannot SUBST a network drive. (MS)
Cause: You tried to substitute a path name for a network drive.
Action: Specify a drive other than a network drive.

Cannot use PRINT - Use COpy (PRINT)
Cause: You tried to load a second print spooler after one was already
loaded.
Action: Use the COPY command to print the file.

Cannot Write 'filename' (TE)
Cause: An error occurred while writing the specified file or the device
is full.
Action: Try again. Make sure there is enough room on the device.

40-22

Messages

IIIII

Cannot write to device 'devicename' (WIN)
Cause: Any of the following things occurred:
• MS-Windows cannot write to the specified device.
• The specified device is not available for output. Be sure the device
is properly set up (and, if appropriate, turned on).
• There was a network error or disconnect from the device.
Action: Select Retry to try the operation again, or Cancel to end the
operation.
Cannot write to drive 'drivename' (WIN)
Cause: Any of the following things occurred:
• There is no disk in the specified drive.
• The floppy drive door is open, or the diskette is improperly
inserted.
• MS-Windows cannot write to the diskette in the drive you
specified.
• The diskette is defective, damaged, or not formatted.
• There was a network error or disconnect from the device.
Action: Select Retry to try the operation again. If a floppy drive is specified, be sure the diskette is properly inserted. If you continue to receive
the message, select Cancel.

40-22.1

This page intentionally left blank.

Messages 11111

Change Filename to 'filename' (TE)
Cause: You tried to redirect the printer output to a file that does not
have an extension of .PRN. MS-Windows requires this extension.
Action: To accept the indicated file name, click on the Yes button or
press the Return key. To cancel the print request, click on the No button or press the Escape key.
Chdir __ failed, trying alternate method (MS)
Cause: The CHKDSK command cannot return to the directory above
your current directory. It will try to return to that directory by starting
over at the root and traveling down. The disk area is probably corrupt.
Action: Use your back-up diskette to restore the files and the directory
structure.
COMl and COM2 is not available (WIN)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The application that you select requires access, but cannot access,
the serial communications port 1 (COMl) or serial communications port 2 (COM2).
• You do not have a serial communications card installed as COMl
or COM2.
Action: To run the program you selected, you must close any other
application that accesses the COMl or COM2 port. If you do not have a
serial port, you cannot run the selected program.
COMl is not available (WIN)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The application you have select requires access, but cannot access,
the serial communications port 1 (COMl).
• You do not have a serial communications card installed as COM!.
Action: To run the program you selected, you must close any other
application that accesses the COMl port. If you do not have a serial
port, you cannot run the selected program.

40-23

11111 Messages

COM2 is not available (WIN)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The application that you select requires access, but cannot access,
the serial communications port 2 (COM2).
• You do not have a serial communications card installed as COM2.
Action: To run the program you selected, you must close any other
application that accesses the COM2 port. If you do not have a serial
port, you cannot run the selected program.
Comm Port (n) Is In Use [- Exit Set-Up?] (TE)
Cause: The indicated serial communications port is in use by some
other application.
Action: Select another port or terminate the application currently using
the port.
If this message occurs while trying to exit Set-Up, you have the option

of remaining in Set-Up or exiting Set-Up, in which case no connection is
made to the indicated port.
Comm Port 'number' unavailable (TE)
Cause: No communications port exists.
Action: Do not try to use this port for communications.
Command does not exist (NET)
Cause: You typed a command that is not defined.
Action: Use the NET HELP command to display a list of valid commands.
Command operands incorrect (NET)
Cause: You typed a network command and included either too many or
too few operands.
Action: Use the NET HELP command to check the command format.
Retry the command.

40-24

Messages

IIIII

Command parameters incorrect (NET)
Cause: You incorrectly typed a parameter for a command.
Action: Use the NET HELP command to check the command format.
Retry the command.
Connect failed, Access control rejected. (SETHOST)
Cause: The remote host rejected the access control information supplied
when you logged in.
Action: Make sure your user name and password are valid. Retry the log
in to the remote system.
Connect failed, Connection rejected by object. (SETHOST)
Cause: The remote host rejected your attempt to connect to the system.
Action: Contact your system administrator.
Connect failed, Insufficient network resources. (SETHOST)
Cause: There is a problem with the network. This error usually occurs
when the maximum number of links is exceeded.
Action: Increase the number of maximum links for DECnet·DOS using
the NCP DEFINE EXECUTOR command. Restart the system.
Connect failed, Invalid node name format. (SETHOST)
Cause: You supplied an invalid node name.
Action: Supply a valid node name of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters (at
least 1 alphabetic character) and retry the connect operation.
Connect failed, Invalid object name format. (SETHOST)
Cause: You used an invalid object name format.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

40·25

11111 Messages

Connect failed, Local node shutting down. (SETHOST)
Cause: Your local system is ending network activity.
Action: Retry your operation later when the your local system resumes
network activity.

Connect failed, No response from object. (SETHOST)
Cause: There is a problem with the network.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Connect failed, Node unreachable. (SETHOST)
Cause: The remote you are trying to reach is not available for network
activity.
Action: Make sure that DECnet is installed and that the DECnet circuit is
running. To do this, use the NCP SHOW CIRCUIT STATUS command.
Try to log in later when the system is operational.

Connect failed, Object too busy. (SETHOST)
Cause: There was a problem with the network.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Connect failed, Remote node shutting down. (SETHOST)
Cause: The remote node is ending network activity.
Action: Wait until the remote node is running again before you try to
log in to it.

Connect failed, Unrecognized node name. (SETHOST)
Cause: The system did not accept the node name supplied, or the node
name was not defined in your DECnet NCP database.
Action: Supply a valid node name of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters (at
least 1 alphabetic character) and retry the connect operation. If the
name is not defined in the database, use the NCP SET command to
define the node you want to use.

40-26

Messages

IIIII

Connect failed, Unrecognized object. (SETHOST)
Cause: There is a problem with the network.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Connection failed to 'alias' (PERMIT)
Cause: You issued another NET USE command to 'alias'. that would be a
second connection, which the PERMIT command does not allow.
Action: Do not try to connect to an alias that is PERMITed more than
once.

Connection failed to 'alias' - session closed (PERMIT)
Cause: A client system specified an incorrect alias or password in the
NET USE cornman j while trying to connect to your system.
Action: The session is closed and the PERMIT command waits for a successful connection. You must inform the person issuing the NET USE
command that it was invalid.

Content of destination lost before copy (MS)
Cause: A COPY command source file was overwritten prior to completion of the copy.
Action: Retry the COpy command.

Convert lost chains to files (YIN)? (MS)
Cause: The CHKDSK command found lost blocks while performing its
operations.
Action: To recover the lost blocks, create a directory entry, and create a
file named FILEnnnn.CHK, press the Y key.
To free the lost blocks for reallocation, press the N key.

40-27

IIIII Messages
Could not create copy of the file (SELECT)
Cause: A write error occurred before the entire file was copied. The
destination disk is probably full.
Action: Delete some files from the disk, and retry the SELECT command.
Could not read all of the existing file (SELECT)
Cause: A read error occurred before the end of file was reached. The
existing CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT file is bad.
Action: Retry the SELECT command. If this message is displayed again,
restore the file from your back-up diskette.
Could not restore Session 'number' from file SETHOST.n
in the DECnet session. (SETHOST)
Cause: SETHOST cannot access the DECnet directory to restore your
session.
Action: Make sure the DECnet directory was installed correctly. Try to
the restore session again.
Could not save Session 'number' to file SETHOST.n in DECnet
directory. (SETHOST)
Cause: SETHOST cannot access the DECnet directory to save your session, or the disk is full.
Action: Make sure the DECnet directory was installed correctly. If the
disk is full, delete some unnecessary files. Try to save the session again.
Could not write index file SETHOST.n. (SETHOST)
Cause: SETHOST could not access the directory to create an index file,
or the disk is full.
Action: Make sure the DECnet directory was installed correctly. If the
disk is full, delete some unnecessary files. Try to create an index file
again.

40-28

Messages

IIIII

Country code must be three characters long (SELECT)
Cause: You entered a country code that is either too long or too short.
Action: Make sure you enter a three-character country code, and retry
the SELECT command.
Country code must be three digits (SELECT)
Cause: You entered a country code that contains a character other than
a digit.
Action: Make sure you enter the country code correctly, and retry the
SELECT command.
Currently no TIME SERVER available (NET TIME)
Cause: You used the NET TIME command and specified no node name.
There is no server available from which to get the time.
Action: Retry the command and specify a known node name.
Data error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not read from, or write to,
the disk. You cannot use this disk anymore.
Action: To retry the command, press the R key.
If the problem persists and you are performing a back-up, restore, or
verify operation, press the I key to ignore the problem and continue the
operation. There may be a corrupt file.
If you are not performing a back-up, restore, or verify operation and the

problem persists, press the A key to stop the command. Copy all your
files to a new diskette, or back up and reformat your hard disk.
Datalink initialization failure - Hardware failed to initialize.
Cause: A hardware malfunction prevented the network from starting or
initializing.
Action: Your system administrator should contact an authorized service
representative.

40-29

IIIII Messages
Datalink initialization failure - of Unknown Datalink Layer error.
Cause: A malfunction in the datalink layer prevented the network from
starting.
Action: Your system administrator should contact an authorized service
representative.
Datalink initialization failure - No memory available.
Cause: There is insufficient memory available for starting the network.
Action: Restart the system. If the error recurs, ask your system administrator to contact an authorized service representative.
Device is not redirected (NET)
Cause: You specified a printer to which you are not connected.
Action: Connect to the printer using the NET USE command.
df Error (DEBUG)
Cause: You typed two values for one flag.
Action: Retry the RF command and specify only one value per flag.
Directory is joined (MS)
Cause: You tried to execute the CHKDSK command on directories that
are joined.
Action: Run the JOIN command with the jD qualifier to deassign joined
directories.
Directory is not empty (WIN)
Cause: The directory still contains files.
Action: Delete the files from the directory, or move them to a different
location and start again.

40-30

Messages

IIIII

Directory is totally empty, no _ or __ (MS)
Cause: The specified directory did not contain references either to your
current directory or to the directory above your current directory.
Action: Delete the specified directory and recreate it.

Directory not empty (MS)
Cause: You tried to join a directory that was not empty.
Action: Back up or delete all files in the directory and retry the JOIN
command.

'Directoryname' has no files in it (WIN)
Cause: You tried to copy files from an empty directory.
Action: Make sure you are using the correct directory name.

Disk error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: Any of the following occurred:
• The data area of a file is defective.
• Your diskette is bad.
Action: Get a new diskette.

Disk error reading/writing FAT 'fatnumber' (MS)
Cause: One of your file allocation tables has a defective sector. The
MS-DOS operating system automatically uses the other file allocation
table.
Action: Copy all your files to another disk.
Run the CHKDSK program and use the IF qualifier. The CHKDSK command will try to correct the error.

40-30.1

This page intentionally left blank.

Messages 11111

Disk full-write not completed (MS)
Cause: The EDLIN program stopped the E command and returned to the
MS-DOS operating system. Part of the file may have been written to disk
and saved.
Action: Delete the saved portion and restart the editing session. The file
is not available after this error.

Disk full. Edits lost (MS)
Cause: The EDLIN command cannot save your file due to lack of disk
space.
Action: Delete some files to increase the available disk space.

Disk is full (WIN)
Cause: You tried to save a file, or carry out an action that requires
creating a new file, and the disk is full.
This message is also displayed at system start-up time if the MS-DOS
operating system cannot open a file.
Action: Insert another disk, or delete any unwanted files and directories
from the disk, and try again.

40-31

IIIII Messages
Disk is missing necessary files (SETUP)
Cause: The \ WIN\DRV directory has been corrupted.
Action: Reinstall the system following the instructions in the VAXmate
System Administrator's Guide or restore the contents of the directory
from a previous backup.
Disk is not properly initialized (FORMAT)
Cause: You tried to format the hard disk without first initializing it.
Action: Run the FDISK program and initialize the disk.
Disk type unknown (FDISK)
Cause: Any of the following occurred:
• The drive type is unknown.
• The disk was not initialized on a workstation.
• The boot block has been destroyed.
Action: Set the drive type. Then initialize the disk if you have not done
so.
Disk unsuitable for system drive (MS)
Cause: The FORMAT program detected a bad track on the disk where
system files should reside.
Action: Use another disk for the system disk. You can use your original
disk to store files, but do not use it as a system disk.
Diskette controller error (FORMAT)
Cause: A problem occurred with the diskette controller.
Action: Make sure all cables are connected properly and reinitialize the
diskette. If this message is displayed again, call Field Service.

40-32

Messages 11111

Diskette is write protected
Remove write protect tab and press any key to continue
Or type <CTRL/C> to abort FORMAT (FORMAT)
Cause: You tried to format a write-protected diskette.
Action: Remove the write-protect tab and retry the FORMAT command.
Diskette or hardware has an unrecoverable erl,"or
This diskette cannot be formatted (FORMAT)
Cause: Your diskette is bad.
Action: Get a new diskette.
Divide overflow (MS)
Cause: The divide overflow flag was set. This occurred when a program
tried to divide by zero.
Action: Determine which program was running. If the program is one of
ours, call Field Service. If the program is yours, check you source code
for a bug.
Do You Wish to Reconnect to 'servicename' (TE)
Cause: The prior Network Terminal Service session timed out.
Action: To reestablish the prior terminal service, click on Ok (or press
the Return key). You can now log in to the host.
Drive already in use (NET)
Cause: You specified a drive letter in a NET USE command that was
already used.
Action: Check the list of drives using the NET USE command.
Drive cannot be formatted (FORMAT)
Cause: The drive you specified cannot be formatted. It could be a memory drive or a network drive.
Action: Retry the FORMAT command and specify a valid drive.

40-33

IIIII Messages
Drive name must be a letter followed by a colon (SELECT)

Cause: The fourth parameter was not a letter followed by a colon.
Action: Type a valid drive specification. For example:
A) SELECT 001 MCS FR C: (RETURN)

Drive not initialized (FDISK)

Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The drive type is not set properly.
• The drive is not initialized.
Action: Set the drive type. If this message is displayed again, initialize
the drive.
Duplicate file name or file not found (MS)

Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• You try to rename a file to a file name that already exists.
• You specify a file name that cannot found.
Action: Use the DIR command to display the files in the current directory. Retry the REN command and specify valid file names.
Entry error (MS)

Cause: The last command you typed contained a format error.
Action: Retype the command using the correct format.
Entry has a bad attribute (or link or size) (MS)

Cause: The specified subdirectory has a bad attribute, link, or size. The
message may be preceded by one o.r two periods to indicate which
subdirectory is invalid.
Action: Run the CHKDSK program and specify the IF qualifier. The
CHKDSK command will try to correct the error.

40-34

Messages

IIIII

Error closing file: 'nodename::filename'
Because ... (NFl')
Cause: NFl' cannot close the file you specified.
Action: Go to the secondary message for a specific explanation.
Error formatting target disk
Disk copy failed (DISKCOPY)
Cause: An error occurred when the DISKCOPY command tried to format
the target diskette.
Action: Use another target diskette and retry the DISKCOPY command.
Error in .EXE file (running under MS-DOS)
Cause: The .EXE file you wanted the MS·DOS operating system to load
has an invalid internal format.
Action: Get another copy of the .EXE file from your back-up diskette.
Error in .EXE file (running under MS-Windows)
Cause: You tried to run an application program from COMMAND.COM
that has its "directly modifies memory" switch set. You cannot run this
application program from MS-Windows if any other application programs are running. (COMMAND.COM is an application program in this
instance.)
Action: Close all application programs except for the MS-DOS Executive. Rerun the application program.
Error in allocation amount (NFl')
Cause: You used the jALLOCATION qualifier without a value.
Action: Retry the command and specify a value for the jALLOCATION
qualifier.

40-35

IIIII Messages
Error in allocation quantity (NFT)
Cause: You used the /ALLOCATION qualifier with the COpy command
and the remote node did not accept the parameter's value.
Action: Specify a valid COPY/ALLOCATION command. Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the remote system's system
administrator.

Error in Directory of: 'nodename::'(NFT)
Cause: There was a problem with the remote directory you specified.
Action: Go to the secondary message for a specific explanation.

Error in maximum record size (NFT)
Cause: You used the /MRS qualifier with the COpy command and the
remote node did not accept the value you specified.
Action: Specify a valid COPY/MRS command. Read the documentation
for the remote system and contact the remote system's system
administrator.

Error in VFC size (NFT)
Cause: You used the jVFC qualifier with the COpy command and specify a fixed-length header which the remote node did not accept.
Action: Specify a valid COpyjVFC command. Read the documentation
for the remote system and contact the remote system's system
administrator.

Error Opening File: 'nodename::filename'
Because .. _ (NFT)
Cause: NFT could not open the remote file you specified.
Action: Go to the secondary message for a specific explanation.

40-36

Messages

IIIII

Error Printing File: 'nodename::filename'
Because ... (NFf)

Cause: NFf had a problem queuing the remote file to a printer.
Action: Go to the secondary message for a specific explanation.
Error reading 'filename' (LCOUNTRY)

Cause: The LCOUNTRY program could read file 'filename'.
Action: Retry the LCOUNTRY command. If this message is displayed
again, restore the file from your back-up diskette.
Error reading file 'filename' (FONT) (KEYB) (SORT)

Cause: The program could not read the file you specify.
Action: Retry the command. If this message is displayed again, restore
the file from your back-up diskette.
Error Reading from: 'nodename::filename'
Because ... (NFf)

Cause: NFT could not copy from the remote file you specified.
Action: Go to the secondary message for a specific explanation.
Error Submitting File: 'nodename::filename'
Because ... (NFf)

Cause: NFT had a problem running the remote command file you
specified.
Action: Go to the secondary message for a specific explanation.
Error writing allocation table (FORMAT)

Cause: An error occurred while writing the file allocation table.
Action: Reformat the diskette and retry the FORMAT program. If this
message is displayed again, you cannot use this diskette anymore.

40-37

IIIII Messages
Error writing boot record to disk (FORMAT)
Cause: An error occurred while writing the boot record to the disk.
Action: Use another disk as a system disk. You cannot use this disk as a
system disk.
Error writing session log file to disk (SETHOST)
Cause: SETHOST could not access the DECnet directory, or if the disk is
full.
Action: Make sure the DECnet directory was installed correctly. If the
disk is full, delete some unnecessary files. Try to create a log file again.
Error writing to 'filename' (NET)
Cause: An error occurred while writing to the specified file.
Action: Check the remote computer and retry the command.
Error writing to device (MS)
Cause: You tried to send too much data to a device. The MS-DOS operating system is unable to write the data to the specified device.
Action: Make sure the device is on line and the cables are connected (if
the device is a printer). If the device is a printer, turn of the workstation and turn it back on. You may have to restore the back-up copy of
your file(s).
Error Writing to: 'nodename::filename'
Because _.. (NFT)
Cause: NFl' could not copy to the remote file you specified.
Action: Go to the secondary message for a specific explanation.
'Error' error reading file (MS)
Cause: The specified file could not be read. Either the file handle was
not open for reading, or the file handle was invalid.
Action: Retry the command. If this message is displayed again, restore
the file from your back-up diskette.

40-38

Messages

IIIII

Error: Cannot APPEND to list of files. (NFT)
Cause: You tried to append one or more files to the end of more than
one file. You can have only one output file.
Action: Retry the command and specify only one output file.
Error: Cannot APPEND to wildcard file name. (NFT)
Cause: You included a wildcard in the output file name when you tried
an append operation.
Action: Retry the command and specify the output file name and file
extension.
Error: Cannot COpy from wildcard specification to explicit files.
(NFT)
Cause: You tried to copy multiple files, using a wildcard, when you
wanted the output files to have specific file names and file extensions.
Action: Retry the command and do not use any wildcards.
Error: Cannot SUBMIT list of files. (NFT)
Cause: You tried to submit more than one remote command file (in a
list) to be executed on the remote node.
Action: Submit only one remote command file.
Error: Cannot SUBMIT local file. (NFT)
Cause: You tried to execute a local command file.
Action: Submit only a remote command file.
Error: Command string too long. (NFT)
Cause: The command you typed is longer than 256 characters.
Action: Type a command string that is shorter than 256 characters.

40·39

IIIII Messages
Error: File lists not supported for DELETE command. (NFT)
Cause: You tried to delete a list of files.
Action: Retry the DELETE command and use wildcards to delete more
than one file.

Error: File lists not supported for DIRECTORY command. (NFT)
Cause: You tried to display a directory of a list of files.
Action: Retry the DIRECTORY command and use wildcards to display
multiple file names.

Error: Illegal ALLOCATION quantity: 'text' (NFT)
Cause: You used the /ALLOCATION qualifier with the COPY command
and specified a non-numeric value.
Action: Retry the command and specify a numeric value.

Error: Illegal Maximum Record Size: 'value' (NFT)
Cause: You used the /MRS qualifier with the COPY command and specified either a non-numeric value or a value outside the range 0 through
1024.
Action: Retry the command and specify a numeric value inside the range
o through 1024.

Error: Illegal VFC amount: 'value' (NFT)
Cause: You used the jVFC qualifier and specified either a non-numeric
value or a value outside the range 0 through 255.
Action: Retry the command and specify a numeric value inside the range
o through 255.

Error: Quoted local files are illegal. (NFT)
Cause: You enclosed a local file specification in quotation marks. Use
quotation marks only with remote file specifications.
Action: Retry the command and do not enclose the local file specification in quotation marks.

40-40

Messages

IIIII

Error: Too many file names in list. Limit is 10. (NFI')

Cause: You included more than 10 file names in a list.
Action: Make sure the list contains no more than 10 file names.
Error: Two paths in a row. (NFl')

Cause: You specified more than one path name without a corresponding
file name in between.
Action: Specify a file name after the path name and before another path
name.
Error: Unable to type non-ASCII file: 'filename' (NFI')

Cause: You tried to type a file that has a non·ASCII format.
Action: Type a file that has an ASCII·file format.
Error: Unrecognized ICC option: 'option' (NFl')

Cause: You used the ICC qualifier and specified an incorrect record
attribute.
Action: Specify one of the following attributes:
None

No attributes

Implied carriage return/line feed

FIN

FORTRAN carriage control

PRN

Fixed header with carriage control

Error: Unrecognized command: 'command' (NFI')

Cause: You incorrectly typed an NFT command or tried to use a com·
mand that NFT could not recognize.
Action: Check your typing, and retry the command. If this message is
displayed again, make sure you are typing a valid NFT command.

40·41

11111 Messages

Error: Unrecognized switch: 'switch' (NFT)
Cause: You incorrectly typed the name of a switch or used a switch that
NFT could not recognize.
Action: Check you typing and retry the command. If this message is
displayed again, make sure you are typing a valid switch.

Error: Wildcards are not supported in file name lists. (NFT)
Cause: You tried to list files using wildcards.
Action: Do not use wildcards in file name lists.

Errors found, F parameter not specified
Corrections will not be written to disk (MS)
Cause: You did not specify the IF qualifier when trying to correct errors
using the CHKDSK program.
Action: Retry the CHKDSK command and specify the IF qualifier.

Errors on list device indicate that it may be off-line
Please check it (MS)
Cause: Your printer is not turned on.
Action: Turn the printer on and retry the operation.

EXEC failure (MS)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The MS-DOS operating system finds an error reading a command.
• The FILES command in the CONFIG.SYS file is set too low.
Action: Increase the value of the FILES command in the CONFIG .SYS
file. Restart the MS-DOS operating system.

40-42

Messages

IIIII

Fe: cannot open 'filename' - No such file or directory
Cause: One of the files you specified does not exist.
Action: Check your directory for the correct file name.

Fe: incompatible switches
Cause: You specified switches that are not compatible. For example,
specifying IB and IL together.
Action: Retry the FC command and specify only compatible switches.

FC: out of memory
Cause: You did not have enough memory to perform the file compare.
Action: You can use a memory drive for temporary files. You can also
add more memory to your workstation.

FeB unavailable reading/writing drive 'drivename' eMS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system detected an error while trying to
access a file control block. This is often due to a defective disk.
Action: Press the R key. To stop the program, press the A key.

File allocation table bad eMS)
Cause: The disk is defective.
Action: Use the CHKDSK command to check the disk. Get a new disk
and copy what you can from the disk with the bad file allocation table.

File allocation table bad drive 'drivename' eMS)
Cause: The disk is defective.
Action: Run the CHKDSK command to check it.

40-43

IIIII Messages
File cannot be converted (EXE2BIN)
Cause: The input file was not in the correct format.
Action: See information about the EXE2BIN command in Chapter 32.
File cannot be copied onto itself (MS)
Cause: The source file name you specified is the same as the destination
file name.
Action: Specify a different destination file name.
File creation error (BR)
Cause: One of the following occurred:
• You are out of space.
• You reached the maximum number of directories.
• The file is.a read-only file and cannot be replaced.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Run the CHKDSK command to see how much space is left.
• Delete some files.
• Delete some directories.
• Use the ATTRIB command to determine whether the file is
read-only, and if so, use the ATTRIB command to change it.
File is not a back-up file (BR)
Cause: The RESTORE command tried to restore a file that did not have
the BACKUP header on it. The file was not saved using the BACKUP
command.
Action: Use the COPY command to copy the file to your directory.
File is not a graphic font file 'filename' (GRAFTABL)
Cause: You specified a file that was not a graphic font file.
Action: Make sure you typed the correct file name on the command
line. Then make sure the file exists. Retry the GRAFTABL command.

40-44

Messages 11111

File is READ-ONLY (MS)
Cause: You tried to change a file that is a read-only file.
Action: Use the ATIRIB command to clear the read-only attribute.
File not found 'filename' (MS) (ATTRIB) (BR) (Fe) (FONT)
(KEYB) (LCOUNTRY) (NET)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not find the file you
specified.
Action: Make sure the name is correct and that the file exists in the
directory on the disk. Make sure the path is valid.
File not found: 'filename' (NFT)
Cause: NFT could not find the file you specified.
Action: Check your typing. If this message is displayed again, make sure
the file exists.
Filename must be specified (MS)
Cause: You did not specify a file name when you started the EDLIN
program.
Action: Retry the EDLIN command and specify a file name.
'Filename' contains non-contiguous blocks (MS)
Cause: The file or files you named are not written contiguously on the
disk.
Action: Run the CHKDSK command and specify the IF qualifier.
'Filename' file not found (MS)
Cause: You switched disks before your file in the print queue started to
print.
Action: Retry the PRINT command.

40-45

IIIII Messages
'Filename' is cross-linked on cluster (MS)
Cause: The file allocation table for the file was corrupt.
Action: Run the CHKDSK command and specify the IF qualifier. If this
message is displayed again, back up and reformat the disk, and then
restore the files to it.
'Filename' is not in proper format (LCOUNTRY)
Cause: The file you specified is not a valid .COU file.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly. If you did, make
sure the country data file is in the proper format (see the VAXmate
Technical Reference Manual).
'Filename' too large (LCOUNTRY)
Cause: The country data file you specified is too large. The internal
country data table is limited to 600 bytes.
Action: Split the file into two smaller files. Retry the LCOUNTRY
command.
FIND: File not found (MS)
Cause: You specified a file that did not exist.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly, and make sure the
file exists.
FIND: Invalid number of parameters (MS)
Cause: You specified either too many or too few parameters on the
command line.
Action: Retry the FIND command and specify the correct number of
parameters.
FIND: Invalid parameter (MS)
Cause: You specified an invalid parameter.
Action: Retry the FIND command.

40-46

Messages

IIIII

FIND: Read error in 'filename' (MS)
Cause: The FIND program could not read the specified file.
Action: Retry the command. If this message is displayed again, restore
the back-up copy of the file.

FIND: Syntax error (MS)
Cause: You typed a command incorrectly.
Action: Make sure you typed the command correctly. Retry the FIND
command.

First cluster number is invalid
Entry truncated (MS)
Cause: The file directory entry contained an invalid pointer to the data
area. If you specified the IF qualifier, the file is truncated to a zerolength file.
Action: Make sure the file is still valid and the data is not corrupt.

Fixups needed - base segment 'hexnumber' (MS)
Cause: The source (.EXE) file contains information indicating that a
load segment is required for the file.
Action: Specify the absolute segment address at which the finished module is to be located.

Font code plus keyboard code must be less than 9 characters (SELECT)
Cause: The combined length of the second and third parameters was
greater than 8 characters.
Action: Make sure the second and third parameters have a combined
length of no more than 8 characters.

For cannot be nested (MS)
Cause: You nested FOR commands in a batch file.
Action: Remove the nested FOR command from the batch file.

40-47

IIIII Messages
Format failure (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not format the disk.
Action: Read the explanation and take the appropriate action. Retry the
FORMAT command.
General failure reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: This message can be displayed for a variety of problems. This
error usually requires a knowledgeable programmer to fix the problem.
Action: To retry the command, press the R key.
To stop the command, press the A key.
Hard disk does not respond (FORMAT)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• Your hard disk is not working.
• Your workstation does not contain a hard disk.
Action: Reset the workstation by pressing Ctrl/Alt/Del. If this message is
displayed again, call Field Service.
Hard disk is not initialized or partitioned (FORMAT)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The hard disk is not initialized.
• The hard disk is not partitioned.
Action: Initialize and partition the hard disk before you try to format it.
Has invalid cluster, file truncated
Incompatible system size (MS)
Cause: The system files IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS occupy more space on
the source disk than is available on the destination disk.
Action: Back up the destination disk. Reformat it using the IS qualifier.
Restore the files to the destination disk.

40-48

Messages

IIIII

Host is down. (NFT)
Cause: You tried to access a remote host that is not operating.
Action: Try to access the remote host later.

Incorrect DOS version
This program requires MS-DOS V3.10 (ATTRIB) (BR)
(DISKCOPY) (Fe) (FONT)
(FORMAT) (K'EYB) (MS) (SORT)
Cause: You tried to use an incorrect version of the MS-DOS operating
system on your workstation.
Action: Use DIGITAL's MS-DOS Version 3.10 operating system. Contact
your system administrator to obtain the correct version of the MS-DOS
operating system.

Incorrect MS-DOS version (NET)
Cause: You tried to install a network with an inappropriate version of
the MS-DOS operating system.
Action: Use DIGITAL's MS-DOS Version 3.10 operating system. Contact
your system administrator to obtain the correct version of the MS-DOS
operating system.

Incorrect number of operands (NET)
Cause: There is no keyword specified in the NET command.
Action: Use the NET HELP command to check the command format.

Incorrect number of parameters (MS) (SELECT)
Cause: You specified either too many or too few parameters on the
command line.
Action: Check the command format and retry the command. Make sure
you specify the correct number of parameters.

40-49

11111 Messages

Incorrect parameter (MS)
Cause: One of the parameters you specified is invalid.
Action: Make sure the parameter is valid and typed correctly.
Initial directory not found (WIN)
Cause: The initial directory for this program could not be found or was
invalid.
Action: Check the PIF file for the program and be sure that the initial
directory setting is correct.
Insert 'programname' or 'diskname' in drive 'drivename' (WIN)
Cause: MS-Windows needed a program or file that was not on the disk
in the active drive.
Action: Insert the specified disk and select OK.
Insert DOS diskette in drive 'drivename' and strike any key when
ready (MS)
Cause: You specified the following command, but the disk in drive
'drivename' does not contain the MS-DOS operating system files:
A>FORMAT IS ~

Action: Insert a system diskette in drive 'drivename'.
Insert system diskette in drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: You did not have a system diskette in the diskette drive.
Action: Insert a system diskette into the diskette drive.

40-50

Messages

IIIII

Insufficient disk space (MS) (SETUP) (SORT)
Cause: There is not enough disk space to complete the specified
operation.
Action: Delete some files, get a new diskette, or create the file on
another partition.
If you are running SETUP and this message is displayed, delete some

files from your destination disk and run SETUP again. SETUP requires
approximately 446700 bytes on the destination disk to run successfully.

Insufficient memory (MS) (BR) (SORT)
Cause: There was not enough memory to run the specified command.
You may have too many terminate and stay resident programs or your
directory structure may be too complex.
Action: Because certain MS-DOS commands and programs are terminate
and stay resident, restarting the workstation may free enough memory to
run the desired program. If not, you must edit the CONFIG.SYS file,
remove some of them, then restart the workstation. Also, if you installed
any device drivers, delete them from the CONFIG.SYS file.

Insufficient room in root directory Erase files in root and repeat the
CHKDSK command. (MS)
Cause: You have reached the maximum number of files allowable in the
root directory.
Action: Delete some files in the root directory, or move some files to
subdirectories.

40-51

IIIII Messages
Intermediate file error during pipe (MS)
Cause: One of the temporary files used by the PIPE command had an
error.
Action: Retry the PIPE command. If this message is displayed again, get
another diskette. Copy all files to the diskette, and retry the PIPE
command.

Internal error (Fe)
Cause: The FC utility had an internal logic error.
Action: Retry the FC command.

Invalid alias (PERMIT)
Cause: You specified an alias which contains an invalid character.
Action: Make sure you type only valid characters in the alias. The alias
can have the characters A-Z, 0-9, \ -, _, ., %, &, -, and $.

Invalid alias or password (NET)
Cause: You specified an alias or password which contains an invalid
character.
Action: Make sure you type only valid characters in the alias and password. The alias can have the characters A-Z, 0-9, ", -, _, ., %, &, -, and
$.

Invalid characters in volume label (LABEL)
Cause: You typed invalid characters in the volume label.
Action: Make sure the volume label contains only letters and numbers.

Invalid command line parameters_ (MODE)
Cause: You typed invalid parameters on the command line.
Action: Check for misspelling and for missing punctuation. Retry the
command.

40-52

Messages

IIIII

Invalid COMMAND. COM
Insert COMMAND. COM disk in default drive
and strike any key when ready (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system needs to reload the COMMAND.COM file from disk. However, either the MS-DOS operating system cannot find the COMMAND.COM file on the disk, or the copy
found is invalid.
Action: Insert a disk which contains a copy of the COMMAND.COM file
into the default drive.

Invalid COMMAND. COM
Insert COMMAND.COM disk in drive 'drivename'
and strike any key when ready (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system needs to reload the COMMAND.COM file from disk. However, the MS-DOS operating system cannot find the COMMAND.COM file on the disk, or the copy found is
invalid.
Action: Insert a disk into drive 'drivename' which contains a copy of the
COMMAND.COM file.

Invalid computer name (NET)
Cause: You tried to connect to a computer that did not have an entry in
the DECNODE.DAT file.
Action: Run the NET DEFINE command to add a node name to the
DECNODE.DAT file. Run the NET LIST command to display the node
names in the DECNODE.DAT file.

Invalid country code (MS)
Cause: You specified an invalid number for the country code in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
Action: Specify a valid country code.

40-53

IIIII Messages
Invalid date
Enter new date (mm-dd-yy): (MS)
Cause: You entered invalid numbers or separators for the date.
Action: Enter a valid date.
Invalid date received from node 'nodename' (NET TIME)
Cause: An invalid time was received from the node 'nodename'.
Action: Retry the NET TIME command.
Invalid destination drive specification (BR)
Cause: You specified a destination drive that does not exist on your
system.
Action: Specify a valid destination drive.
Invalid device (MS) (NET)
Cause: You specified an invalid device.
Action: Make sure you type the device name correctly.
Invalid directory (MS)
Cause: You specified a directory that is either invalid, or nonexistent.
Action: Run the DIR command to display a list of files and directories.
Invalid disk change reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: You changed a disk in a drive when it was not allowed.
Action: To retry the operation, reinsert the disk into the drive and press
the R key.
Invalid drive in search path (MS)
Cause: The drive does not exist.
Action: SpeCify only valid drives in the search path.

40-54

Messages

IIIII

Invalid drive or file name (MS)
Cause: You specified an invalid drive or file name.
Action: Specify a valid drive or file name.

Invalid drive specification (LABEL) (MS)
Ca.use: You specified an invalid drive.
Action: Specify a valid drive.

Invalid graphic font file name (GRAFTABL)
Cause: You specified an invalid font file name.
Action: Specify a valid font file name. Use the DIR command to display
a list of files in the current directory.

Invalid input line (GRAPHICS)
Cause: You specified invalid information on the command line.
Action: Retry the GRAPHICS command and specify valid information.

Invalid number of parameters (FC) (MS) (BR)
Cause: You specified either too many or too few parameters on the
command line.
Action: Retry the command and specify the correct number of
parameters.

Invalid parameter (ATTRIB) (BR) (FC) (FONT) OOIN) (KEYB) (MS)
(SUBST) (SORT)
Cause: One of the parameters you used is invalid.
Action: Make sure you:
• Entered the parameter correctly
• Did not join drives created by the SUBST command
• Did not use the SUBST command on joined paths
Then, retry the command.

40-55

IIIII Messages
Invalid path (BR)
Cause: You specified a path that does not exist.
Action: To see the current valid paths, type:
A> PATH ( Return )

Invalid path or file name (MS)
Cause: You specified an invalid path or file name.
Action: Specify a valid path or file name.
Invalid path, not directory, or directory not empty (MS)
Cause: You tried to remove a directory that is any of the following:
• Invalid
• Not a directory
• Not empty
Action: Try one of the following:
• Specify a valid path.
• Use the RMDIR command and specify a valid directory.
• Empty the directory before you try to remove it.
Invalid protocol negotiated from node 'nodename' (NET TIME)
Cause: The remote node you specified could not communicate with
your node.
Action: Retry the NET TIME command and specify another remote node.
Invalid Set-Up file (TE)
Cause: The Set-Up configuration file was not the same version as the
terminal emulator. The information stored was invalid.
Action: Delete the Set-Up configuration file and create a new one.

40-56

Messages

11111

Invalid source drive specification (BR)

Cause: You specified a source drive that did not exist.
Action: Make sure the source drive you specify is on your system.
Invalid source drive specified (DISKCOPY)

Cause: You specified a source drive that did not contain a floppy diskette. You can only use the DISKCOPY command with floppy diskettes.
Action: Retry the DISKCOPY command and specify drive A as the source
drive.
Invalid sub-directory entry (MS)

Cause: The subdirectory you specified did not exist or was invalid.
Action: Make sure the subdirectory exists and is valid. Retry the
command.
Invalid target drive specified (DISKCOPY)

Cause: You specified a target drive that did not contain a floppy diskette. You can only use the DISKCOPY command with floppy diskettes.
Action: Retry the DISKCOPY command and specify drive A as the destination drive.
Invalid time (MS)

Cause: You specified an invalid time in response to the time prompt.
Action: Enter a valid time.
Invalid time received from node 'nodename' (NET TIME)

Cause: An invalid time was received from the node 'nodename'.
Action: Retry the NET TIME command.

40-57

11111 Messages

Invalid working directory (MS)
Cause: Your disk is bad.
Action: Replace the disk or make another copy from your back-up
diskette.

Label not found (MS)
Cause: The batch file you just executed contained a GOTO to a nonexistent label.
Action: Edit the batch file and make sure the GOTO command contains
a label that exists in the file.

Last back-up diskette not inserted (BR)
Cause: You specified the jA qualifier, but did not insert the last
diskette.
Action: Find the last diskette and insert it into the diskette drive.

Last file not backed up (BR)
Cause: The last file was not backed up for any of the following reasons:
• You pressed CtrljC.
• You need to insert a new diskette .
• Your hard disk has no more space.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Back up the displayed file.
• Insert a new diskette.
• Delete some files from the hard disk and retry the BACKUP
command.

40-58

Messages

IIIII

LAT - Datalink Initialization has failed.
Cause: You tried to start the LAT before installing Datalink (OLL).
Action: Type:
DLL~

Now try to start the LAT again.

LAT - Error specifying service table size - using default.
Cause: You tried to set the service table size to an invalid value when
you started the LAT.
Action: Try to start the LAT again with a valid value for the service table
size.

LAT - Error specifying group codes - using default.
Cause: You tried to set the group codes to an invalid value when you
started the LAT.
Action: Try to start the LAT again with a valid value for the group codes.

LAT - Error specifying retransmit limit - using default.
Cause: You tried to set the retransmit limit to an invalid value when
you started the LAT.
Action: Try to start the LAT again with a valid value for the retransmit
limit.

Line too long (MS)
Cause: In your attempt to replace a line, you expanded the line beyond
the 253-character limit.
Action: Divide the your message into two lines and retry the REPLACE
command.

40-59

IIIII Messages
Loading fonts is not supported on this machine (FONT)
Cause: You tried to load a font file on a machine other than a
workstation.
Action: Use the FONT command only on a VAXmate workstation.

Loading keyboard maps is not supported on this machine (KEYB)
Cause: You tried to load a keyboard map file on a machine other than a
workstation.
Action: Use the KEYB command only on a VAXmate workstation.

Lock violation reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: A program tried to access a file currently being used by another
program.
Action: To stop the operation, press the A key.
You can also wait a few seconds, and retry the operation by pressing the
Rkey.

40-60

Messages 11111

x lost clusters found in y chains.
Convert lost chains to files (YIN)? (MS) (CHKDSK)
Cause: The CHKDSK command found lost files for which the directory
entry was lost. This loss usually occurs if you exit a program without
closing the files.
Action: If you use the IF qualifier and respond Y to this prompt, the
CHKDSK program creates a file (FILE????CHK) in the root directory for
you to resolve the problem.
If you did not use the IF qualifier, the CHKDSK program does nothing.
If you use the IF qualifier and respond N to this prompt, the following

is displayed:
x bytes disk space free

If you do not use the IF qualifier and respond N to this prompt, the
following is displayed:
x bytes disk space would be free

MDRIVE installation failed (MDRIVE)
Cause: A memory drive could not be installed on your workstation.
Action: Look at the rest of the message displayed on the screen to determine why the installation failed.

Memory allocation error
Cannot load MS-DOS, system halted (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not be loaded at system
start-up time.
Action: Restart the MS·DOS operating system. If this message is displayed again, call Field Service.

40·60.1

IIIII Messages
MORE: Incorrect DOS version (MS)
Cause: You tried to use the MORE command on a version of the MS-DOS
operating system that does not support it.
Action: Use the MORE command with MS-DOS Version 3.10 or later.

Multiple destinations not allowed (WIN)
Cause: You tried to copy a single file to more than one new file, or
tried to rename a single file with more than one new name.
Action: Copy or rename the file to a single destination.

Multiple files not allowed (WIN)
Cause: You specified too many file names for a command.
Action: Retry the command and specify only one file name.

Must specify destination line number (MS)
Cause: You did not specify a destination line number when you copied
and inserted a line using EDLIN.
Action: Specify a destination line number when you copy and insert a
line using EDLIN.

Must specify ON or OFF (MS)
Cause: You did not specify the ON or the OFF parameter.
Action: Retry the command and specify either ON or OFF.

40-60.2

Messages

IIIII

Name is too long for local file. Limit is 12 characters.
Enter local file name: (NFf)
Cause: You typed a name that is too long for the MS-DOS operating
system to accept.
Action: Limit the local file name to 12 characters or less.

'Name' is not a registered workstation name (PERMIT)
Cause: You specified a name that was not in the permanent or volatile
database.
Action: Define the workstation name using the NET DEFINE command.

Need more disk space (WIN)
Cause: You tried to load a standard application that required
MS-Windows to swap another application to disk. There was insufficient
disk space for swapping.
Action: Close one of the other standard applications you have running.
Retry the command. If there is still limited space remaining on the
swap disk, you may have to delete some files.

Need WINOLDAP files to run program (WIN)
Cause: The program you selected requires the MS-Windows system files
WINOLDAP.MOD and WINOLDAP.GRB to run.
Action: These files should be in the same directory as your other
MS-Windows system files. If this message is displayed again, check the
directory to make certain that they are available, and then try running
the program again.

40-61

IIIII Messages
NET 801: Remote computer not listening

Cause: You tried to do any of the following:
• Use a network device that someone else is using through a PERMIT
operation.
• Access a computer that is busy servicing other requests
• Use a network device on a server that has no sessions available
Action: Retry the command or operation. If this message is displayed
again, the server probably has no sessions remaining to service your
requests.
Make sure the server is running on the remote computer.
NET 803: Network path not found

Cause: The remote node is unknown or unreachable.
Action: Make sure the server is running on the remote computer. If this
message is displayed again, contact your system administrator.
NET 804: Network busy

Cause: The network is busy and cannot perform your request.
Action: Send your request later.
NET 80S: Network device no longer exists

Cause: The device you tried to access is no longer available. This message is displayed for any of the following reasons:
• You explicitly try to access the device.
• You start a program and the invalid drive exists in your PATH
statement.
• Your program ends.

40-62

Messages 11111

Action: Stop your request. Type the following command to see a list of
the devices you are using:
A>NET USE Return)

Type the following command for all devices that have a status of
ERROR:
A> NET

U~;E

di"V:

10 C~elt;;,")

Check with the server's system administrator about the availability of
the device.
NET 808: Incorrect response from network
Cause: The remote computer could not perform the task you wanted it
to perform.
Action: Make sure you are specifying the correct remote computer for
the command or task you are attempting. If not, specify the correct
computer.
NET 809: Network request not supported
Cause: The remote computer could not perform the task you wanted it
to perform.

Action: Make sure you are specifying the correct remote computer for
the command or task you are attempting. If not, specify the correct
computer.
NET 810: Unexpected network error
Cause: An unexpected network error occurred.
Action: Try to stop your application. Then, restart the MS-DOS operating
system by pressing:

Restart the workstation network software. Connect to the network again.
If this message is displayed again, contact your system administrator.

40-63

IIIII Messages
NET 812: Print queue full

Cause: The print queue was full.
Action: Send your request later.
NET 813: Not enough space for print file

Cause: The computer sharing the printer did not have enough disk
space to store the file until it was printed.
Action: Send your request later.
NET 814: Print file was canceled

Cause: The print file you submitted to a network printer was canceled
by the user at the server computer.
Action: To stop the print operation, press the A key. Retry the print
operation later.
NET 816: Access denied

Cause: Any of the following occurred:
• The password you specified was incorrect.
• The server did not allow your connection.
• The node you tried to access has been improperly defined.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Make sure you typed the password correctly. If you did, the password may have changed. Contact the server's system administrator
for the correct password.
• Make sure you are allowed to access this resource. Contact your
system administrator about access privileges.
• Contact your system administrator.
If you are a system administrator, use the VAXmate server CLEAR NODE

command to remove the node from the permanent and the volatile
databases. Then, add the node to both databases using the VAXmate
server DEFINE NODE command.

40-64

Messages

IIIII

NET 817: Network device type incorrect
Cause: The local device type was different from the workstation network device type. You tried to use a network disk or directory and used
device LPTI through LPT3 as a DOS name, or you used a network
printer and used device A through Z as a DOS device name.
Action: Send the request using the correct device name.
NET 818: Network name not found
Cause: The network name you specified was incorrect.
Action: Make sure you spelled the name correctly. If you did, the name
is no longer on the network.
NET 819: Network name limit exceeded
Cause: You tried to redirect too many devices.
Action: Disconnect some of the network devices and directories you are
currently connected to using the NET USE command. You can also
increase the number of redirections by adding the fL:n qualifier to your
NET START RDR command line. The default for "n" is four.
NET 820: Network session limit exceeded
Cause: You exceeded the maximum number of allowable logical links
currently set in the DECnet driver.
Action: Change the number of allowable links using the NCP command
DEFINE EXEC MAXIMUM LINKS n. The default for "n" is four. The new
value takes effect after you restart your workstation.
NET 822: Print of disk redirection is paused
Cause: The printer or disk redirector was paused. Your request could
not be performed at that time.
Action: To continue print or disk redirection, type:
A) I'lFT

Send your request later.

40-65

11111

Messages

NET 82;: Network data fault

Cause: You tried to write data to a network disk or diskette that was
full.
Action: To stop the operation, press the A key. Tell the user at the
server computer that the disk or diskette is full.
Network already started (NET)

Cause: You tried to start the network after it was already started.
Action: Continue to use the network. If you cannot continue using the
network, restart the MS-DOS operating system by pressing:
A) ( Ctrl/AltlCel )

Network error (NET)

Cause: An unexpected network error occurred. Because of this error,
your command cannot be completed.
Action: Load the network before attempting an NCP operation.
Network is down_ (NFl)

Cause: You tried to perform network activity on a network that was not
currently available.
Action: Try to access the network later.
Network Is In Use [- Exit Set-Up?] (TE)

Cause: You tried to open a fifth session. Only four simultaneous Network Terminal Service sessions are allowed.
Action: Find another application using a Network Terminal Service
(usually another instance of the VT220 terminal emulator) and log out
of the host or terminate the application.
If this message occurs while trying to exit Set-Up, you have the option

of remaining in Set-Up or exiting Set-Up, in which case no connection
will be made to the network.

40-66

Messages

IIIII

Network not installed (NET)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The install check for the network fails. You must have the appropriate hardware and software to run the network.
• You try to execute a network command without starting the
network.
Action: Make sure you have the appropriate hardware and software to
run the network. Then type:
A>NET START RDR (Return)

Retry the command.
Network not started (NET TIME) (NET USE)
Cause: You tried to execute the NET TIME or NET USE command but
the network was not started.
Action: Start the network by typing:
NET START RDR ( Return )

Network Terminal Services driver not installed (TE)
Cause: The Network Terminal Services driver was not installed prior to
starting MS-Windows or the VT240 terminal emulator.
Action: Close the session, install the driver, and restart the session. To
install the driver, type:
A>NET START LAT ( Return )

New file (MS)
Cause: EDLIN could not find the file you specified.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly.

40-67

IIIII Messages
No entries in list (NET)
Cause: You used the NET USE command without first connecting to any
network resources.
Action: Type:
A>NET START RDR (Return )

Retry the NET USE command.
No files match 'filename' (MS)
Cause: You specified a file name for a file that could not be found.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly.
No files were found to back up (BR)
Cause: No files were found on the specified back-up source disk to back
up.
Action: Make sure you typed the file specification correctly. If you did
not type the file specification correctly, retry the BACKUP command
with the correct file specification.
No files were found to restore (BR)
Cause: No files were found on the source disk to restore.
Action: Make sure you typed the file specification correctly. If you did
type the file specification correctly, retry the RESTORE command and
specify the correct file (s) .

40-68

Messages 11111

No free file handles
Cannot start COMMAND.COM, exiting (MS)
Cause: There were not enough free file handles for the COMMAND.COM
file to operate properly.
Action: Restart the MS-DOS operating system by pressing:

If this message is displayed again, increase the value of the FILES command in the CONFIG.SYS file.
No more files can be opened (WIN)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system is already runnihg the maximum
number of files.
Action: Close one or more of the applh::ations you are running and try
running the selected program again.
No number stored (TE)
Cause: You tried to dial a number (A-]) not stored in Set-Up.
Action: Store the number using the Telephone Set-Up screen.
No paper error writing device 'devicename' (MS)
Cause: The printer is out of paper.
Action: Fill the printer with paper.
No room for system on destination disk (MS)
Cause: There was not enough room for the system files on the destination disk.
Action: Save the contents of the disk. Then, delete all files from the
disk. Finally, run the SYS command to copy the system files to the disk.

40-69

IIIII Messages
No room in directory for file (MS)

Cause: You tried to save a file in a full root directory.
Action: Retry the command and save the file in a subdirectory. Subdirectories are not as limited as the root directory.
No route to host. (NFT)

Cause: Any of the following:
• The network driver was not loaded.
• You were not using the correct version of the network driver.
• The line state was OFF.
• The remote host was not reachable.
Action: Make sure you are using the correct version of the network
driver. Make sure the network driver is loaded. Make sure the line state
is ON.
Non-DOS disk error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)

Cause: The MS-DOS operating system did not recognize the disk format.
Action: To stop the command, press the A key.
You cannot use this disk with the MS-DOS operating system. Reformat
the disk using the FORMAT command.
Not a font file (FONT)

Cause: The file you specified was not a text font file.
Action: Retry the FONT command and specify a valid font file.
Not a keyboard map file (KEYB)

Cause: You specified a file that was not a keyboard map file.
Action: Retry the KEYB command and specify a valid keyboard map file.

40-70

Messages

IIIII

Not a system disk
Press any key (MS)
Cause: The disk does not contain the system files IO.SYS and
MSDOS.SYS.
Action: Get another diskette that contains the system files IO.SYS and
MSDOS.SYS. Restart the MS-DOS operating system.

Not able to back up file (DR)
Cause: The BACKUP command could not back up this file. The file
could not be backed up because of a read/write error or because of a
file open error.
Action: Restart the MS-DOS operating system and retry the BACKUP command. If this message is displayed again, make sure the file exists. If it
does exist, save the file using the COPY command, or increase the value
of the FILES command in the CONFIG.SYS file.

Not able to restore file (DR)
Cause: No files were found to restore.
Action: Make sure you typed the file specification correctly. If you did
not type the file specification correctly, retry the RESTORE command
with the correct file specification.

Not enough extended memory to install MDRIVE (MDRIVE)
Cause: There was not enough extended memory to install a memory
drive.
Action: Make sure your workstation has extended memory. If it does
have extended memory, specify a smaller memory drive. If it does not
have extended memory, do not specify the /E qualifier.

40-71

11111 Messages

Not enough memory (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system did not have enough memory to
execute the specified command.
Action: Decrease the number of device drivers as well as terminate and
stay resident programs that you have in memory. If the message is displayed again, edit the CONFIG.SYS file and decrease the value of the
BUFFERS command and the FILES command.

Not enough memory (WIN)
Cause: You initiated an action, such as copying a file, that required
more memory than MS-Windows currently had available.
Action: Close one or more application programs and retry the command.

Not enough memory available for DISKCOPY operation (DISKCOPY)
Cause: There was not enough memory to execute the DISKCOPY
command.
Action: Remove some terminate and stay resident programs. Retry the
DISKCOPY command.

Not enough memory to display entire directory (WIN)
Cause: The MS-DOS Executive required more memory than was currentlyavailable to display the full directory.
Action: Close one or more application programs.

Not enough memory to install MDRIVE (MDRIVE)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• You need more memory to install a memory drive.
• You need to make the memory drive smaller.
Action: Either install more memory or make the memory drive smaller.

40-72

Messages 11111

Not enough memory to run (WIN)
Cause: MS-Windows tried to run a standard application that required
more memory than was currently available.
Action: Close an application, then select the Run command. If this message is displayed again, continue closing applications and selecting the
Run command until either the message is no longer displayed or until
the MS-DOS Executive is the only remaining application. The program
will now run after enough memory has been freed by closing other
applications, and if the MS-DOS Executive is the only application
running.

Not enough memory to run 'filename' (WIN)
Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• MS-Windows tried to run a program that required more memory
than was currently available.
• Your version of MS-Windows does not support one or more of the
run-time routines.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Close one or more applications. Select the Run command again.
• If this message is displayed and only the MS-DOS Executive win-

dow is running, you cannot run the specified file with this version
of MS-Windows.

Not enough room to merge the entire file (MS)
Cause: There was not enough memory to hold the file during a
TRANSFER command.
Action: Use a memory drive for temporary files. Remove some device
drivers. Retry the TRANSFER command.

40-73

IIIII Messages
Not ready error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not access the drive you
specified.
Action: Make sure the disk drive door is closed. Make sure the disk is
inserted into the drive right side up. To retry the command, press the R
key.
Out of environment space (MS)
Cause: There was not enough room in the program environment to
accept more data.
Action: Do the following:
• Make the PATH command shorter.
• Make the APPEND command shorter.
• Decrease the number of SET commands you define.
Parameters of hard disk cannot be determined_ (FDISK)
Cause: One of the following occurred:
• There is no hard disk.
• The hard disk is installed incorrectly.
Action: Make sure you have a hard disk. Make sure that it is installed
correctly.
The path entry is too long (FONT) (GRAFTABL) (KEYB) (LCOUNTRY)
(SORT)
Cause: You specified a path entry of more than 64 characters.
Action: Specify a path entry of 64 characters or less.
The path is not set (FONT) (GRAFTABL) (LCOUNTRY) (SORT)
Cause: The 'PATH=' string is not set.
Action: Set the path.

40-74

Messages 11111

The path is not set and the file was not found in the current directory or root directory: 'filename' (KEYB)
Cause: The path is not set or the file was not found.
Action: Set the path and check the current and root directories for a
valid file name.

Path not found. (MS)
Cause: You specified an invalid path name.
Action: Check your typing. If this message is displayed again, make sure
the path exists.

The PATH= string was not found in the environment (FONT) (GRAFTABL) (KEYB) (LCOUNTRY) (SORT)
Cause: Your environment space is corrupt.
Action: Restart the workstation.

PIF Error
Program directly modifies memory.
Cannot continue processing.
Cause: You executed a command or ran a program that directly modified memory.
Action: Restart the system.
Action: Make sure there is a hard disk in your workstation. Make sure
the hard disk is installed correctly.

40-74.1

IIIII Messages
Please run DLL before starting LAT
Cause: You tried to start the LAT before starting the Datalink (DLL).
Action: Type:
NET START LAT ( Return )

Please run SCH and DLL before starting Datalink
Cause: An error related to the SCH program was detected during network start-up.
Action: Type:
NET START RDR ( Return )

Please run SCH and DLL before starting LAT
Cause: You tried to start the LAT before starting the SCH program and
Datalink (DLL).
Action: Type:
NET START LAT ( Return )

40-74.2

Messages

IIIII

Print quality HIGH is not supported on STD type printers. (MODE)

Cause: You specified the H parameter for an incompatible printer. The
H parameter is only valid on the rA50 type printer.
Action: Specify the H parameter only with the rA50 printer. Retry you
current request without the H parameter.
PRINT queue is full (MS)

Cause: The print queue was full. The default limit for the print queue is
10 files.
Action: Run the PRINT command and specify the /Q qualifier. The /Q
qualifier sets the number of files allowed in the print queue. The maximum number you can set is 32 files (minimum is 4).
Print switch not supported with this command. (NFT)

Cause: You tried to use the /PRINT switch with a command that does
not support it.
Action: Retry the command without the /PRINT switch, or use a command that supports the /PRINT switch.
Printer not ready (WIN)

Cause: Either of two things occurred:
• The printer is out of paper.
• The printer is off.
Action: Make sure the printer paper is properly installed. If the paper is
properly installed, make sure the printer is connected and turned on.
Printer port is in use (TE)

Cause: While using the VT220 terminal emulator, you tried to use
printer-controller mode, but another application is using the printer.
Action: Try again after the current print job is finished.

40-75

11111 Messages

Printer type UNKNOWN (GRAPHICS)

Cause: You specified an unknown printer type.
Action: Run the MODE command and specify your printer.
Probable non-DOS disk
Continue (YIN)? (MS)

Cause: The disk you used was a non-DOS disk. This message usually
indicates that the file allocation table is bad.
Action: To continue the CHKDSK processing, press the Y key. To stop
CHKDSK processing, press the N key.
Problem with temporary file for remote file names. (NFT)

Cause: A problem occurred with the temporary file due to lack of disk
space.
Action: Increase the available disk space.
Processing cannot continue (MS)

Cause: There was not enough memory to execute the CHKDSK command for this disk.
Action: Delete some terminate and stay resident programs. Use a memory drive for temporary files. If you have any user-installable device
drivers, remove some of them. You can also restart the MS-DOS operating system and install fewer terminate and stay resident programs.
Program too big to fit in memory (MS)

Cause: You tried to load and execute a program that was bigger than
your available memory.
Action: Delete some terminate and stay resident programs. Try using a
memory drive for temporary files. If you have any user-installable
device drivers, remove some of them. You can also restart the MS-DOS
operating system and install fewer terminate and stay resident programs.

40-76

Messages 11111

Read error in 'filename' (Fe) (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not read the specified file.
Action: Retry the command. If this message is displayed again, restore
the file from your back-up diskette.

Read fault error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not read from, or write to,
drive 'drivename'.
Action: To retry the command, press the R key. If this message is displayed again and you want to stop the command, press the A key.

Received an invalid 5MB message from node 'nodename' (NET TIME)
Cause: You tried to execute the NET TIME command but the node
'nodename' send a bad message.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Redirector already installed (MS)
Cause: You tried to install the redirector after it was already installed.
Action: Do not try to install the redirector again. You can use the network as you normally would.

Reinsert diskette for drive 'drivenumber' (MS)
Cause: You removed the diskette in drive A.
Action: Reinsert the diskette being formatted into drive A.

Remote system DAP buffer size < 256. (NFT)
Cause: Two programs on different systems have such different buffer
sizes that they could not communicate with one another.
Action: Read the documentation for the remote system and contact the
remote system's system administrator.

40-77

IIIII Messages
Restore file sequence error (BR)
Cause: You tried to restore a file in an incorrect order.
Action: Insert another diskette into the floppy diskette drive.
Resynch failed. Files are too different. (FC)
Cause: The number of lines in the internal line buffer is less than the
number of consecutive, differing lines.
Action: Specify the ILB qualifier with a larger number if you want to
display all the line differences.
Sector not found error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not read from, or write to,
the disk. The disk may be unusable.
Action: To retry the command, press the R key.
If this message is displayed again and you want to stop the command,
press the A key. Copy all files to a new diskette, or back up and
reformat your hard disk.
Sector size too large in file 'filename' (MS)
Cause: The specified device driver loaded by the CONFIG.SYS file uses
a sector size larger than that of any other device driver on the system.
You cannot run this device driver.
Action: Check your source code for bugs.
Seek error reading/writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not read from, or write to,
the disk. The disk may be unusable.
Action: To retry the command, press the R key. If this message is displayed again and you want to stop the command, press the A key. Copy
all files to a new diskette, or back up and reformat your hard disk.

40-78

Messages 11111

Selected country is not contained in 'filename' (LCOUNTRY)

Cause: The country code you specified was not in the file.
Action: Load the .COU file that contains the correct country
information.
Service active (TE)

Cause: You tried to change an active Network Terminal Service in the
VT240 terminal emulator's Communications Set-Up screen. Only inactive services can be changed.
Action: Exit Set-Up and log out of the active session, making it inactive.
Then, reenter Set-Up and change the inactive service.
Session n does not exist. (SETHOST)

Cause: There was no saved session with this number.
Action: Use the jSHOW qualifier to see which sessions do exist.
Set-Up file 'filename' is incompatible and will be ignored (TE)

Cause: You tried to load a Set-Up configuration file which was of the
wrong format or wrong version.This can occur when starting the VT220
Emulator or using the 'Recall Set-Up Parameters' option in Set-Up.
Action: Make sure the file is not damaged. Make sure the version number is right. If the version number is wrong, you can recreate it by
entering Set-Up, making the parameter settings you desired, and saving
them with the 'Save Set-Up Parameters' option.
SETHOST could not open input file. (SETHOST)

Cause: Your attempt to redirect input failed.
Action: Make sure the input file exists before trying to redirect input
from that file.

40-79

IIIII Messages
SETHOST could not open log file. (SETHOST)
Cause: Your attempt to redirect output to a specified file failed.
Action: Make sure the disk is not full. If it is full, delete unnecessary
files and try again.
SETUP is not able to create the directory you specified.
Pleas specify another directory (SETUP)
Cause: One of following occurred:
• The network device does not exist.
• The network device is read-only.
• The destination drive is not currently reachable.
• The destination device is full.
Action: Choose another destination device. If you want to use a device
that is not currently reachable, enter another valid drive and directory
specification, quit at the next screen, and then restart SETUP.
SETUP requires a minimum of 216K free to run (SETUP)
Cause: SETUP cannot find enough memory to run.
Action: Make sure all memory is usable. SETUP needs 216K bytes of
memory to run to completion.
SHARE already installed (MS)
Cause: You tried to install file sharing after it was already installed.
Action: Do not try to install file sharing again.
Sharing violation reading drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: A program tried to access a file that was being used by another
program.
Action: To stop the command, press the A key. To retry the command,
press the R key.

40-80

Messages

IIIII

Source and target disks are the same (BR)
Cause: You tried to back up files to the same disk from which you
copied them.
Action: Make sure the source drive and target drive specifications are
different.
Source diskette cannot be copied (DISKCOPY)
Cause: The source and target diskettes were incompatible.
Action: Insert a compatible target diskette into the target drive and retry
the DISKCOPY command.
Source does not contain back-up files (BR)
Cause: The source disk had no back-up files on it.
Action: Make sure you typed the information on the command line correctly. If you did, make sure the back-up files are in the specified directory. If they are not, retry the command and specify the correct
directory.
The specified file is invalid or does not exist: 'filename' (FONT)
(GRAFTABL) (KEYB) (LCOUNTRY) (SORT)
Cause: The file is not accessible or the file cannot be found.
Action: Check to see if the file exists or if it contains any illegal
characters.
Specified MS-DOS search directory bad (MS)
Cause: One of the following occurred:
• The SHELL command in the CONFIG.SYS file is incorrect.
• The COMMAND.COM file does not exist .
• The COMMAND.COM file is not where you specified it to be.
Action: Try the following:
• Check the SHELL command in the CONFIG.SYS file .
• Make sure the COMMAND.COM file is where you think it is.

40-81

IIIII Messages
Start session error (TE)
Cause: There was an error accessing the Network Terminal service. The
service cannot be initiated.
Action: Contact you system administrator.
Syntax error (MS)
Cause: You typed an illegal string when executing the FIND command.
Action: Enclose the string with quotation marks.
Target disk cannot be used for back-up (BR)
Cause: One of the following occurred:
• The BACKUP command cannot access the disk.
• The floppy diskette is bad.
• There are hardware problems.
Action: Reformat the diskette using the FORMAT command. Retry the
BACKUP command. If this message is displayed again, get a new diskette. If there are hardware problems, call Field Service.
Target diskette has errors
Attempting to recover target diskette by reformatting bad tracks
(DISKCOPY)
Cause: The target diskette had a bad spot.
Action: This message is for informational purposes. Because the target
diskette must be reformatted, the DISKCOPY operation will take significantly more time. If this problem occurs again, the "WARNING: Error
writing target diskette" message is displayed. See that message for more
information about how to proceed.
Target diskette is write protected
Remove write protect tab and press any key to continue
Or press <CTRL/C> to abort DISKCOPY (DISKCOPY)
Cause: The target diskette was write protected.
Action: Remove the write-protect tab and reinsert the diskette into the
target drive.

40-82

Messages

11111

Target diskette must be Rainbow RX50 pre-formatted
Disk copy failed (DISKCOPY)
Cause: You tried to execute the DISKCOPY command with a target diskette that was not formatted.
Action: Format the target diskette using the FORMAT command. Reinsert
the diskette into the target drive. Retry the DISKCOPY command.

Target drive cannot write high density diskettes (DISKCOPY)
Cause: You tried to copy the contents of a high-density source diskette
to a low-density target diskette.
Action: Insert a high-density target diskette into the target drive. Retry
the DISKCOPY command.

Target is full (BR)
Cause: The target disk had no room to receive restored files.
Action: Use another disk as the target disk.

The 96 column mode is not supported for STD type printers. (MODE)
Cause: You tried to use 96-column mode with an STD type printer. The
96-column mode is valid only for the U50-type printers.
Action: Do not specify 96-column mode with an STD printer.

The last file was not restored (BR)
Cause: One of the follOWing occurred:
• You press ~.
• It is time to switch diskettes.

• There is no more space on the hard disk.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Retry the RESTORE command.
• Insert a new diskette.
• Delete some files from the hard disk and retry the command.

40-83

IIIII Messages
Timed out waiting for DATE/TIME from remote node 'nodename'
(NET TIME)
Cause: You tried to execute the NET TIME command but the node
'nodename' was too busy to service your request.
Action: Retry the NET TIME command and specify another node name.

To activate Compose, use KEYB to load an ISO or MCS keyboard file
(TE)
Cause: You pressed the Compose key without first loading the ISO or
MCS keyboard map file.
Action: Use the MS-DOS KEYB command to load the ISO or MCS keyboard map file. Now you can use the Compose key.

Too many clocks or timers (WIN)
Cause: You tried to run a program that requires a system clock but no
more are available.
Action: Exit or close one of the other application programs. Try running
your program again.

Too many files open (MS)
Cause: No more system file handles were available for you to use to
open a file.
Action: Increase the value of the FILES command in the CONFIG.SYS
file.

Track 0 bad - disk unusable (MS)
Cause: The FORMAT command found bad sectors on the disk.
Action: Use another disk.

40-84

Messages

11111

Unable to close connection with remote node (NET TIME)
Cause: You issued the NET TIME command and the remote node serviced your request, but your local not could not close the connection.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Unable to connect to 'servicename' (TE)
Cause: You entered an invalid or inaccessible network name.
Action: Make sure you entered a valid service name. If the service is not
available, try again later.

Unable to contact remote node 'nodename' (NET TIME)
Cause: One of the following occurred:
• You issued the NET TIME command but the remote node
'nodename' was not listening.
• You tried to connect to a server that has no sessions available.
• You tried to connect to a server from a workstation that has a
maximum number of sessions running.
Action: Try one of the following:
• Retry the NET TIME command and specify another node name.
• Increase the number of sessions that can connect to the server.
Check that there are no active sessions, then restart the server.
• Disconnect from a remote node or server, or increase the number
of sessions allowed from your workstation.

Unable to create directory (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not create the directory you
specified.
Action: Make sure there are no other directories with the name you
specified in the MKDIR command line. Make sure the disk is not full.

40-85

IIIII Messages
Unable to erase 'filename' (BR)
Cause: The BACKUP or RESTORE command could not erase file
'filename' .
Action: Start with a blank, formatted diskette. You can also delete or
move some files on the destination diskette before you execute the
BACKUP or RESTORE command again.

Unable to make local file name from remote name:
'nodename::filename'
Enter local file name: (NFT)
Cause: You omitted the local file name with the COPY command. Nfl
was not able to create a local file name from the specified remote file
name.
Action: Retry the COPY command and specify a local file name.

Unable to open file: 'filename' (NFT)
Cause: Nfl could not open the file you specified.
Action: Make sure you typed the file name correctly.

Unable to send command to remote node 'nodename' (NET TIME)
Cause: You issued the NET TIME command but your local node could
not talk to the network.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Unexpected network error 'errornumber' (NET)
Cause: A network command returned an unexpected error. The parentheses contain the MS-DOS operating system extended error code.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Unrecognized command in CONFIG.SYS (MS)
Cause: Your CONFIG.SYS file contained an unrecognized command.
Action: Make sure the commands in your CONFIG.SYS file are valid.

40-86

Messages

IIIII

Unrecognized command. (SETHOST)
Cause: The command you used was not a valid SETHOST command.
Action: To see all the valid SETHOST commands, type:
SETHOST>SETHOST IHELP ~

40-86.1

This page intentionally left blank.

Messages 11111

Unrecognized error code 'errorcode' (SETHOST)
Cause: The error code you specified was invalid.
Action: Contact your system administrator.

Unrecognized Help option; try typing just IHELP. (SETHOST)
Cause: You specified an invalid SETHOST help option.
Action: To see the valid SETHOST help options, type:
SETHOST>SETHOST IHELP ~

Unrecognized nodespec. (SETHOST)
Cause: The nodespec was invalid.
Action: To see the valid nodespec formats, type:
SETHOST>SETHOST/HELP:NODESPEC(Return )

Unrecognized Parameter. (SETHOST)
Cause: The parameter you specified was not a SETHOST parameter.
Action: To see the valid SETHOST parameters, type:
SETHOST>SETHOST IHELP ~

Unrecoverable error in directory
Convert directory to file (YIN)? (MS)
Cause: The directory structure is corrupt.
Action: To convert the bad directory to a file, press the Y key. Now you
can delete the bad directory. Then use your back·up diskette to restore
the directory structure.
If you respond N to this prompt, you may not be able to read from or
write to the bad directory.

40-87

IIIII Messages
Use of the /1 switch is not allowed for the target drive (FORMAT)
Cause: You tried to do either of the following:
• Format the hard disk using the /1 switch.
• Format a single-sided diskette in the high-density RX33 drive.
Action: Format a low-density diskette using the /1 switch together with
the /4 switch.

Use of the /4 switch is not allowed for the target drive (FORMAT)
Cause: You tried to format the hard disk with the /4 switch. The /4
switch indicates that you want to format an 8- or 9-sector diskette on a
high-density RX33 drive.
Action: Retry the FORMAT command without specifying the /4 qualifier.

Use of the /8 switch is not allowed for the target drive (FORMAT)
Cause: You tried to do either of the following:
• Format a hard disk using the /8 switch.
• Format a single-sided diskette in the high-density RX33 drive.
Action: Format a low-density diskette using the /8 switch together with
the /4 switch.

Use of the /L switch is only allowed in combination with the /4, /8,
or /1 switches (FORMAT)
Cause: You tried to format a disk using the /L switch by itself.
Action: Make sure you specify the /4 switch, the /8 switch, or the /1
switch when you specify the /L switch.

Video shifting is not allowed on this hardware_ (MODE)
Cause: You tried to shift the video on your VAXmate workstation.
Action: Do not attempt video shifting on your VAXmate workstation.

40-88

Messages

IIIII

Warning - directory full (MS)

Cause: The root directory was too full for RECOVER processing.
Action: Save some files to another diskette, and delete some files. Retry
the RECOVER command.
Warning - Read error in EXE file (MS)

Cause: The amount of the file read was less than the size specified in
the header. This is only a warning message.
Action: Get your back-up copy of the file. If the source code is yours,
reassemble and relink it.
WARNING, ALL DATA ON NON-REMOVABLE DISK
DRIVE X WILL BE LOST!
Proceed with Format (YIN)? (MS)

Cause: This is an informational message that is displayed when you try
to format a hard disk.
Action: To save the files, press the N key. Then copy the files to a
different disk. Retry the FORMAT command.
To format the hard disk without saving the files, press the Y key.
Warning: Cannot DELETE both remote and local files.
'Number' file name(s) will be ignored. (NFT)

Cause: You tried to delete a local file and a remote file at the same
time. NFT deleted the file you specified first.
Action: Do not try to delete a local file and a remote file at the same
time.
Warning: Cannot perform DIRECTORY for both local and remote files.
'Number' file name(s) will be ignored. (NFT)

Cause: You tried to display a directory listing of both local and remote
files. NFT displayed the directory you listed first.
Action: Do not try to display a local directory and a remote directory at
the same time.

40-89

IIIII Messages
Warning: Cannot print file(s} on local printer. (NFl')
Cause: You included the /PRINT qualifier in a COPY operation from a
remote node to a local node. You cannot print remote files on the local
printer. (You can print local files on the remote printer.)
Action: Do not try to print remote files on a local printer.
Warning: Cannot TYPE from one file to another. (NFl')
Cause: You included two file specifications with the TYPE command.
Action: Retry the command and specify only one file.
WARNING: Diskette is out of sequence (DR)
Cause: You inserted a diskette that was not the next diskette in the
number sequence.
Action: Insert another diskette into the drive.
WARNING: Error reading source diskette
Track 'number' Side 'number' Sector 'number' (DISKCOPY)
Cause: The DISKCOPY program found a bad spot on the source diskette.
Action: Run the COPY command to copy your files to the target
diskette.
WARNING: Error writing target diskette
Track 'number' Side 'number' Sector 'number'
Continue copying the diskette (Y/N): (DISKCOPY)
Cause: The DISKCOPY program found a bad spot on the target diskette.
Action: To continue the DISKCOPY operation (skipping this sector),
press the Y key.
To stop the DISKCOPY operation, press the N key. Get a new diskette
and retry the DISKCOPY command.

40-90

Messages

IIIII

Warning: File(s) will NOT be deleted after copy. (NFT)
Cause: You included the /DELETE qualifier with the COPY command.
The /DELETE qualifier is only valid with the /PRINT qualifier.
Action: Retry the COPY command and include the /PRINT qualifier
with the /DELETE qualifier.
Warning: Renaming files with wildcard specifications not supported.
(NFT)
Cause: You tried to rename a file with the COPY command and used a
wildcard in the input file name and the output file name.
Action: Retry the COPY command and specify explicit file names for the
input file and the output file.
Warning: Service table full
Some sessions may be missing
Press any key to continue (NET)
Cause: You defined more services than the network terminal services
directory can handle.
Action: Use the NET START IAT command with the /D:size qualifier to
increase the number of services you can have in the network terminal
services directory. The size you specify on the /D: qualifier is added to
the default size of 10. For example, to create a network services directory that can contain up to.15 services, the qualifier is /D:5. Each additional entry over the default consumes an extra 47 bytes of memory.
Write fault error writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The MS-DOS operating system could not write to the drive.
Action: Check to see if the diskette has a write-protect tab on it. If it
does, remove the tab and press the R key to retry the command.
If this message is displayed again, press the A key to stop the command.

40-91

IIIII Messages
Write protect error writing drive 'drivename' (MS)
Cause: The diskette has a write-protect tab on it.
Action: Remove the write-protect tab and retry the command.

Write protected disk in drive 'drivename' (WIN)
Cause: The disk in the specified drive was write-protected.
Action: Remove the write-protect tab and select Retry. Otherwise, select
Cancel.

(.)( .. ) does not exist (MS)
Cause: Either the. or the .. directory entry was invalid.
Action: save as many files as you can using the BACKUP command. Use
another disk and restore as many files as you can.

40-92

Appendix G
International Features

This appendix discusses:
• International country codes
• International character set codes
• Country keyboard abbreviations
• Commands providing international support
• How support files work together
• Character sets
• Country keyboards

International Country Codes
The following list contains international country codes.

001

United States

002

Canada

031

Netherlands

032

Belgium

033

France

034

Spain

039

Italy

041

Switzerland

044

United Kingdom

045

Denmark

046

Sweden

047

Norway

049

Germany

061

Australia

358

Finland

972

Israel

G-J

IIIII International Features
International Character Set Codes
The following list contains international character set codes.
CA7

Canadian 7 -bit NRC

CH7

Swiss 7 -bit NRC

DE7

German 7 -bit NRC

DK7

Danish 7 -bit NRC

ES7

Spanish 7 -bit NRC

FI7

Finnish 7 -bit NRC

FR7

French 7 -bit NRC

ISO

ISO Multinational

IT7

Italian 7 -bit NRC

MCS

DIGITAL Multinational

N07

Norwegian 7-bit NRC

SE7

Swedish 7 -bit NRC

ST2

IBM Norway/Denmark Extended

STD

IBM Extended

UK7

United Kingdom 7 -bit NRC

Country Keyboard Abbreviations
The following list contains country keyboard abbreviations.
CA

Canadian

Swiss

German

Danish

Spanish

Finnish

French

Italian

Norwegian

Swiss (German)

Swedish

Swiss (French)

English

American English

G-2

International Features

IIIII

Commands Providing International Support
Table G-1 contains the commands providing international support.
Table G-l

International Support

Command

What It Does

FONT

Loads a text character set. FONT files have a .FNT file extension.

GRAFTABL

Loads a graphic character set. GRAFTABL files have a .GRF file extension.

KEYB

Loads a keyboard map file. KEYB files have a .KEY file extension.

LCOUNTRY

Loads country-specific information and case conversion information
into the MS-DOS operating system. LCOUNTRY files have a .COU file
extension.

SELECT

Provides the coordination of the various pieces of internationalization.

SORT

Is an MS-DOS operating system filter that sorts characters according
to current character set. SORT files have a .SRT file extension.

The FONT Command

Use the FONT command to load a text font file that corresponds to a character set. The FONT command loads the bit maps of the ASCII characters. Each
text character is represented by 16 bytes of data.
The GRAFTABL Command

Use the GRAFTABL command to load the bit maps of the graphics characters
that are displayed when the workstation is in a graphics mode. All workstation graphics modes are supported.
Each graphics character is represented by 8 bytes of data.
The KEYB Command

Use the KEYB command to load keyboard map files. Two factors determine
which keyboard map file should be loaded; the country selected and the
character set selected. For example, if you want to use an MCS character set
in the United Kingdom, you would load the MCSUK.KEY file.

G-3

IIIII International Features
The LCOUNTRY Command

Use the LCOUNTRY command to load country-specific information into the
MS-DOS operating system.
The SELECT Command

Use the SELECT command to change the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT
files to the desired character set and country information. The SELECT command sets up the parameters for FONT, KEYB, and LCOUNTRY.
After setting these parameters using the SELECT command, and restarting the
MS-DOS operating system, the correct character set and country information
is installed.
It is your responsibility to ensure compatibility among the international

components.
SELECT accepts user input on the command line.
The SORT Command

The SORT command is an MS-DOS operating system filter that collates characters according to a given sort table. Each character set has its own sort file.
Similarities Between FONT, GRAFTABL, KEYB, LCOUNTRY, SORT

Each command accepts user-created files. For example, you can create a set
of PACMAN graphic fonts to be loaded by GRAFTABL.
You can load any combination of files, but you must ensure compatibility
yourself. For example, you could load an ISO font set, be running a STDFR
keyboard, and using DE7 country-specific information. We do not recommend it, but we do not prohibit it, either.
Each command has an option so that you can load the default set.
GRAFTABL, SORT, or LCOUNTRY typed with no arguments match the current
.FNT file. For example, if you load ISO.FNT and type the following command
lines, GRAFTABL loads ISO.GRF and LCOUNTRY loads ISO.COU:
A:\)GRAFTABL(Return )
A: \) LCOUNTRY ( Return )

G-4

IIIII

International Features

Each command searches the current directory, any appended directories, the
root directory, and then the current path for the specified file.
Each command assumes a default file extension if you do not specify it.
Table G-2 lists examples of what you type and what is loaded.
Table G-2

Examples of International Commands

What You Type

What Is Loaded

FONT ISO ( Return)

ISO.FNT

GRAFTABL ISO ( Return )

ISO.GRF

KEYB ISOUS ( Return )

ISOUS.KEY

LCOUNTRY ISO ( Return )

ISO.COU

The KEYB and FONT utilities allow you to return to the default ROM-BIOS
tables using the ID qualifier after the command. The KEYB and FONT utilities allow you to see the current character sets using the IS qualifier after the
command.

Changing Character Sets for a Specific Country
If a French user wants to use the ISO Latin-l character set, the sequence of

commands shown in Table G-3 is typed.
Table G-3

Changing Character Sets

What You Type

What Is Loaded

A:\>FONT ISO.FNT ( Return )

Loads the ISO Latin-l text character set

A:\>KEYB ISOFR.KEY ( Return )

Loads the French ISO Latin-l keyboard
map tables

A:\>LCOUNTRY ISO.COU 033 ( Return)

Loads the ISO Latin-l character set
country data and specifies the country as
France

G-5

IIIII International Features
If the user also wants to use graphics video mode, the following command
needs to be given:
A:\>GRAFTABL ISO.GRF(Return)

The ISO Latin-l graphics character set is loaded.
NOTE

Specifying the file extensions for each of these files is optional.
The extensions are assumed by default.

How Support Files Work Together
Tables G-4 through G-8 show how all the utilities work together to give you
full support for the desired character set and country. Use these tables only
as a guideline.
Table G-4

IBM Extended Character Set

J.anguage

Keyboard

Font (Text)

Graphics
(Font)

Sort

U.S.'

STDUS.KEY·

STD.FNT·

STD.GRF·

STD.SRT·

U.K.

STDUK.KEY

FRENCH

STDFR.KEY

GERMAN

STDDE.KEY

• Default set up at start-up time

G-6

International Features
Table G-5

Digital Multinational Character Set

Language

Keyboard

Font (Text)

Graphics
(Font)

Sort

U.S.

MCSUS.KEY

MCS.FNT

MCS.GRF

MCS.SRT

U.K.

MCSUK.KEY

FRENCH

MCSFR.KEY

GERMAN

MCSDE.KEY

Table G-6

French 7-Bit National Replacement Character Set

Language

Keyboard

Font (Text)

Graphics
(Font)

Sort

7-BIT FRENCH

FR7FR.KEY

FR7.FNT

FR7.GRF

FR7.SRT

Table G-7

German 7-Bit National Replacement Character Set

Language

Keyboard

Font (Text)

Graphics
(Font)

Sort

7-BIT GERMAN

DE7DE.KEY

DE7.FNT

DE7.GRF

DE7.SRT

Table G-8

11111

International Standards Organization

Language

Keyboard

Font (Text)

Graphics
(Font)

Sort

U.S.

ISOUS.KEY

ISO.FNT

ISO.GRF

ISO.SRT

U.K.

ISOUK.KEY

FRENCH

ISOFR.KEY

GERMAN

ISODE.KEY

G-7

IIIII International Features
Character Sets
Using All Character Sets With MS-DOS and MS-Windows
You should not create file names using accented characters or other 8-bit
characters. Instead, use only characters from the ASCII character set (A-Z,
0-9). The accented characters and their positions in the set differ from character set to character set. Using them in file names could result in different
file names being displayed under different character sets.
MS-DOS supplies the MCSjISO and NRC character sets. If a file is created
using the MCSjISO character set, it could look different if viewed with the
NRC set loaded. Ensure that the loaded character set matches the one that
was used to create the file.

Using Character Sets With MS-Windows
MS-Windows uses ANSI (ISO Latin-I) a universal, standard character set. This
8-bit character set allows you to represent up to 256 characters (0-255). This
character set is split into:
• 0-127
• 128-255
The first half (0-127) is standard U.S. ASCII. Characters from 128-255 may
differ from one character set to another. The differences are special characters, such as accents and currency symbols.
You probably have documents containing non-ANSI characters if you are
using:
• A workstation in a non-English speaking country
• Documents not created in MS-Windows
These files will display differently if you use them under MS-Windows.
The MS-Windows stroke fonts (ROMAN, SCRIPT, and MODERN) do not fully
support the ISO Latin-l character set.

Using the NRC Character Set With MS-DOS
The NRC character set does not contain the backslash (\) or the vertical bar
(I). To generate these characters, use the following procedures. When you
type the numbers, use the numeric keypad.
G-8

International Features

IIIII

To generate the backslash, type:
<Alt/92>

To generate the vertical bar, type:
<Alt/124>

The MS-DOS operating system interprets these generated characters as the
backslash or the vertical bar.

Using Character Sets With the VT220 and VT240 Terminal
Emulators
The ISO Latin-l dead-diacritical keys are used with MS-Windows. The VT220
tF:rminal emulator, which runs as an MS-Windows application, also uses the
ISO Latin-l dead-diacritical keys, regardless of the current mode of the
terminal emulator (MCS/ISO or NRC).
The VT240 terminal emulator uses the same dead-diacritical keys used under
the MS-DOS operating system, regardless of the current terminal emulator
mode (MCS/ISO or NRC).

G-9

11111

International Features

Country Keyboards

Figure G-t

u. S'/U. K. Keyboard
'''''''' r

s,.", I

[EllalolBl

Figure G-2

Canadian/English Keyboard
"."

,.,'" I

IslEllslBl

Figure G-3

G-lO

Danish Keyboard

International Features

LO::

N':;,""

':: 1=

",,~t I

s, .....

IIIII

[BlEllslBl

Figure G-4

Finnish Keyboard
...."'1

..... 50,1

IOlEllslBl

Figure G-5

French/Canadian Keyboard
~

'l:' E<'~"'I _

'''''''' I

....,.1

lEi Ic::=J I [BlEllslBl

Figure G-6

French Keyboard

G-ll

IIIII International Features
~

Figure G-7

~::.~ e,':.:,," [ _

,,.''",,1

s".,,, I

.,.A" J

"-', )

"", .... 1

GermaniAustrian Keyboard
':: N'~""

Figure G-8

Figure G-9

:: 1=

Hebrew Keyboard
~

G-12

..... ,,'

"""~ "'~Ol

Italian Keyboard

International Features

Figure G-I0

IIIII

Norwegian Keyboard

[Ellc:;::]l [BlGlslBl

Figure G-ll

Spanish Keyboard

Figure G-12

Swedish Keyboard

G-13

IIIII International Features
I

"o:.~' "'::""1

",,,,, I

","" I

18l810lBi

Figure G-13

Swiss/French Keyboard

[8[[]]slEllBl 1B1EllB@l

Figure G-14

G-14

l~1

@lGl8lBl

Swiss/German Keyboard

AppendixH
Using Diskettes on the
VAXmate Workstation

This appendix discusses:
• Using diskettes
• Formatting diskettes
• Diskette ReadjWrite Compatibility
• DlSKCOPY and Diskette Types

Using Diskettes
You can use either high-density or standard low-density diskettes on the
workstation. If you use high-density diskettes, you cannot exchange data with
an IBM PC, IBM PC/XT, or a Rainbow computer, because they do not support
high-density diskettes.

Formatting Diskettes
The MS-DOS operating system enables you to format the following diskette
types in the VAXmate 5 1/4 inch high-capacity drive:
• Industry standard low-density diskettes:
- Single sided, 8-sectors per track, 40 tracks, 160K bytes
FORMAT A: /1/8/4
- Single sided, 9-sectors per track, 40 tracks, 180K bytes
FORMAT A: /1/4

H-l

IIIII Using Diskettes on the l-'AXmate Workstation
- Double sided, 8-sectors per track, 40 tracks, 320K bytes
FORMAT A: /4/8
- Double sided, 9-sectors per track, 40 tracks, 360K bytes
FORMAT A: /4
• VAXmate high-density diskettes:
- The default and recommended format is double sided, IS-sectors per
track, 80 tracks, 1.2 megabytes
FORMAT A:
IMPORTANT
Do not attempt to format a low-density diskette at IS-sectors per
track. If you do, you cannot use the diskette until you bulk erase
it.

Do not attempt to reformat a IS-sector per track diskette at 8- or
9-sectors per track, unless you first bulk erase the diskette.
Magnetic interference between the previous high-density format
and the new low-density format causes a high degree of
unreliability.

Diskette Read/Write Compatibility
The MS-DOS operating system enables you to read from and write to the
following diskette types in the VAXmate 5 1/4 inch high-capacity drive:
• Rainbow diskettes (preformatted on a Rainbow computer)
Single sided, IO-sectors per track, 80 tracks, 39SK bytes
• Industry standard diskettes
Single sided, 8 sectors per track, 40 tracks, 160K bytes
Single sided, 9 sectors per track, 40 tracks, I80K bytes
Double sided, 8 sectors per track, 40 tracks, 320K bytes
Double sided, 9 sectors per track, 40 tracks, 360K bytes
• VAXmate high-density diskettes
Double sided, IS-sectors per track, 80 tracks, 1. 2 megabytes
H-2

Using Diskettes on the VAXmate Workstation

IIIII

IMPORTANT
If you write to any Rainbow diskettes, or to any single or double

sided industry standard diskettes using the VAXmate's high-capacity
drive, you may not be able to read the diskette in a low-capacity
drive.
You cannot use high-density diskettes in low-capacity single or
double sided drives.

DISKCOPY and Diskette Types
The DISKCOPY command enables you to copy the contents of a diskette to
another diskette. All diskette types previously mentioned can be copied using
the DISKCOPY command. MS-DOS and other operating system diskettes can
be copied. The destination diskette must be preformatted to the same type as
the source diskette, except for the high-density VAXmate 1.2 megabyte diskette. The DISKCOPY command formats the high-density VAXmate 1.2
megabyte destination diskette if it hasn't already been done.

H-3

Appendix I
How to Configure Your
System

This chapter discusses:
• What a configuration file is
• How to change a configuration file
• Configuration commands

What Is a CONFIG.SYS File?
When you start the MS-DOS operating system, there are installation-specific
settings that need to be configured. For example, if you want to install a
memory drive, you would configure this when you start the MS-DOS operating system.
The configuration file, named CONFIG.SYS, contains CONFIG.SYS commands
which the MS-DOS operating system reads at startup. The MS-DOS operating
system searches for the CONFIG.SYS file in the root directory of the startup
drive.
The CONFIG.SYS file helps you configure your system with a minimum of
effort. You add device drivers to your system by adding commands to the
CONFIG.SYS file. You can only add device drivers to your system at startup.
In order for the new values to take effect, you must restart your workstation.

/-1

IIIII How to Configure Your System
Creating the CONFIG.SYS File
If there is not a CONFIG.SYS file on the MS-DOS disk, you can use the COpy
command to create one. For example, to create a CONFIG.SYS file, type:

A:\>COPY CON CONFIG.SYS(Return)
BUF FER 5 = 1 0 ( Return )
F I LE 5 = 1 0 ( Return )
DEVICE=\BIN\NETWORK.SYS(Return )
BREA K=0 N( Return )
SHELL=A:\BIN\COMMAND.COM A:\BIN

IP~

LASTDRIVE=P~ ~

After you press the Return key, a file named CONFIG .SYS is saved on the
MS-DOS operating system disk in your root directory.

CONFIG.SYS Commands
Table 1-1 lists the CONFIG.SYS commands.
Table 1-1

CONFIG.SYS Commands

Command

Use

BREAK

Sets Ctrl/C check.

BUFFERS

Sets the number of disk buffers.

COUNTRY

Sets the international time, date, and currency.

DEVICE

Installs the device driver into the system.

FCBS

Specifies the number of FCBs that can be concurrently open.

FILES

Sets the number of open files that can access certain MS-DOS
system calls.

IASTDRIVE

Sets the maximum number of drives that you can access.

SHELL

Begins execution of the shell from a specific file.

These commands are described in detail on the following pages.

/-2

How to Configure Your System

IIIII

BREAK
Purpose
The BREAK command sets the Ctrl/C check.

Format
BREAK=[ON I OFF]
Where:
ON

Sets the Ctrl/C check. Other functions, such as MS-DOS INT 21H
calls, check for Ctrl/C.

OFF

Clears the Ctrl/C check. Other functions, such as MS-DOS INT 21H
calls, do not check for Ctrl/C.

Comments
Depending on the program you are running, Ctrl/C can be used to stop an
activity (for example, to stop sorting a file). Normally, the MS-DOS operating
system checks to see if you pressed Ctrl/C while it is reading from the keyboard, writing to the screen, or writing to a printer.
NOTE
You cannot press Ctrl/C to stop program execution on a server.

Example
To set BREAK to off, add the following command to your CONFIG.SYS file:
BREAK=OFF

1-3

11111 How to Configure Your System

BUFFERS

Purpose
The BUFFERS command sets the number of disk buffers that the MS-DOS
operating system allocates in memory when you start the system.

Format
BUFFERS=X
Where:
X

Is the number of buffers. The default is eight buffers. X can be any
number from 1 to 99.

Comments
A disk buffer is a block of memory where the MS-DOS operating system can
hold data being read from or written to a disk when the amount of data is
not an exact multiple of sector size.
For application programs such as word processors, a number between 10 and
20 provides the best. performance. If you plan to create many subdirectories,
increase the buffers value to between 20 and 30.

Example
To specify 10 buffers, add the foilowing command to your CONFIG.SYS file:
BUFFERS=10

/-4

How to Configure Your System 11111

COUNTRY
Purpose
The COUNTRY command sets the international time, date, currency, and case
conversion formats.

Format
COUNTRY=X
Where:
X

Is the international country code. Valid country codes are:

001

United States

002

Canada

031

Netherlands

032

Belgium

033

France

034

Spain

039

Italy

041

Switzerland

044

United Kingdom

045

Denmark

046

Sweden

047

Norway

049

Germany

061

Australia

358

Finland

972

Israel

Comments
The default country is US.

Example
To set the French currency, time, date, and case conversion, add the following command to your CONFIG.SYS file:
COUNTRY=033

1-5

IIIII How to Configure Your System
DEVICE
Purpose

The DEVICE command installs the device driver in the specified path name
to the system list.
Format

DEVICE=filename .ext
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the device
driver.

Exam-pie

To load the ANSI device driver in the directory C:\V:XSYS, add the following
command to your CONFIG.SYS file:
DEVICE=C:\VXSYS\ANSI.SYS

This command causes the MS-DOS operating system to replace all keyboard
input and screen output support with the ANSI escape sequences.

1-6

How to Configure Your System

IIIII

FCBS

Purpose
The FCBS command sets the number of FCBs (File Control Blocks) that can
be open simultaneously.

Format
FCBS=X,Y
Where:
X

Is the number of files, opened by FCBs, that can be opened simultaneously. The default is four. X can be from 1 to 255.

Is the number of files, opened by FCBs, that the MS-DOS operating system cannot close automatically if an application tries to open more than
X files by FCBs. The first Y files opened by FCBs are protected from
being closed. The default value is zero. Allowed values are from
1 to 255.

Example
To allow four simultaneously opened files and to protect the first two from
being automatically closed by the MS-DOS operating system, add the following command to your CONFIG.SYS file:
FCB5=4,2

/-7

IIIII How to Configure Your System
FILES

Purpose
The FILES command sets the maximum number of simultaneously open files
that MS-DOS system calls can access.

Format
FILES=X
Where:
X

Is the number of open files that system calls can access. The default is
eight. X can be any number from 5 to 255.

Example
To specify that MS-DOS system calls can access 16 open file, add the following command to your CONFIG.SYS file:
FILES=16

1-8

How to Configure Your System 11111

LASTDRIVE
Purpose
The LASTDRIVE command sets what the last drive can be.

Format
LASTDRIVE=X
Where:
X

Is a letter (A through Z) that represents the last valid drive that the
MS-DOS operating system accepts. The default value is E. The minimum
number is equal to the number of drives you have installed on your
computer plus the number of network drives you plan to use.

Comments
This command is primarily used in a network environment. At start up, the
MS-DOS operating system recognizes five drive letters (A through E), no matter how many physical drives you have on your system. A network redirection
must occur to make any of the extra drives defined by LASTDRIVE valid.

Example
To set the last valid drive to drive M, add the following command to your
CONFIG.SYS file:
LASTDRIVE=M

1-9

IIIII How to Configure Your System
SHELL
Purpose

This command begins execution of the shell (top-level command processor)
from a file defined by the specified path name.
Format

SHELL=filename.ext [drv2:][\path2\] /P [jD][/C][/E:n]
Where:
filename.ext

Is the drive, path, file name and file extension of the new
command processor.

drv2:

Is the drive where the new command processor can find its
non-resident overlay. The value for the COMSPEC command
is also set.

path2

Is the path to the directory where the new command processor can find its non-resident overlay.

Is required for the COMMAND.COM file to properly start up.

If specified, indicates that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file should

not be executed.

If specified, indicates that the remaining command line

should be treated as the initial command and arguments.
/E:n

If specified, means make the initial environment "n"

paragraphs. The size equals n·16 bytes. The default is 8
(128 bytes).
Comments

This command should be used by system programmers who write their own
command processor (the MS-DOS operating system file named COMMAND.COM). The MS-DOS operating system starts the processor specified in
drv1:\path1 instead of reading the standard COMMAND.COM.
Example

SHELL=\BIH\HEWSHELL

/-10

How to Configure Your System 11III

Sample CONFIG.SYS File
If you have a key diskette, your configuration file should look like this:

BUFFERS-30 (8 if you do not have an expansion box)
FILES-16
LASTDRIVE-N
DEVICE-\DOS\MDRIVE.SYS IE*

The BUFFERS=30 command sets the number of disk buffers available for a
hard disk system. The number would be 8 for a system without an expansion
box.
The FILES= 16 command se.ts the number of Simultaneously open files that
the MS-DOS system calls can access.
The LASTDRIVE=N command sets what the last drive can be.
The DEVICE=\DOS\MDRIVE.SYS IE" command installs a memory drive in
extended memory. This memory drive uses all of the available extended
memory.

/-11

AppendixJ
VAXmate Options

Additional Memory
The system comes with 1 Mbyte of memory. Memory capacity can be
increased by installing a 2 Mbyte memory option module. The additional
memory is useful when running applications that are capable of using additional memory.
The 2 Mbyte memory option module is a customer installable daughter card
which attaches to the CPU module.

Integral Modem (North America)
An integral modem option is available that allows the user and/or program to

establish and maintain asynchronous and synchronous communications with
other computer systems using the general switched telephone network
(GSTN) in countries where the VAXmate is sold. The integral modem is customer installable within the VAXmate base system and connects directly to
the telephone network.
Because the VAXmate is intended for use in a networked environment, this
option is primarily used in remote office locations to gain access to the host
computer systems at headquarter locations.
This modem also reduces clutter on the desk, allowing the customer to have
a one vendor, one box desktop for the first time.

J-1

11111 VAXmate Options

Printers
There are two printers available for the VAXmate:
IA75

An impact dot matrix printer that is compact, low cost, and suita-

ble for general business applications, including limited word
processing in a small to medium computer environment.
LN03

Plus

A tabletop, nonimpact page laser printer, uses laser imaging and
xerographic printing techniques, and prints letter quality images
at a rate of eight pages per minute.

80287 Math Coprocessor
The VAXmate accepts an optional 80287 numeric data coprocessor for floating point operations and increased graphics performance It operates at 5.33
Mhz. This option is a 40 pin DIP integrated chip that is non-customer
installable.

Expansion Box with Hard Disk
The RCD31 expansion box includes a controller that supports a 20 Mbyte
hard disk drive and two option slots for industry standard modules.

J-2

AppendixK
Vaxmate Workstation
Specifications

VAXmate Workstation
The VAXmate workstation consists of a base system unit that includes a CPU,
I/O video module, power supply and diskette drive; a keyboard, and a
mouse.

System Unit
Physical Dimensions
Height

28.57 em (11.25 in) (at highest point)

Width

40.64 em (16 in) (at widest point)

Depth

38.1 em (15 in)

Footprint

609.6 em (240 sq in)

Weight

15 kg (35 lbs)

CPU
Processor

80286 processor

Memory

1 Mbyte RAM

K-J

IIIII Vaxmate Workstation Specifications
Power Supply
Type

100 KHz

AC input (120 V or 220 V)
120 V (nominal)

90 to 128 Vrms

220 V (nominal)

180 to 256 Vrms

Line current
120 V (nominal)

2.7 nominal

220 V (nominal)

1.8 nominal

AC power consumption

312 nominal

Regulated voltages

+5.1, +12.1, -12, +28 and -9 Vdc

Unregulated voltages

300 Vdc

Circuit protection

fuse

Over-temperature protection

Environment - Class A
Ambient operating
temperature
Relative humidity
Maximum wet bulb
(non-condensing)

15°C (59°F) to 32°C (90°F)
8% to 80%
25°C (77°F)

Altitude (maximum)

K-2

Operating

up to 8,000 feet

Non-operating

up to 30,000 feet

Vaxmate Workstation Specifications 11111

Workstation System Expansion
Additional memory

2 Mbytes customer-installable daughter card

Math coprocessor

80287 numeric data coprocessor for floating
point operations

Expansion box

20 Mbyte hard disk drive and two industry
standard option slots

Integral modem
(North America)

Hayes' compatible 300/1200/2400 baud

I/O Video Module
Video Display
Active display size

35.5 cm (14-in), 13-inch viewable, diagonal
amber or green phosphor color
240 mm horizontal by 150 mm vertical

Text display
Soft font (loadable)

256 characters

Soft font (matrix)

8 pixels horizontal by 16 pixels vertical

Scan rates

26.4 kHz horizontal, 60 Hz vertical,
non-interlaced

Video input

4-bit TTL, 16 intensity levels

Display formats

640 pixels horizontal by 400 pixels vertical,
800 pixels horizontal by 250 pixels vertical

eGA-compatible modes

80 column X 25 row text
40 column X 25 row text
640 X 200 X 2 color bitmapped graphics
320 X 200 X 4 color bitmapped graphics

Additional modes

640 X 400 X 2 color bitmapped graphics
640 X 400 X 4 color bitmapped graphics
800 X 250 X 4 color bitmapped graphics
320 X 200 X 16 color bitmapped graphics

• Hayes is a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products Inc.

K-3

IIIII Vaxmate Workstation Specifications
51/4-Inch Flexible Disk Drive
ReadsjWrites

1.2 Mbytes IBM PC-AT diskettes

ReadsjWrites

0.4 Mbytes Digital RX50 diskettes

Reads

0.36 Mbytes IBM PC-XT diskettes

Keyboard
Physical Description (Low-profile, Detachable)
Height

5 cm (2 in) at highest point

Length

53.3 cm (21 in)

Width

17.1 cm (6.75 in)

Weight

2 kg (4.5 lb)

Audio and visual indicators

4 lights and bell tone generator

Cord

1.9 m (6 ft) coiled cord; 6 pin, telephonetype modular connector on keyboard end; 6
pin, shielded connector on workstation end;
plugs into right side of workstation

Keypad

Sculptured key array

Home row key height

3 cm (1. 2 in) above desktop

Power

+5 V ± 5% @ 275 rnA, 1.4 W maximum

Mouse
Physical Description
Size

8.8 cm (3.5 in) diameter, 4.0 cm (1.6
in) high

Weight

170 grams (6 oz) including cable

Switches

Three tactile feel switches actuating force
0.8 newtons (3 oz) ± 25%

K-4

Vaxmate Workstation Specifications 11111

Cable

1.5 m (5 ft) round .375 cm (0.15 in) diameter, six conductor #26 stranded shielded
high flexibility design

Connector

7 pin micro-DIN type (male)

Electrical specifications
Power

+5 volts ± 5 % at 130 rnA, -8 to -13 volts at
20 rnA (RS-232 mode)

Interface

Digital ThinWire

Ethernet Port

Includes a T-connector, terminator, and 12 ft
cable

Serial Communications Port

Includes a modem control

Serial Printer Port

6-pin modular jack

K-5

AppendixL
MS-DOS and VAX/VMS
File Compatibility

The MS-DOS operating system and the VAX/VMS operating system have different file systems. While both have directory structures rooted on disk drives,
their file-naming syntax is different. The following sections contain information you need to know if you are sharing files and directories between the
MS-DOS and the VAXjVMS operating systems.

Naming Files and Subdirectories
When using the MS-DOS operating system, you cannot create a file name with
a null file extension if a subdirectory with the same file name already exists.
For example, you cannot create a file called BOX. if a subdirectory called
BOX <DIR> already exists.
When using the VAXjVMS operating system, you cannot create a subdirectory
if an existing file in the directory has the same file name as the subdirectory
and a .DIR extension. For example, if the file NAME.DIR exists in a directory,
you cannot create a subdirectory called NAME in that directory.
When using the VAXjVMS operating system, you cannot create a file with the
.DIR extension if a subdirectory with the same name already exists. For
example, if the directory NAME exists, you cannot create a file called
NAME.DIR.

Creating Files with Text Editors
Certain MS-DOS text editors end a .TXT file with CtrljZ as a delimiter. If you
create such a file on your workstation with an MS-DOS text editor and want
to use the file as a .COM file in the VAXjVMS environment, you must first
insert a "$ EXIT" as the last line of the .COM file, or edit the file on the
VMS system and remove the CtrljZ.

1-1

IIIII

MS-DOS and VAX/VMS File Compatibility

If you use a VMS text editor to create a file that is to be used later in the

MS-DOS environment, you must copy the file, using the /A qualifier, from the
drive connected to the VAX/VMS server to any other drive. Copying the file
removes any appended Ctrl/Z characters. Certain MS-DOS application programs terminate abnormally when they encounter a Ctrl/Z character.

Special Characters in File Names
Of the 11 characters you could specify in an MS-DOS file name and file
extension, do not specify more than nine special characters when creating a
subdirectory. Special characters are any valid MS-DOS file name characters
other than A-Z, 0-9, $, and _ .
The VAXjVMS server translates MS-DOS directory names with file extensions
by treating the"." as a special character and appending .DIR as the file
extension. For example, if a workstation user creates an MS-DOS directory
named A.EXT, the directory is listed as A.EXT. However, the VAXjVMS lists
the directory as A--2EEXT.DIR.

Copy Binary Files Between MS-DOS and VAX/VMS
Directories
You can copy MS-DOS binary files to a VAXjVMS directory. To copy binary
files between the MS-DOS and VAXjVMS environments, use the MS-DOS COpy
command.
Any binary files that were not copied to your VAXjVMS directory with the
MS-DOS COPY command should be copied to the MS-DOS environment with
the NFT COPY command.

Using MS-DOS Applications With VMS-Created Files
Some MS-DOS applications (for example, EDLIN) do not work with a file
created by a VMS process because the VAXjVMS server does not allow write
access to those files. It does allow write access to VAXjVMS files with the
stream record format, but supports only read access to files with any other
record format. To determine the record format of a file created by a VMS
process, use the DIR/FULL command at the VAXjVMS operating system
prompt. For example:
$

DIR/FULL filename(Return)

L-2

MS-DOS and VAX/VMS File Compatibility

IIIII

Table L-! describes the VAX/VMS server support for MS-DOS access to
VAXjVMS files.
Table L-t MS-DOS Access to VAX/VMS Files
If VAX/VMS file's
record format is

MS-DOS allows you to

Stream

Open
Close
Create
Read
Write/Append
Delete

Sequential record

Open
Read (sequential only)

Relative record

Open
Read (sequential only)

Indexed record

Open
Read (sequential only)

The VAXjVMS server supports only read access to ordinary RMS record files
(nonstream files).
To convert a nonstream file to a stream file, copy the file to another file
name. For example, to convert the nonstream file A.DAT to a stream file
named B.DAT, at the MS-DOS operating system prompt, type:
A:\)COPV A.DAT B.DAT(Return)

Read-Only Directories
Directories marked as read-only on the VAXmate server are ordinary MS-DOS
directories. You can create files in the directory and remove directories when
they are empty. Directories marked as read-only on the VAXjVMS server cannot be deleted by an MS-DOS process. Also, you cannot delete files from or
create files in that directory.

L-3

Index

A
About command 1·7, 3·4, C·3, 18·10,
19·14
Access control information 34·3
changing defaults 34·4
displaying access defaults 34·27
setting defaults 34·26
Accessing
Network Terminal Services
VT240 emulator 16·13
remote files 34·1
Account information 34·3
Active window 2·6
Add command 19·5
Add dialog box 19·5
Add New Font command 8·6, 8·11
Add New Printer command 8·6,8·7
Adding
. cards in Cardfile 19·5
fonts 8·11
information from other applications
in Cardfile 19·13
notes in Calendar 20·12
patterns 27·4
printers 8·6, 8·7, 8·9
text 27~3
Airbrush 27·2
Alarm menu 20·6
Alarm 20·5
early ring 20·6
in Calendar 20·5
removing 20· 7
setting the sound 20·6
turning off 20·6
Align Center command 28· 7

Align command 28· 7
Align Right command 28· 7
All command 3·8
Alt key 6·2, 6·3
Alt/Prt Sc keys 7·7,7·9
Alt/Return keys 6·17
Alt/spacebar keys 6·2, 6·4
Alt/Tab keys 6.2, 6·7, 6·9, 7·6
Alt/Tab/Shift keys 6·2
ANSI command 32·6
APPEND command 32·7, 34·11
Appending files 32·28, 34·11
Applications
closing 1·14
keyboard procedure 6·9
finishing
keyboard procedure 6·8
flashing title bar 6·18
loading
keyboard procedure 6·6
menus 1·8
messages 2·18,6·18
more memory C·15
multiple 2·2
PIF C·2
running standard 7·3
running 1·3
keyboard procedure 6·6,6.8
three 2·5
two 2·4
shrinking standard 7·3
shrinking 1·14
special 7 ·10
standard 7 ·1
closing windows 7·3

Index· 1

11111 Index

closing 7-4
finishing MS-Windows 7-5
multiple 7-5
outside windows 7 -5, 7-6
running large 7 -10
transferring information 7-7
keyboard procedure 7 -7
Arrow keys 6-2, 6-4, 6-6, 6-8, 6-10,
6-14
Arrow/Shift keys 6-3
ASCII 2-17,7-9, B-3
files 34-6, 34-7
ASSEMBLE command 39-3
ASSIGN command 32-9
Asterisk
as a wildcard 30-9
ATfRIB command 32-11
Autodial command 19-21
Autodial dialog box 19-21
AUTOEXEC.BAT file 37-5
Automatic dialing
in Cardfile 19-21
Autotyping characters
VT220 emulator
enabling HOSTSYNC 13-4
to the host 13-4, 14-1
VT240 emulator
enabling HOSTSYNC 17-5
to the host 17-5
B
Backspace key A-6
BACKUP command 32-13
Batch files
creating 37 -2
replacement parameters 37-3
used with NFT 34-2
Batch processing 37-1
Binary file 34-6, 34-7
Box 27-1
BREAK command 1-3, 32-17
Brush 26-4
BUFFERS command 1-4
By Date command 3-8
By Kind command 3-8
By Name command 3-8
By Size command 3-8

Index-2

C
Calculator commands
Copy 21-4
Paste 21-4
Calculator
introducing 21-1
memory 21-3
starting 21-1
using 21-3
window 21-3
Calendar commands
Cancel 20-7
Controls 20-6
Copy 20-4
Cut 20-5
Date 20-9
Day Settings 20-10
Day 20-3
Delete 20-18
Mark 20-12
Month 20-8
New 20-13
Open 20-14,20-15
Paste 20-5
Print 20-17
Remove 20-18
Save As 20-16
Save 20-17
Special Time 20-11
Unmark 20-13
Calendar files 20-13
deleting 20-18
opening 20-13,20-14
saving changes 20-17
saving 20-15, 20-16
viewing 20-15
Calendar
adding notes 20-12
alarm 20-5
early ring 20-6
removing 20-7
setting the sound 20-6
turning off 20-6
changing day settings 20-10
copying text 20-4
customizing 20-10

Index 11111
deleting files 20-18
deleting text 20-5
editing in Day View 20-3
editing text 20-4
entering an appointment 20-3
introducing 20-1
marking dates 20-12
opening files 20-13, 20-14
printing files 20-17
removing days 20-18
saving changes 20-17
saving files 20-15,20-16
selecting text 20-4
selecting times 20-3
special times 20·11
starting 20-1
unmarking dates 20-13
viewing appointments 20-7
viewing dates 20·8, 20-9
viewing different times 20-7
viewing files 20-15
window 20-3,20-14
Cancel command 20-7
Canceling
commands
keyboard procedure 6·5
edits
in Cardfile 19-10
in Notepad 18·7
files
keyboard procedure 6-14
Canvas
definition 24-2
saving 26-6
scrolling 27-10
zoomed-in E-1
Card files 19-14
deleting 19-19
file size 19-14
merging 19-20
opening 19-15
printing 19-19
saving changes 19-19
saving 19-18
viewing 19-17,19-20
Card menu 19-5
Cardfile commands

About 19-14
Add 19-5
Autodial 19-21
Copy 19-11, 19-12, 19-13
Cut 19-10, 19-11, 19-13
Delete 19-14
Duplicate 19-14
Find Next 19-12
Find 19-12
Go To 19-7
Index 19-7
List 19-20
Merge 19-20
New 19-15
Open 19-16, 19-17
Paste 19-10, 19-11, 19-12, 19-13
Picture 19-13
Print 19-19
Restore
19-13
Save As 19-18
Save 19-19
Text 19-13
Undo 19-10
Cardfile
adding cards 19-5
adding information from other
applications 19-13
automatic dialing 19-21
canceling edits 19-10
changing index line 19-7
copying cards 19-14
copying text 19-11
creating 19-3
deleting cards 19-14
deleting files
19-19
deleting text 19-10
editing text 19-8
finding text 19-12
formatting text 19-4
index line
19-3
insertion point 19-8
introducing 19-1
merging files
19-20
moving cards 19-7
moving text 19-10, 19-11
moving through files
19-5
opening files
19-15

Index-3

11111 Index

printing cards 19-19
printing files
19-19
restoring cards 19-13
saving changes 19-19
saving files
19-18
scrolling 19-6
selecting text 19-9
starting 19-1
typing text 19-4
viewing files
19-17, 19-20
window 19-3, 19-15
Change Directory command 3-9, 5-2
Changing
Cardfile index line 19-7
Country settings 8-25
cursor blink rate 8-5
date 8-4
day settings in Calendar 20-10
default printer 8-15
directories 5-1,5-3,32-18
double-click rate 8-5
drives 33-9
Keyboard settings 8-22
Mouse settings 8-24
PIFs C-15
Screen colors 8-20
time 8-3
Vf220 settings 12-4
Vf240 settings 16-5
WIN.INI B-3
window size 2-9
Characters in file names 30-8
CHDIR command 32-18
Check disk 3-15
Checking disk for errors 32-19
CHKDSK command 32-19, C-9
CHKDSK.EXE 3-15
Clear command 18-7, 28-5
Click on
action defined 1-3
Click
action defined 1-3
Clipboard 7-7, 7-8, 18-5, 19-8, 20-4,
21-4,27-7
defined 2-16
Vf220 emulator 10-4
Clock

Index-4

introducing 22-1
setting 22-2
starting 22-1
window 22-2
Close command 1-7, 1-14,3-15,
4-13,7-3
application closing 1-14
keyboard procedure 6-9
Close Window on exit option C-12
Closing 1-14
applications
keyboard procedure 6-9
dialog box
keyboard procedure 6-11
windows
standard aplications 7-3
CLS command 32-21
Coarse Grid command 28-10
Comm type
starting the Vf240 emulator
COMI
14-3
COM2
14-3
NTS 14-3
COMMAND command 32-22
Command files
submitting 34-28
Command line format 30-1
COMMAND.COM 3-14
Commands
common information 30-2
MS-DOS operating system
SETHOST 9-1
MS-Paint summary 28-1
operating system 32-1
special effects 27-7
Communications Port command 8-14
COMPARE command 39-6
Compose key A-3
Compose
industry standard 36-4
Composing characters A-I
Compose key A-3, A-6
compose sequence A-I
CtrljAlt procedure A-I, A-2
CtrljAltjleft-Shift procedure A-I,
A-2
diacritical marks A-4

Index
finishing A-6
restarting A-6
three-key compose sequence A-I,
A-3
two-key compose sequence A-I,
A-3, A-4
valid compose sequences A-6
Concatenating files 4-6
CONFIG.SYS commands
BREAK 1-3
BUFFERS 1-4
COUNTRY 1-5
DEVICE 1-6
FCBS 1-7
FILES 1-8
LASTDRIVE 1-9
SHELL 1-10
CONFIG.SYS
changing 1-2
commands 1-2
sample 1-11
what it is 1-1
Configuration Aide B-1
Configuration files
Actions Set-Up screen
VT220 emulator 13-1, 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-2
DEFAULT. 220
VT220 emulator 13-1
DEFAULT.240
VT240 emulator 17-1
file names
VT220 emulator 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-2
Recall Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator 13-1, 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-1,17-2
starting the emulator 14-3
VT220 emulator 13-1
VT240 emulator 17-1
Connecting
a network 33-4
a remote printer 33-7
a resource 33-6, 33-7
Connections command 8-7, 8-14
Control menu 4-10, 4-11
Control Panel menus

IIIII

Preferences 8-20
Setup 8-14,8-15
Control Panel 8-1, B-3
adding fonts 8-6
adding printers 8-6
changing country settings 8-20,
8-25
changing cursor blink rate 8-5
changing date 8-4
changing default printer 8-14,
8-15
changing double-click rate 8-5
changing keyboard settings 8-20,
8-22
changing mouse settings 8-20,
8-24
changing printer connections 8-14
changing printer port connections
8-14
changing screen colors 8-20
changing time 8-3
defined 8-1
deleting fonts 8-6
deleting printers 8-6
dialog box 8-3
in Cardfile 20-2
in Clock 22-2
running 8-1
window 8-3
CONTROL.EXE 8-2
Controls command 20-6
Copy command 2-17,3-6,4-4,4-5,
4-6,5-4,7-7,7-8, 18-5, 18-8, 19-11,
19-12, 19-13, 20-4, 21-4, 27-7, 28-4
COpy command 32-24, 34-14
Copying 2-16
in Cardfile 19-14
files from remote node 34-7
files to hard disk 31-10
files to remote node 34-8, 34-19
files 4-4, 4-5, 4-6
selection E-l
system files to hard disk 31-9
text
in Calendar 20-4
inCardfile 19-11
in Notepad 18-8

Index-5

11111 Index

to the Clipboard 7·8
VT220 emulator 10·4
Country codes G·l
COUNTRY command 1·5
Country keyboards G· 7
Country settings command 8·20, 8·25
Create command 28·1
Create Directory command 3·9, 5·4
Creating
batch file 37·2
card files
19·3
characters A·l
Compose key A·3
compose sequence A·l
Ctrl/Alt procedure A·l, A·2
Ctrl/Alt/left·Shift procedure
A·l,A·2
three·key compose sequence
A·l, A·3
two· key compose sequence A·l,
A·3, A·4
multiple copies E·l
PIFs C·4
Ctrl key E·l
Ctrl/Alt procedure A·l, A·2
Ctrl/Alt/left·Shift procedure A·l
Ctrl/Alt/Shift procedure A·2
Ctrl/Arrow keys 6·2
Ctrl/Break keys 6·2, 6·11
CTIY command 32·31
Current directory 3·3,5·1,30.4
Current status box 24·3
Cursor blink rate 8·5
Cursor 3·3
Curves F·2
Customizing
in Calendar 20·10
Cut command 2·17,18·5,18·8,
19·10, 19·11, 19·13,20·5,28·4
D
Data diskette 5·8
Data
ASCII 34·6, 34·7
binary 34·6, 34·7
Date command 20·9
DATE command 32·32
Day command 20·3
Day Settings command 20·10

Index· 6

Day Settings dialog box 20·10
Day settings
changing 20·10
Day view 20·2, 20·9
DEBUG 39·1
DEBUG commands
ASSEMBLE 39·3
COMPARE 39·6
DUMP 39·8
ENTER 39·10
FILL 39·13
GO 39·15
HEX 39·17
INPUT 39·18
LOAD 39·19
MOVE 39·21
NAME 39·23
OUTPUT 39·26
PTRACE 39·27
QUIT 39·29
REGISTER 39·30
SEARCH 39·33
TRACE 39·35
UNASSEMBLE 39·37
WRITE 39·39
DecInfo section B·24
DecKeybd section B·22
DecLAT section B·21
DECnet·VAXmate
utilities NFT 34·1
Default printer 8·1 5
Definitions
canvas 24·2
current status box 24·3
drawing window 24·3
menu bar 24·3
mouse cursor 24·3
MS·Paint 24·2
terminal emulator 9·1
title bar 24·3
tools and shapes palette 24·3
DEL command 32·34
Delete command 3·6,4·4, 4·6, 5·7,
18·15, 19·14,20·18
DELETE command 34·20
Delete Font command 8·6, 8·13
Delete Printer command 8·6, 8·10
Deleting files 4·6, 4·7
Deleting

Index 11111
cards in Cardfile
19-14
files
in Calendar 20-18
in Cardfile
19-19
in Notepad 18-15
fonts 8-13
NIT files
34-20
text
in Calendar 20-5
in Cardfile 19-10
in Notepad 18-7
Delimiters 30-2
Destination drive 30-3
DEVICE command 1-6
Devices
drivers
characteristics 29-1
logical 33-5
physical 33-5
section B-26
Diacritical marks A-4
Dialog box
check boxes 1-12
closing 1-12
command button 1-10
Cancel
1-12
default 1-12
keyboard procedure 6-11
Ok 1-12
Reset 1-12
defined 1-8
insertion point 1-11
keyboard procedure 6-10,6-11
list box 1-11
option buttons 1-11
keyboard procedure 6-10
System menu box 1-12
text box 1-10
DIR command 32-35
Directly Modifies option C-9
Directories 5-1
change listing 5-5
changing 5-1,5-3
creating 5-4
current 3-3,5-1,30-4
defined 5-1, 30-4
deleting 5-7
displaying information 34-21
displaying multiple 5-6

hierarchical 30-4
listing 3-3,5-1,5-5
MS-DOS Executive window 5-1
path name 5-1
printing listings 5-6
printing 5-6
root 30-4
structure 30-4
subdirectory 5-1
DIRECTORY command 34-21
Disconnecting
from a remote directory 33-12
from a remote printer 33-12
from a resource 33-12
DISKCOPY command 32-37
DISKCOPY.COM 3-15
Diskettes 5-8, H-1
data 5-8
formatting H-l
preparing 5-8, 5-9
system 5-9
using H-1
Disks 5-1
displaying 5-11
drive A 5-11
drive H 5-11
naming 5-10
Displaying
disks 5-11
multiple directories 5-6
VT240 character attributes 16-18
Fast Text Only mode
16-18
VT240 line attributes
16-17
Fast Text Only mode
16-17
Text & Graphics mode
16-17
Double-click on
action defined 1-3
Double-click 3-15
rate 8-5
Drag
action defined 1-3
Drawing 26-2
3-D 27-2
box 27-1
brush 26-4
circle 27-2
curve 27-2
curves F-2
eraser 26-5

Index-7

IIIII Index
filled box 27-4
lines F-2, 27-2
oval 27-2
pencil 26-3
polygons F-2
rounded box 27-2
shapes F-2
window 24-3
Drive icons 3-3
Drop-down menu 1-7
DUMP command 39-8
Duplicate command 19-14
E
Early ring text box 20-6
ECHO command 32-39
Edit menu 18-5, 18-13, 19-10,28-3
commands 28-3
Clear 28-5
Copy 28-4
Cut 28-4
Erase 28-4
Flip Horizontal 28-5
Flip Vertical 28-5
Invert 28-5
Paste 28-4
special effects 28-5
Trace Edges 28-5
Edit Pattern command 28-11
Editing
a selection 27-6
detailed 27-8
in day view
in Calendar 20-3
in Notepad 18-5
keys 36-1
PIF C-5
special effects 27-7
text
in Calendar 20-4
in Cardfile 19-8
EDLIN command 32-41
Emulators
comparison table 9-2, 10-1
ReGIS graphics 14-1
DECgraph 14-1
DECslide 14-1
SETHOST command 9-1
VT220 emulator 9-1

Index-8

VT240 emulator 9-1
End key 7-5
End Session command 3-9, 3-15
ENTER command 39-10
Entering
appointments in Calendar 20-3
VT220 Set-Up 12-1
F3 (Set-Up)
12-2
Set-Up command 12-2
VT240 Set-Up 16-1
Erase command 28-4
ERASE command 32-42
Eraser 26-5
ESC key 6-2, 6-5
EXE2BIN command 32-43
EXIT command 32-45, 34-23
Exiting
MS-Windows 29-5
Set-Up selections
Exit VT240
16-9
standard applications 3-15
VT220 Set-Up 12-5
VT240 emulator 14-4
VT240 Set-Up 16-5
VT240
Ctrl/FI0 15-1
Exit key 15-1
Expand defined 1-3
Extensions section B-8
External commands
characteristics 29-1
with MS-Windows 29-2
F
Fast Text Only mode
viewing columns 16-17
Shift/left arrow 16-17
Shift/right arrow 16-17
FC command 32-46
FCBS command 1-7
FDISK command 32-49
File menu 3-4,3-5,3-6,4-4, 18-10,
18-12, 18-13, 18-14, 19-14, 19-16,
19-17, 26-8, 28-1
commands 3-6, 28-1
NEW 28-2
OPEN 28-2
Print 28-2
Save As 28-2

Index
Save 2S-2
File names 6-6
characters in 30-S
illegal 30-S
keyboard procedure 6-S
File specifications
foreign 34-5
remote 34-5
FILES command I-S
Files 4-1
appending 34-11
batch 3-13
canceling selected files 6-14
canceling selected 4-2
concatenating 4-6
copying 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 34-14
defined 4-1
deleting 4-6,4-7, 34-20
displaying contents 34-29
extension
defined 3-6
View menu 3-S
in Calendar 20-13
in Cardfile
19-14
in Notepad
lS-10
keyboard procedure 6-14
listing 5-5
name 7-6
naming 4-1,30-7
printing 4-7,34-25
renaming 4 -1 2
selecting multiple 4-2
selecting 4-2
keyboard procedure 6-14, 6-15
starting the emulator
VT240
14-2
VT240CM1
14-2
VT240CM2
14-2
support 30-3
temporary 3-13
types of 34-6
FILL command 39-13
Filling a shape 27-5
Filters 3S-3
Find command lS-9, 19-12
FIND command 32-50
Find dialog box
lS-9, 19-12
Find Next command
lS-9, 19-12
Finding text

IIIII

in Cardfile
19-12
in Notepad lS-9
Fine Grid command 2S-10
Finishing
applications
keyboard procedure 6-S, 6-9
MS-DOS programs 3-15
MS-Paint 26-S
MS-Windows 3-15
standard applications 7-5
Flip Horizontal command 27-7, 2S-5
Flip Vertical command 2S-5
FONT command G-3, 32-53
Font menu 2S-5
commands 2S-5
Fonts section B-27
FontSize menu 2S-5
commands 2S-5
Fonts
adding S-ll
deleting S-13
device S-12
raster S-ll
stroke S-ll
vector S-ll
FOR command 32-56
FORMAT command 32-5S
Format Data Disk command 3-9, 5-S
Formatting
diskettes H-1
text
in Cardfile 19-4
in Notepad
lS-3
the hard disk 31-9
Freehand polygon 27-2
G
Get Info command 3-6, 4-4, 4-13
Getting help
for NFT 34-24
on-line information system 29-4
GO command 39-15
Go To command
in Cardfile 19-7
dialog box 19-7
GOTO command 32-61
GRAFTABL command G-3, 32-62
GRAPHICS command 32-63

Index-9

11111 Index

H
Hard disk
copying files to 31-10
copying system files 31-9
formatting 3 1-9
initializing 3 1-6
partition sizes 31-6
partitioning 31-6
preparing 31-1
repartitioning 31-10
setting drive type 31-2
setting start-up partition 31-S
what it is 31-1
HELP command 34-24
Help
Information System 29-4
HEX command 39-17
Hierarchical directory structure 30-4
High command 4-10
Highlight. I-S, 3-3
Hints for Reversi 23-3
Home key 7-5
Hourglass 3-13, 5-9
I
110 activities

7-1
Icon area 3-3
Icon command 1-7, 2-14
keyboard procedure 6-7, 6-9
Icons 2-14,3-3
expanding 7 -6
names 2-3
shrinking
keyboard procedure 6-9
standard applications 7-3
IF command 32-66
Illegal file names 30-S
Image file
see Binary file 34-6
Index command 19-7
Index dialog box 19-3, 19-7
Index line
in Cardfile 19-3
Industry standard compose 36-4
Information System 1-4, 1-5
Initial Directory option C-7
Initializing hard disk 31-6
INPUT command 39-1S
Insertion point

Index-lO

in Cardfile 19-5
in Notepad IS-5
Installation Aid C-1
Installation menu S-3, S-6
Internal commands
characteristics 29-1
with MS-Windows 29-3
International section B-1S
Invert command 2S-5

J
JOIN command

32-6S

K
KB Desired C-S
KB Required C-S
Key diskette 3-1
KEYB command G-3,32-70
Keyboard labels
VT220 emulator 11-2
VT240 emulator 15-1
Keyboard procedure 6-1
canceling commands 6-5
canceling selected files 6-14
changing window sizes 6-16
closing applications 6-9
commands 6-4
copying E-1
creating multiple copies E-1
dialog box 6-10, 6-11
closing 6-11
features 6-1
finishing applications 6-S
loading applications 6-6
menus 6-4
moving windows 6-17
multiple windows 6-16
receiving messages 6-lS
removing menus 6-5
running applications 6-7, 6-S
scrolling 6-12, E-1
standard applications 7-4
selecting commands 6-4
selecting files 6-14, 6-15
shrinking icons 6-9
size box 6-16
Size command 6-16
switching windows 6-16
transferring information 7-7

Index
using MS-Paint F-l
Zoom command 6-17
Keyboard setting command 8-20,
8-22
Keyboards
country 11-1, 15-1
VT220 emulator 11-2
VT240 emulator 15-1
Keys
Alt/Fll
VT240 emulator 17-4
Alt/Fl2
VT240 emulator 17-5
Alt/Prt Sc 7-7,7-9
AltfReturn 6-17
Alt/spacebar 6-2, 6-4
Alt/Tab/Shift 6-2
AltjTab 6-2,6-7,6-9,7-6
Alt 6-2,6-3
Arrow/Shift 6-3
Arrow 6-2, 6-4, 6-6, 6-8, 6-10,
6-12,6-14,7-4
backspace A-6
Compose A-3, A-6
Ctrl/Arrow 6-2
CtrljBreak 6-2, 6-11
Ctrl E-l
End 7-5
ESC 6-2,6-5
function keys
Ctrl/FI0 15-3
Ctrl/F2 15-3
Ctrl/F5 11-3, 15-3
FlO (Exit)
15-3
F11 (ESC)
11-3, 15-3
Fl2 (BS)
11-3, 15-4
F13 (LF)
11-3, 15-4
F2 (Print Screen)
11-2,15-3
F3 (Set-Up)
11-3, 15-3
F4 (datajTalk) 11-3
F4 (DatajTalk)
15-3
F5 (Break)
11-3, 15-3
Shift/F2 15-3
Shift/F5 11-3, 15-3
VT220 emulator 11-2
VT240 emulator 15-2
Home 7-5
Line feed 34-9
Page Down (Pg Dn) 7-5

IIIII

Page Up (Pg Up) 7-4
Return/Shift 6-3
Return 6-2, 6-6, 6-8, 6-10, 6-11
Shift/Ctrl F-2
ShiftjNext
VT240 emulator 16-13
Shift/Prev
VT240 emulator 16-13
ShiftjTab 6-10, P-2
Shift 4-2, 6-2, A-3, E-l
Shitf/Prt Sc 6-18
spacebar 6-2, 6-9
Tab 6-3,6-10,8-4, F-2
VT240 emulator
arrow keys 16-4
Next screen 16-4
Previous screen 16-4
Select 16-4
Word Char 5-3, 6-3

L
LABEL command 32-72
LASTDRlVE command 1-9
LCOUNTRY command G-4, 32-74
Leaving the VT220 emulator 10-4
Close command 10-4
Icon command 10-4
Left mouse button 8-24
Lines
drawing F-2
List command 19-20
Listing
file names 5-5
remote network connections 33-8
Load command 3-6, 3-10, 6-6
LOAD command 39-19
Loading applications
keyboard procedure 6-6
Local files
copying to a remote node 34-8,
34-19
providing access 34-1
Logical devices 33-5
Long command 3-8
Low command 4-10
M
Make System Disk command
Making a selection 27-6

3-9, 5-9

Index-ll

IIIII Index
Mark command 7·7, 20·12
Marking
information 7·7
dates in Calendar 20·12
Match Case command 18·9
MDRlVE command 32·76
Medium Grid command 28·10
Memory Requirements option C·8
Memory 2·2, 7·1, 7·10, C·2, C·8,
C·15
in Calculator 21·3
Menu bar 3·3, 24·3
Menus
Alarm 20·6
Card 19·5
Control 4·10,4·11
drop·do~
1·7
Edit 18·5, 18·13, 19·10,28·3
File 3·5, 4·4, 18·10, 18·12, 18·13,
18·14, 19·14, 19·16, 19·17, 26·8,
28·1
Font 28·5
FontSize 28·5
Installation 8·3, 8·6
MS·Paint 28·1
Options 20·10, 28·9
Palette 26· 7, 28·8
Preferences 8·3, 8·20
Priority 4·10
Search 18·9, 19·7, 19·12
selecting
keyboard procedure 6·4
Setup 8·3, 8·14
Show 20·9
Special menu 3·4
Special 3·9
Style 28·5
System menu 3·4
System 3·4, 7·7, 18·10, 19·14,
26·8
View menu 3·4
View 3·7
Merge command 19·20
Merge dialog box 19·20
Merging files in Cardfile 19·20
Messages 40·1
applications 2·18
MKDIR command 32· 78
MODE command 32·79

Index· 12

Month command 20·8
Month view
in Calendar 20·8
MORE command 32·90,38·3
Mouse
actions defined
click 1·3
double·click 1·3
drag 1·3
point 1·3
cursor 24·3
settings command 8·20, 8·24
MOVE command 39·21
Move command 1· 7
keyboard procedure 6· 7, 6·17
Moving
cards in Cardfile 19·7
text
in Cardfile 19·10, 19·11
in Notepad 18·8
through card files 19·5
windows 2·6
MS·DOS commands 3·14
ANSI 32·6
APPEND 32·7
ASSIGN 32·9
ATIRIB 32·11
BACKUP 32·13
BREAK 32·17
CHDIR 32·18
CHKDSK 32·19
CLS 32·21
COMMAND 32·22
COPY 32·24
CTIY 32·31
DATE 32·32
DEL 32·34
DIR 32·35
DISKCOPY 32·37
ECHO 32·39
EDLIN 32·41
ERASE 32·42
EXE2BIN 32·43
EXIT 32·45
FC 32·46
FDISK 32·49
FIND 32·50
FONT G·3, 32·53
FOR 32·56

Index 11111
FORMAT 32-58
GOTO 32-61
GRAFTABL G-3, 32-62
GRAPHICS 32-63
IF 32-66
JOIN 32-68
KEYB G-3, 16-21,32-70
VT240 emulator 16-10
LABEL 32-72
LCOUNTRY G-4, 32-74
MDRIVE 32-76
MKDIR 32-78
MODE 32-79
MORE 32-90
PATH 32-93
PAUSE 32-95, 37-1
PERMIT 32-97, 33-17
PRINT 32-98
PROMPT 32-102
RECOVER 32-104
REM 32-106,37-1
REN 32-107
RESTORE 32-108
RMDIR 32-110
SELECT G-4, 32-111
SET 32-115
SET HOST 9-1
SHARE 32-117
SHIFT 32-118
SORT G-4,32-120
SUBST 32-123
SYS 32-125
TIME 32-127
TYPE 32-128
VER 32-130
VERIFY 32-131
VOL 32-132
MS-DOS Executive window 3-1,3-2,
18-12, 19-16, 20-14
changing directories 5-2, 5-3
components 3-2, 3-3
CONTROL.EXE 8-2
creating directories 5-4
cursor 3-3
deleting directories 5-7
directories 5-1
disk drives 5-11
diskettes 5-8
displaying disks 5-11

displaying multiple directories
drive icons 3-3
first window 1-2
highlight 3-3
icon area 3-3
icons 3-3
listing directories 3-3
menu bar 3-3
naming disks 5 -10
path name 3-3, 5-1
path 3-3
preparing disks 5-8
printing directory listings 5-6
scroll bars 3-3
size box 3-3
System menu box 3-3
title bar 3-3
work area 3-3
MS-DOS operating system 3-16
WIN_INI
VT220 emulator 13-2
MS-DOS programs 3-14
MS-Paint commands
Align Center 28-7
Align Right 28-7
Align 28-7
Clear 28-5
Coarse Grid 28-10
Copy 27-7, 28-4
Create 28-1
Cut 28-4
Edit Pattern 28-11
Erase 28-4
Fine Grid 28-10
Flip Horizontal 27-7, 28-5
Flip Vertical 28-5
Invert 28-5
Medium Grid 28-10
New 28-2
No Grid 28-10
Opaque 28-7
Open 28-2
Paste 27-7, 28-4
Patterns 27-4, 27-5
Print 28-1, 28-2
Save As 28-2
Save 28-1, 28-2
special effects 28-5
Trace Edges 28-5

5-6

Index-13

11111 Index

Transparent 28-7
Undo 28-4
Zoom In 27-8, 28-10
Zoom Out 27-9, 28-10
MS-Paint 24-1,26-1
MS-Windows commands
About 1-7,3-4, C-3
Add New Font 8-6, 8-11
Add New Printer 8-6, 8-7
All 3-8
By Date 3-8
By Kind 3-8
By Name 3-8
By Size 3-8
Change Directory 3-9, 5-2
Close 1-7,3-15,4-13,6-9,7-3
VT220 emulator 10-4
Communications Port 8-14
Connections 8-7, 8-14
Copy 2-17, 3-6, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 5-4,
7-7, 7:8
VT220 emulator 10-4
Country settings 8-20, 8-25
Create Directory 3-9, 5-4
Cut 2-17
Delete Font 8-6, 8-13
Delete Printer 8-6, 8-10
Delete 3-6, 4-4, 4-6, 5-7
End Session 3-9, 3-15
Format Data Disk 3-9, 5-8
Get Info 3-6, 4-4, 4-13
High 4-10
Icon 1-7,2-14,6-7,6-9
VT220 emulator 10-4
Keyboard settings 8-20, 8-22
Load 3-6, 3-10, 6-6
Long 3-8
Low 4-10
Make System Disk 3-9, 5-9
Mark 7-7
VT220 emulator 10-4
Mouse settings 8-20, 8-24
Move 1-7,6-7,6-17
Network Terminal Services 8-14
New C-5
Partial 3-8, 5-5
Paste 2-17, 7-7, 7-8
VT220 emulator 10-4
Pause 4-11

Index-14

Print 3-6,4-4,4-7,5-6,8-15
Printer 8-14, 8-15
Programs 3-8
Rename 3-6,4-4,4-12
Resume 4-11
Run 3-6,3-12,3-14,5-6,6-8,7-6,
8-2, C-4
configuration files 13-2
VT220 emulator 10-2
VT240 emulator 14-2
Screen colors 8-20
selecting
keyboard procedure 6-4
Set Volume Name 3-9, 5-10
Short 3-8
Size 1-7,2-9,2-12,6-16
Terminate 4-11
Zoom 1-7,2-13,2-14,6-17
MS-Windows 3-15
eXiting 29-5
finishing 3-15
standard applications 7-5
initialization file 18-1
MS-DOS Executive window 18-1,
18-12, 19-1, 19-16,20-1,20-14,
21-1,22-1,23-1
restarting 3-16
returning 7 -6
using external commands with
29-2
using internal commands with
29-3
MSDOS.EXE 5-6

N
NAME command 39-23
Naming files 30-7
NET CLEAR command 33-13
NET CONTINUE command 33-11
NET DEFINE command 33-13
NET HELP command 33-4
NET LIST command 33-14
NET PAUSE command 33-10
NET PRINT command 33-9
NET START LAT command 33-15
NET TEST command 33-15
NET TIME command 33-16
NET USE command 33-6
NET.EXE 3-14

Index 11111
Network commands
NET CLEAR 33-13
NET CONTINUE 33-11
NET DEFINE 33-13
NET HELP 33-4
NET LIST 33-14
NET PAUSE 33-10
NET PRINT 33-9
NET START !AT 33-15
NET TEST 33-15
NET TIME 33-16
NET USE 33-6
Network File Transfer (NFT) utility
34-1
Network Terminal Services command
S-14
Network Terminal Services
MSNET .INI 16-13
VT220 emulator 12-9, 12-10
VT240 emulator 14-3, 16-10,
16-11
Network
changing drives 33-9
connecting 3-15,33-4
directory 33-7
remote printer 33-7
resource 33-6
disconnecting 3 -1 5
from remote directory 33-12
from remote printer 33-12
from resources 33-12
listing remote connections 33-S
logical devices 33-5
physical devices 33-5
printing a file
33-9
specifying device names 33-5
temporarily disconnecting 33-10
what a network is 33-2
New command C-5, IS-II, 19-15,
20-13, 23-3, 2S-2
NFT commands
APPEND 34-11
COPY 34-14
DELETE 34-20
DIRECTORY 34-21
EXIT 34-23
HELP 34-24
PRINT 34-25
SET 34-26

SHOW 34-27
SUBMIT 34-2S
TYPE 34-29
using 34-S
NFT qualifiers
/NOCONVERT 34-7
for COpy 34-14
for DELETE 34-20
for DIRECTORY 34-21
for HELP 34-24
for PRINT 34-25
for SUBMIT 34-2S
NFT 34-1
abbreviating
commands 34-9
qualifiers 34-9
eXiting from 34-2, 34-23
getting help 34-24
starting 34-2
using long commands 34-9
No Grid command 2S-10
Nonstream file system 34-7
Notepad commands
About
lS-10
Clear
IS-7
Copy lS-5, IS-S
Cut
IS-5, IS-S
Delete
IS-15
Find Next lS-9
Find
IS-9
Match Case
IS-9
New lS-11
Open command IS-13
Open
lS-12
Paste
IS-5, IS-S
Print
IS-15
Save As
lS-14
Save
IS-15
Select All
IS-7
Time/Date
IS-13
Undo
IS-7
Notepad files
lS-10
deleting lS-15
file size
lS-10
opening files
IS-II
opening
IS-II
printing
lS-15
saving changes lS-15
saving
IS-14

Index-15

IIIII Index
viewing 18- 13
Notepad window IS-II
Notepad B-3
canceling edits IS-7
copying text IS-S
deleting files
IS-15
deleting text IS-7
editing IS-5
finding text 18-9
formatting text IS-3
insertion point 18-5
introducing IS-1
moving text IS-S
opening files
IS-II
printing files
18-15
saving changes 18-15
saving files
IS- 14
scroll bars
IS-4
scrolling IS-4
selecting text 18-6, 18-7
starting 18-1
time log file
IS-13
typing text 18-2
viewing files
18-13
window 18-2
Num Lock 6-12

o
Opaque command 28-7
Open command 18-12, IS-13, 19-16,
19-17,20-14,20-15,28-2
Open dialog box IS-12, 18-13,
19-16, 19-17,20-14,20-15
Opening
files
in Calendar 20-13,20-14
in Cardfile 19-15
in Notepad IS-II
Operating system
commands 32-1
Options menu 20-10, 2S-9
commands 28-9
Coarse Grid 2S-10
Edit Pattern 2S-11
Fine Grid 28-10
Medium Grid 2S-10
No Grid 28-10
Zoom In 28-10
Zoom Out 28-10

Index-16

OUTPUT command

39-26

p
Page Down (Pg Dn) key 7-5
Page Up (Pg Up) key 7-4
Palette menu 26-7, 2S-S
commands 28-S
Palettes 26-7
Partial command 3-8, 5-5
Partitioning hard disk 31-6
Pass command 23-2
Password 34-3
Paste command 2-17, 7-7, 7-S, IS-5,
IS-S, 19-10, 19-11, 19-12, 19-13,
20-5,21-4,27-7,28-4
Pasting 2-16
PATH command 32-93
Path name 3-3,5-1,30-5
changing directories 5-3
Paths 3-3, 30-5
used with external commands 30-7
Patterns command 27-4, 27-5
Patterns
adding 27-4
Pause command 4-11
PAUSE command 32-95, 37-1
PERMIT command 32-97,33-17
Physical devices 33-5
Picture command 19-13
PIF section B-13
PIF 7-2
changing C-l 5
Close Window on exit option C-12
closing standard applications 7-4
contents C-13
creating C-4
customized C-2
default settings C-13
defined C-l
Directly Modifies Memory option
7-10
Directly Modifies option C-9
editing C-5
editor C-3
getting help C-3
Initial Directory option C-7
KB Desired C-S
KB Required C-S
Memory Requirements option C-S

Index 11111
options C-5
Program Name option C-6
Program Parameters option C-6
Program Switch option 7-6, C-11
Program Title option C-6
running applications C-2
Screen Exchange option C-12
standard applications 7-2
Pipes 38-3
Playing Reversi 23-3
Point
action defined 1-3
Polygon F-2
freehand 27-2
Pop-up program 7-11
Ports section B-16
Preferences menu 8-3
commands
Country settings 8-20, 8-25
Keyboard settings 8-20, 8-22
Mouse settings 8-20, 8-24
Screen Colors 8-20
Screen colors 8-20
Print command 3-6, 4-4, 4-7, 5-6,
18-15, 19-19,20-17,28-1,28-2
default printer 8-15
PRINT command 32-98, 34-25
Print dialog box 20-17
Print queue 4-9
Printer command 8-14, 8-15
Printer connections 8-14
Printer driver files 8-7
Printers
adding 8-6, 8-7, 8-9
removing 8-10
Printing
cards in Cardfile
19-19
default printer 4-8
directory listings 5-6
files 4-7,33-9
in Calendar 20-17
in Cardfile 19-19
in Notepad 18-15
graphics mode 4-11
in MS-Paint 26-8
MS-DOS files 34-25
print queue 4-9
screens 6-18
Priority menu 4-10

Program Information Editor window
C-4
Program Name option C-6
Program Parameters option C-6
Program Switch option C-11
Program Title option C-6
Programs command 3-8
PROMPT command 32-102
Prompts
NFT 34-2, 34-9
operating system symbol 30-2
Prt Sc key 36-4
PTRACE command 39-27

Q
Question mark
as a wildcard
QUIT command

30-9
39-29

R
Recall Set-Up Parameters
Actions Set-Up screen
VT220 emulator 13-3
VT240 emulator 17-3
Recalling
Set-Up files
VT220 emulator 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-2
settings
VT220 emulator 13-3
VT240 emulator 17-3
Receiving characters from a host
session logging 13-3, 13-4, 17-4
RECOVER command 32-104
Redirecting output 38-2
REGISTER command 39-30
REM command 32-106, 37-1
Remote files
accessing 34-1
copying to a local node 34-7
Remove command 20-18
Remove dialog box 20-18
Removing
days in Calendar 20-18
menus
keyboard procedure 6-5
printers 8-10
REN command 32-107
Rename command 3-6, 4-4, 4-12

Index-17

IIIII Index
Renaming files 4-12
Repartitioning hard disk 31-10
Reserved words 30-2
Resources 7-2
Restarting MS-Windows 3-16
Restore command 19-13
RESTORE command 32-108
Restoring cards in Cardfile 19-13
Resume command 4-11
Return key 6-2,6-6,6-8,6-10,6-11
Return/Shift key 6-3
Returning to MS-Windows 7-6
Reversi commands
New 23-3
Pass 23-2
Reversi window 23-2
Reversi
hints 23-3
introducing 23-1
playing 23-3
rules 23-2
starting new games 23-3
starting 23-1
Right mouse button 8-24
RMDIR command 32-110
Root directory 30-4
Rules for Reversi 23-2
Run command 3-6,3-12,3-14,5-6,
7 -6, 8-2, C-4
keyboard procedure 6-8
Running applications
file name 3-11,3-13
Running
applications C-2
keyboard procedure 6-6, 6-7,
6-8
Control Panel 8-1
multiple standard applications 7-5
standard applications
large 7-10
outside windows 7-5

S
Save As command 18-14, 19-18,
20-16, 28-2
Save As dialog box 18-14, 19-18,
20-16
Save command 18-15, 19-19, 20-17,
28-1, 28-2

Index-18

Save Set-Up Parameters
Actions Set-Up screen
VT220 emulator 13-3
VT240 emulator 17-2
Saving
changes
in Calendar 20-17
in Cardfile 19-19
in Notepad 18-15
files
in Calendar 20-15
in Cardfile 19-18
in Notepad 18-14
Set-Up files
VT220 emulator 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-2
settings
VT220 emulator 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-2, 17-3
Scratch pad 20-4, 20-12
Screen colors command 8-20
Screen Exchange option C-12
Screens
printing 6-18
Scroll arrow 1-6
Scroll bars 1-5,3-3, 18-4
Scroll box 1-6, 19-6
Scrolling E-l, 27-10
defined 1-5
in Calendar 20-3, 20-7
in Cardfile 19-6
in Notepad 18-4
keyboard procedure 6-12
mouse procedure 1-5
standard applications 7-4
keyboard procedure 7 -4
VT220 emulator window 10-3
VT220 keys
Ctrl/Find 10-3
Ctrl/Next 10-3
Ctrl/Prev 10-3
Ctrl/Select 10-3
SEARCH command 39-33
Search For text box 18-9
Search menu 18-9, 19-7, 19-12
Select All command 18-7
SELECT command G-4, 32-111
Selecting

Index 11111
command buttons
keyboard procedure 6-11
commands
keyboard procedure 6-4
default printer 8-15
files 4-2
Keyboard procedure 6-14
keyboard procedure 6-15
information for transfer 7-7
menus
keyboard procedure 6-4
multiple files 4-2
text
in Calendar 20-4
in Cardfile 19-9
in Notepad 18-6, 18-7
times
in Calendar 20-3
Selection Net 27-6
Selection Rectangle 27 -6, 28-5
Selection
copying E-l
editing 27-6
making 27-6
Serial communications
integral modem
VT220 emulator 12-10
Integral Modem
VT240 emulator 16-11
Modem Control
VT220 emulator 12-10
VT240 emulator 16-11
VT220 emulator 12-9, 12-10
VT240 emulator 16-10, 16-11
Server
what it is 33-3
SET command 32-115, 34-26
Set Volume Name command 3-9, 5-10
Set-Up screens
current selection settings
VT220 emulator 12-2
menu bar
VT220 emulator 12-2
status section
VT220 emulator 12-2
title bar
VT220 emulator 12-2
VT220 emulator
Actions 12-6, 16-7

Communications 12-9, 16-10
Display 12-12, 16-14
General 12-14, 16-19
Keyboard 12-17, 16-22
Printer 12-20, 16-26
Tabs 12-22, 16-28
Telephone
12-25, 16-31
Set-Up selections
Disconnect Delay
VT240 emulator 16-13
Answerback Concealed
VT220 emulator 12-20
Answerback String
VT220 emulator 12-20
VT240 emulator 16-25
Answerback
VT240 emulator 16-25
Auto Answerback
VT220 emulator 12-20
VT240 emulator 16-25
Auto Repeat
VT240 emulator 16-26
Auto Wrap
VT220 emulator 12-14
VT240 emulator 16-16
Background
VT220 emulator 12-14
VT240 emulator 16-16
Blink
VT220 emulator 12-14
Break
VT220 emulator 12-19
VT240 emulator 16-24
Caps Lock
VT240 emulator 16-26
Clear All Tabs
VT220 emulator 12-23
VT240 emulator 16-29
Clear Communications
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Clear Display
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Columns
VT220 emulator 12-13
VT240 emulator 16-16
Cursor Keys
VT220 emulator 12-19

Index-19

IIIII Index
VT240 emulator 16-24
Cursor Style
VT220 emulator 12-14
VT240 emulator 16-16
Data Bits and Parity
VT220 emulator 12-12
VT240 emulator 16-13
Disconnect Delay
VT220 emulator 12-12
Exit VT240
VT240 emulator 16-9
Font Size
VT220 emulator 12-14
Keyclick
VT240 emulator 16-26
Keypad Mode
VT220 emulator 12-19
VT240 emulator 16-24
Line mode
VT220 emulator 12-15
Line Mode
VT240 emulator 16-21
Local Echo
VT220 emulator 12-15
VT240 emulator 16-21
MO-M3 degrees of gray
VT240 emulator 16-16
Manually Set Tabs
VT220 emulator 12-23
VT240 emulator 16-29
Margin Bell
VT220 emulator 12-19
VT240 emulator 16-24
Modem Answer
VT220 emulator 13-1
VT240 emulator 17-1
Monochrome
VT240 emulator 16-16
Multinational Character Set
VT220 emulator 12-17
VT240 emulator 16-21
Multinational Mode
VT220 emulator 12-15
VT240 emulator 16-22
Network Communications Port
VT240 emulator 16-12
Network Terminal Services
VT220 emulator 12-12
New Line

Index-20

VT220 emulator 12-15
VT240 emulator 16-21
Port/Network
VT220 emulator 12-11
Print Extent
VT220 emulator 12-22
VT240 emulator 16-28
Print File Name
VT240 emulator 16-28
Print Mode
VT220 emulator 12-22
VT240 emulator 16-28
Print Size
VT220 emulator 12-22
Print Terminator
VT240 emulator 16-28
Printer Type
VT240 emulator 16-28
Recall Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Receive File
VT220 emulator 12-9
Reset Terminal
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Save Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Send File
VT220 emulator 12-9
Set 8 Column Tabs
VT220 emulator 12-23
VT240 emulator 16-29
Set Default Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Set Tab Intervals
VT240 emulator 16-29
Set Tab Interval
VT220 emulator 12-23
Shift Lock
VT240 emulator 16-26
Show Status
VT240 emulator 16-9
Speed
VT220 emulator 12-12
VT240 emulator 16-13
Stop Bits

Index 11111
Vf220 emulator 12-12
Vf240 emulator 16-13
Telephone Numbers 17-1
Vf220 emulator 13-1
Terminal Emulation
Vf220 emulator 12-17
Vf240 emulator 16-22
TerminallD
Vf220 emulator 12-17
Text & Graphics Video Mode
Vf240 emulator 16-16
Text Cursor
Vf220 emulator 12-14
Vf240 emulator 16-16
To MS-DOS
Vf240 emulator 16-9
Transmit = Receive
Vf240 emulator 16-13
User Defined Keys
Vf220 emulator 12-17
Vf240 emulator 16-22
User Features
Vf220 emulator 12-17
Vf240 emulator 16-22
Video Mode
VT240 emulator 16-16
Warning Bell
Vf220 emulator 12-19
Vf240 emulator 16-24
XOFF Point
Vf220 emulator 12-12
Vf240 emulator 16-13
Setting
Clock 22-2
hard disk drive type 3 1-2
hard disk start-up partition 31-8
tabs manually
Vf220 emulator 12-23
Vf240 emulator 16-29
Setup menu 8-3
commands
Communications Port 8-14
Connections 8-14
Network Terminal Services 8-14
Printer 8-14,8-15
Shapes 27-2
drawing F-2
filling 27-5
functions 25-3

selecting F-2
summary 25-3
SHARE command 32-117
SHELL command 1-10
SHIFT command 32-118
Shift key 4-2, 6-2, A-3, E-1
Shift/Ctrl keys F-2
Shift/Tab 6-10, F-2
Short command 3-8
SHOW command 34-27
Show menu 20-9
Shrinking
description 1-14
Size box 2-11,2-12, 2-14, 3-3
keyboard procedure 6-16
Size command 1-7,2-9, 2-12
keyboard procedure 6-16
SORT command G-4, 32-120, 38-3
Source drive 30-3
Spacebar 6-2, 6-9
Special applications 7 -10
Special effects 28-5
commands 28-5
editing 27- 7
Special menu 3-4, 3-9
Change Directory 5-2
commands 3-9
Special Time command 20-11
Special Time dialog box 20-11
Special times
in Calendar 20-11
Specifying Vf220 configuration files on
startup
13-2
Spooler window 4-10
Spooler 4-8, 4-9
Control menu 4-10, 4-11
Priority menu 4-10
Starting the emulator
login information
Vf220 emulator 10-2
Vf240 emulator 14-3
Vf220 emulator 10-2
Run command 10-2
VT220 icon 10-2
Vf240 emulator 14-2
command format 14-3
from the MS-DOS operating system
14-3
Run command 14-2

Index-21

11111 Index

Starting
Calculator 21-1
Calendar 20-1
Cardfile 19-1
Clock 22-1
MS-Paint 26-1
new games in Reversi 23-3
Notepad 18-1
Reversi 23-1
standard applications
outside windows 7-6
Status section
autotyping
VT220 emulator 13-4
character set
VT240 emulator 16-10
communications
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-10
Insert/Replace modes
VT240 emulator 16-10
integral modem
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-9
keyboard
VT240 emulator 16-10
KEYB
VT240 emulator 16-10
printer
VT220 emulator 12-4
printing
VT240 emulator 16-9
receiving or sending files
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-9
telephone modes
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-9
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator
Show Status 16-9
Stream file system 34-6
Style menu 28-5
commands 28-5
Align Center 28-7
Align Right 28-7
Align 28-7
Opaque 28-7
Transparent 28-7

Index-22

Subdirectory 5-1
SUBMIT command 34-28
SUBST command 32-123
Support files 30-3
Switching
windows 2-6
keyboard procedure 6-16
SYS command 32-125
System diskette 5-9
System files
copying 31-9
System menu box 3-3, 3-4
double-clicking 3-15
System menu 1-14, 3-4, 7-7, 18-10,
19-14, 26-8
commands
About 1-7
Close 1-7, 1-14
Icon 1-7
Move 1-7
Size 1-7
Zoom 1-7

T
Tab key 6-3, 6-10, 8-4, F-2
Template 36-1
Temporarily disconnecting from the
network 33-10
Terminate command 4-11
Text command 19-13
Text 27-3
adding 27-3
files
18-11
in Notepad 18-2, 18-3
Tiling 2-2
TIME command 32-127
Time log file
18-13
Time/Date command 18-13
Title bar 3-3, 24-3
shrinking 2-15
Tools and shapes palette 24-3
Tools 27-2
Box 27-1,27-4
Fill 27-4
functions 25-2
Scroll 27-10
selecting F-2
Selection Net 27-6
Selection Rectangle 27-6

Index
summary 25-2
Text 27-3
TRACE command 39-35
Trace Edges command ~8-5
Transferring information
applications 7 -7
keyboard procedure 7 -7
windows 2-16
Transparent command 28-7
1YPE command 32-128, 34-29
Typing text
in Cardfile
19-4
in Notepad 18-2

U
UNASSEMBLE command 39-37
Understanding Set-Up screens
VT220 emulator 12-2
VT240 emulator 16-1
Undo command 18-7, 19-10, 28-4
Unmark command 20-13
Unmarking dates in Calendar 20-13
Username 34-3
Using external commands
with MS-Windows 29-2
Using internal commands
with MS-Windows 29-3
Using MS-DOS Executive window 3-2
Using Set-Up
VT220 emulator 12-1
table information 12-5
with a mouse 12-5
VT240 emulator 16-1
table information 16-6
with a keyboard 16-4
Using Setup menu 8-14
Using special features
VT220 emulator 13-1
VT240 emulator 17-1
Using the emulator
VT220 emulator 10-1
keyboard 11-1
multiple sessions 10-2
VT240 emulator 14-1
Using the keyboard
with the VT220 emulator D-1
AIt/down arrow D-l
AIt/left arrow D-1
AIt/right arrow D-1

IIIII

AIt/spacebar D-1
AIt/up arrow D-1
F3 (Set-Up)
E-1
Next D-l
Prev E-1
right and left arrow E-1
up and down arrow E-l
Using the VT220 emulator
multiple sessions 10-2
Using VT220 System menu commands
10-3
About command 10-4
Copy command 10-4
Mark command 10-4
Paste command 10-4
Set-Up command 10-3
Using VT240 video modes 16-17
Fast Text Only 16-17
Text & GraphiCS mode
16-17

V
VER command .32-130
VERIFY command 32-131
View menu 3-4, 3-7, 3-8
commands 3-8
Viewing
appointments in Calendar 20-7
dates in Calendar 20-8, 20-9
files
in Calendar 20-15
in Cardfile 19-17,19-20
in Notepad 18-13
times in Calendar 20-7
VOL command 32-132
Volume name 5-10
VT220 emulator keyboard 11-1, 11-2
VT240 double height/width
Fast Text Only 16-18
VT240 double width lines
Fast Text Only 16-18

W
Wildcards 5-5, 30-2, 30-8
asterisk 30-9
question mark 30-9
WIN.lNI 7-11, 8-1, B-1
adding printers 8-8
changing B-3
Colors section B-10

Index-23

11111

Index

Declnfo section B·24
DecKeybd section B·22
DecLAT section B·21
Devices section B·26
Extensions section B·8
Fonts section B·27
International section B·18
naming printers 8·6
PIF section B·13
Ports section B·16
sections B·2
Windows section B·4
Windows section B·4
Windows 1·1
active 2·6
changing sizes 2·9, 6·16
closing
standard applications 7·3
enlargening 2·9
keyboard procedure 6·16
filling the screen 2·13
keyboard procedure 6:}7
making smaller i.'f'2
keyboard procedure 6·16
moving 2·6
keyboard procedure 6·17
mulitple
keyboard procedure 6·16
multiple 2·2
receiving messages
keyboard procedure 6·18
shrinking 2·14
switching 1·1,2·6
keyboard procedure 6·16
tiling 2·2
transferring information 2·16
Word Char key 5·3, 6·3
Work area 3·3
Workstation resources 7·2
WRITE command 39·39

Z
Zoom command 1·7,2·13,2·14,6·17
Zoom In command 27·8, 28·10
Zoom Out command 27·9,28·10

Index· 24

Reader's Comments

VAXmate
User's Guide Volume 2
AA-HD97A-TK

Your comments on this manual will help improve our product quality and usefulness.
Please indicate the type of reader you most closely represent.

o First-time user
o Application user

0 Programmer

0 Experienced user

0 Other (please specify) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

How would you rate this manual for:
Completeness of Information
Accuracy of Information
Easy to Read/Use
Usefulness of Examples
Number of Examples
Illustrations
Table of Contents
Index
Format
Binding Style
Print Quality

Excellent

Good

Fair

Poor

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Did you find any errors in this manual? Please specify by page and paragraph.
Incorrect information:
Information left out:
Hard to understand:

What suggestions do you have for improving this manual? Attach a second sheet if
necessary.

Name_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Title_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Company
Dept. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Street
City_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
State/Country
Telephone

PostaljZip Code_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Date_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

· -

Do Not Tear· Fold Here and Tape No Postage

Necessary
if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO.33 MAYNARD MASS.

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS
200 FOREST STREET MROl-2 L 12
MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752

111 ••••• 11.11 •••• 11 •••• 1.11.1 •• 1.1 •• 1.1 •• 11 ••••• 1.11
1

Do Not Tear· Fold Here

- - - - - - - -I
1

I
I